Infiniti 2006-G35 Owners Manual

Foreword
Your INFINITI represents a new way of quired to keep the warranties in effect as
thinking about vehicle design. It inte- well as the INFINITI Roadside Assistance WARNING
grates advanced engineering and supe- program.
rior craftsmanship with a simple, refined Additionally, a separate Customer Care IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
aesthetic sensitivity associated with tra- and Lemon Law Information Booklet will REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!
ditional Japanese culture. explain how to resolve any concerns you
may have with your vehicle, as well as Follow these important driving rules to help
The result is a different notion of luxury
and beauty. The car itself is important, clarify your rights under your state’s ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and
but so is the sense of harmony that the lemon law. your passengers!
vehicle evokes in its driver, and the INFINITI is dedicated to providing a satis- O Never drive under the influence of alcohol
sense of satisfaction you feel with the fying ownership experience for as long as
INFINITI — from the way it looks and or drugs.
you own your car. Should you have any
drives to the high level of retailer service. questions regarding your INFINITI or an O Always observe posted speed limits and
INFINITI dealer, please contact our Con- never drive too fast for conditions.
To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to
the fullest, we encourage you to read this sumer Affairs department at: O Always use seat belts and child re-
Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains In U.S. 1-800-662-6200. straints. Pre-teen children should be
all of the features, controls and perfor- In Canada 1-800-361-4792. seated in the rear seat.
mance characteristics of your INFINITI; it READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE
also provides important instructions and O Always provide information about the
safety information.
SAFELY proper use of vehicle safety features to all
Before driving your vehicle please read occupants of the vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
your Owner’s Manual carefully. This will O Always review this Owner’s Manual for
can be found in your Owner’s literature
ensure familiarity with controls and main- important safety information.
portfolio. The INFINITI Service and Mainte-
tenance requirements, assisting you in
nance Guide explains details about main-
the safe operation of your vehicle.
taining and servicing your vehicle. Always
carry it with you when you take your
INFINITI to an authorized retailer. The
portfolio contents provide complete infor-
mation about all warranties covering this
vehicle, the periodic maintenance re-
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
This vehicle should not be modified. Modi- THIS MANUAL
fication could affect its performance, You will see various symbols in this
safety or durability, and may even violate manual. They are used in the following
governmental regulations. In addition, ways:
damage or performance problems re-
sulting from modifications may not be
covered under INFINITI warranties.
WARNING
WHEN READING THE MANUAL This is used to indicate the presence of a haz-
ard that could cause death or serious per-
This manual includes information for all sonal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the
options available on this model. There- procedures must be followed precisely.
fore, you may find some information that
does not apply to your vehicle. SIC0697
If you see this symbol, it means Do not do
All information, specifications and illus- CAUTION this or Do not let this happen.
trations in this manual are those in effect
at the time of printing. INFINITI reserves This is used to indicate the presence of a haz-
the right to change specifications or de- ard that could cause minor or moderate per-
sign at any time without notice. sonal injury or damage to your vehicle. To If you see a symbol similar to these in an
avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must illustration, it means the arrow points to
be followed carefully. the front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar

to these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar

to these call attention to an item in the il-
lustration.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro-
ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
BLUETOOTH is a trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc., U.S.A. and licenced to
Xanavi Informatics Corpora-
tion.
© 2005 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.

TOKYO, JAPAN
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manual may
be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or trans-
mitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, me-
chanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without
the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Table of Illustrated table of contents 0
Contents Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1
Instruments and controls 2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4
Starting and driving 5
In case of emergency 6
Appearance and care 7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8
Technical and consumer information 9
Index 10
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ........... 0-2 Sedan model............................................... 0-7
Exterior............................................................. 0-3 Coupe model .............................................. 0-8
Sedan model............................................... 0-3 Instrument panel .............................................. 0-9
Coupe model............................................... 0-5 Meters and gauges.......................................... 0-11
Passenger compartment ................................... 0-7 Engine compartment ....................................... 0-12
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(Page 1-36)
2. Front seat belts (P.1-9)
3. Front head restraints (P.1-8)
4. Supplemental side air bags (P.1-36)
5. Supplemental curtain side-impact air
bags (P.1-36)
6. Rear seat belts (P.1-9)
7. Rear head restraints (P.1-8)
8. Child restraint anchor points (for top
tether strap child restraint) (P.1-26)
9. Occupant classification sensor (pres-
sure sensor) (P.1-42)
10. Front seats (P.1-2)
11. Pre-tensioner seat belt system (P.1-50)
12. Rear seats (P.1-5)
— Child restraints (P.1-18)
13. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system (P.1-25)
SSI0161
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
EXTERIOR
SEDAN MODEL
1. Engine hood (P.3-24)
2. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P.2-21)
3. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P.2-19)
4. Windshield (P.8-21)
5. Sunroof* (P.2-42)
6. Power windows (P.2-39)
7. Recovery hook (P.6-15)
8. Fog light switch (P.2-25)
9. Front side marker light (P.8-33)
10. Tire pressure (P.8-37)
11. Flat tire (P.6-2)
12. Tire chains (P.8-44)
13. Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) (P.2-12, 5-3)
14. Mirrors (P.3-32)
15. Door locks, keyfob, keys (P.3-3)
16. Trunk lid (P.3-25)
17. Interior trunk lid release (P.3-27)
18. Rear window defogger switch (P.2-20)
19. Satellite antenna (P.4-14)
SSI0155 20. Fuel-filler door (P.3-28)
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
21. Rear combination light (P.8-33)
22. Child safety locks (P.3-5)
*: if so equipped
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
COUPE MODEL
1. Engine hood (P.3-24)
2. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P.2-21)
3. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P.2-19)
4. Windshield (P.8-21)
6. Power windows (P.2-39)
7. Recovery hook (P.6-15)
8. Fog light switch (P.2-25)
9. Front side marker light (P.8-33)
10. Tire pressure (P.8-37)
11. Flat tire (P.6-2)
12. Tire chains (P.8-44)
13. Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) (P.2-12, 5-3)
14. Mirrors (P.3-32)
15. Door locks, keyfob, keys (P.3-3)
16. Trunk lid (P.3-25)
17. Interior trunk lid release (P.3-27)
18. Rear window defogger switch
(P.2-20)
SSI0156 19. Fuel-filler door (P.3-28)
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
20. Rear combination light (P.8-33)
*: if so equipped
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
SEDAN MODEL
1. Automatic anti-glare mirror,
HomeLink (P.3-32, 2-46)
2. Sunglasses holder (P.2-32)
3. Interior lights (P.2-44)
5. Sun visor (P.3-32)
6. Power window switch/Power door
lock switch (P.2-39, 3-4)
7. Front seat (P.1-2)
8. Rear personal light (P.2-45)
9. Rear cup holder (P.2-34)
10. Armrest (P.1-9)
11. Selector lever
— Automatic transmission (P.5-12)
— Manual transmission (P.5-16)
12. Front cup holder (P.2-32)
13. Automatic drive positioner
switches* (P.3-34)
14. Console box (P.2-36)
15. Rear seat (P.1-5)
*: if so equipped
SSI0157
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
COUPE MODEL
1. Automatic anti-glare mirror, HomeLink
(P.3-32, 2-46)
2. Sunglasses holder (P.2-32)
3. Interior lights (P.2-44)
5. Sun visor (P.3-32)
6. Power window switch/Power door lock
switch (P.2-39, 3-4)
7. Front seat (P.1-2)
8. Coat hook (P.2-38)
9. Selector lever or Shift lever
— Automatic transmission (P.5-12)
— Manual transmission (P.5-16)
10. Parking brake (P.5-19)
11. Automatic drive positioner switches*
(P.3-34)
12. Front cup holder (P.2-32)
13. Console box (P.2-36)
14. Walk-in mechanism* (P.1-4)
15. Shoulder belt guide (P.1-17)
16. Rear cup holder (P.2-34)
17. Rear seat (P.1-5)
SSI0158 *: if so equipped
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. Center display - Compass, Air condi-

tioner, Ambient temperature, Front
passenger air bag status light (P.1-44)
10. Rear window and outside mirror de-
fogger switch (P.2-20)
11. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-10)
12. Clock (P.2-29)
13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)
(P.4-2)
14. Passenger’s supplemental front air
bag (P.1-36)
15. Upper glove box (except for Naviga-
tion system equipped models)
(P.2-35)
16. Side ventilator (P.4-9)
17. Hood lock release handle (P.3-24)
18. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-25)
19. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
switch (P.2-28)
20. Instrument brightness control
(P.2-24)
21. Outside mirror remote control switch
(P.3-33)
22. Fuse box (P.8-27)
23. Electric steering column control (if so
SSI0159 equipped) (P.3-31)
24. Manual steering column control
1. Headlight, fog light and turn signal 4. Driver’s supplemental front air bag (P.3-30)
switch (P.2-21) (P.1-36)/Horn (P.2-26) 25. Ignition switch/steering lock (P.5-6)
2. Security indicator light (P.2-19) 5. Meters/gauges (P.2-3) 26. SNOW mode switch (if so equipped)
3. Steering wheel switch for audio control 6. Cruise control main/set switch (P.5-20) (P.2-27)
(P.4-28) or steering wheel switch for 7. Windshield wiper/washer switch 27. Audio system (P.4-14)
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System (P.2-19) 28. Ashtray/Cigarette lighter (P.2-30)
(if so equipped) (P.4-30) 8. Center ventilator (P.4-9) 29. Heated seat switch (P.2-26)
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
30. Hazard warning flasher switch
(P.2-25)
31. Glove box (P.2-35)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
METERS AND GAUGES
1. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-9)

2. Tachometer (P.2-4)
3. Automatic transmission position indi-
cator (AT models) (P.5-12)/Manual
transmission up-shift indicator (MT
models) (P.5-16)
4. Speedometer (P.2-3)
5. Engine coolant temperature gauge
(P.2-4)
6. Trip odometer reset switch (P.2-3)
7. Odometer (Total/Twin trip) (P.2-3)/Up-
shift indicator setting (MT models)
8. Fuel gauge (P.2-5)
SSI0075
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
VQ35DE
1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-25)
2. Battery (P.8-16)
3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-10)
4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-14)
5. Clutch fluid reservoir (MT models)
(P.8-15)
6. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-13)
7. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-8)
8. Window washer fluid reservoir
(P.8-15)
9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-9)
10. Drive belts (P.8-19)
11. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-10)
12. Air cleaner (P.8-20)
SSI0160
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system
Seats ................................................................ 1-2 Top tether strap child restraint ................. 1-26
Front power seat adjustment ....................... 1-2 Child restraint installation on front
Rear seat adjustment ................................... 1-5 passenger seat .......................................... 1-28
Head restraint adjustment ........................... 1-8 Booster seats .................................................. 1-31
Active head restraint (front seats)................ 1-8 Precautions on booster seats ..................... 1-31
Armrest (if so equipped) .............................. 1-9 Booster seat installation on rear seat
Seat belts ......................................................... 1-9 outboard or center positions...................... 1-34
Precautions on seat belt usage.................... 1-9 Booster seat installation on front
Child safety ................................................ 1-12 passenger seat .......................................... 1-35
Pregnant women ........................................ 1-13
Supplemental restraint system........................ 1-36
Injured persons .......................................... 1-13
Precautions on supplemental restraint
Three-point type seat belt with retractor..... 1-13
system....................................................... 1-36
Seat belt extenders .................................... 1-17
INFINITI advanced air bag system (front
Seat belt maintenance................................ 1-17
Child restraints................................................ 1-18 seats) ........................................................ 1-42
Precautions on child restraints................... 1-18 Supplemental side air bag and curtain
Child restraint installation on rear seat side-impact air bag systems ...................... 1-48
outboard or center positions ..................... 1-20 Supplemental air bag warning labels.......... 1-51
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Supplemental air bag warning light............ 1-51
CHildren) SYSTEM ...................................... 1-25
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SEATS
FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
O Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
O Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in se-
rious accidents.
SSS0133B
Operating tips
WARNING O For the most effective protection when
O The seat motor has an auto-reset over-
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
load protection circuit. If the motor
O Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the be upright. Always sit well back in the
stops during operation, wait 30 sec-
seatback is reclined. This can be danger- seat and adjust the seat belt properly. onds, then reactivate the switch.
ous. The shoulder belt will not be See “Precautions on seat belt usage”
later in this section. O Do not operate the power seat for a
against your body. In an accident, you long period of time when the engine is
could be thrown into it and receive neck off. This will discharge the battery.
or other serious injuries. You could also
See “Automatic drive positioner” in the
slide under the lap belt and receive se-
“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments”
rious internal injuries. for automatic seat positioner operation (if
so equipped).
1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SSS0182C SSS0183
Forward and backward Reclining Seat lifter (Driver’s seat)

Moving the switch q 1 forward or back- Move the recline switch q 2 backward Pull the switch up or push it down to ad-
ward will slide the seat forward or back- until the desired angle is obtained. To just the angle and height of the seat.
ward to the desired position. bring the seatback forward again, move
the switch forward and move your body
forward. The seatback will move forward.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help ob-
tain proper seat belt fit. See “Precautions
on seat belt usage” later in this section.
The seatback may also be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle
is parked.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SSS0184 SSS0577
Lumbar support (Driver’s seat) Walk-in mechanism (Coupe) 3. Get in or out of the vehicle.
The lumbar support feature provides This feature makes it easier to get in and 4. Push the seatback switch q 3 again to
lower back support to the driver. Move out of the rear seat. return the front seat to its original po-
the lever up or down to adjust the seat Use the following procedure when getting sition and raise the seatback.
lumbar area. in and out of the rear seat. O The front passenger seat will stop at 7
1. Pull the seatback lever upward q 1 or in (175 mm) from its front most posi-
pull the walk-in lever q
2 on the side of tion to retain space for the rear pas-
the front seat upward to fold the front senger.
seatback down.
2. To slide the front seat forward, push CAUTION
the seatback switch q 3 below the
seatback lever. The front seat will O Do not raise the seatback before re-
move forward.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O When the selector lever is not in the P
turning the front seat to its original posi- (Park) position (Automatic transmis-
tion. sion model’s driver’s seat) or the
parking brake is not applied (Manual
O When returning the seat to its original transmission model’s driver’s seat).
position, confirm the seat and seatback
are locked properly. O When the door is closed.
O Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot O When the seat is raised or when the
seatback switch, recline switch or
or bump your head when operating the
slide switch is operated during auto-
walk-in seat. The seatback will fold down matic operation.
rapidly.
O Do not place any objects near the seat-
back of the front seats. They may be
SSS0185
pinched and damaged.
O Remove the seat belt from the seat belt REAR SEAT ADJUSTMENT
guide when operating the walk-in
Reclining (if so equipped)
mechanism to prevent the belt from
being stretched along with the seat 1. Pull the adjusting lever.
movement.
2. Tilt the seatback to the desired posi-
tion.
The automatic forwarding and reversing
3. Release the adjusting lever to lock the
will not work or stop under the following
seatback in position.
conditions:
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
O When the vehicle speed is above 4
the seatback for occupants of different
MPH (7 km/h). sizes for added comfort and to help ob-
O When the seat belt is fastened. tain proper seat belt fit. See “Precautions
on seat belt usage” later in this section.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
The seatback may also be reclined to To access the trunk:
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle
1. Fold down the rear center seatback
is parked.
q1 .
WARNING 2. Unlock the trunk access window lid

q2 .
O Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the To unlock, insert the master key or the
seatback is reclined. This can be danger- mechanical key (Intelligent Key
ous. The shoulder belt will not be equipped model) to the key cylinder
against your body. In an accident, you on the lid and turn it counterclockwise
could be thrown into it and receive neck
qA . Turning the key clockwise q B will
lock the lid.
or other serious injuries. You could also
slide under the lap belt and receive se- 3. Pull out the trunk access window lid
rious internal injuries. q3 .
O For the most effective protection when Remove the key when opening or closing
the trunk access window lid. Otherwise,
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
the trunk access window lid may be dam-
be upright. Always sit well back in the aged.
seat and adjust the seat belt properly.
See “Precautions on seat belt usage”
later in this section.
O After adjustment, gently rock in the seat SSS0551
to make sure it is securely locked.
Folding
Sedan:
The rear center seatback can be folded to
allow access to the trunk from inside the
vehicle.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SSS0220 SSS0219 SSS0553
Coupe: To return the seatback:

The rear seatback can be folded to allow WARNING 1. Fold up the rear seatback.
access to the trunk from the inside of the
2. Securely lock the seatback in position.
vehicle. Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo When the seatback is latched, the seat
To access the trunk:
higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop lock indicator q
A on the seatback will
1. Open the trunk lid. or collision, unsecured cargo could cause be lowered.
2. Pull the handle located on the left side personal injury.
of the trunk. The rear seatback will be
unlatched.
3. Fold the rear seatback down.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SSS0288 SSS0178A SSS0508
HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT Adjust the head restraints so the center is ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (front
level with the center of your ears. seats)
To raise the head restraint, just pull it up.
To lower, push the lock knob q 1 and push
the head restraint down. WARNING WARNING
Head restraints should be adjusted properly
O Always adjust the head restraints prop-
as they may provide significant protection
erly as specified in the previous section.
against injury in an accident. Do not remove
Failure to do so can reduce the effective-
them. Check the adjustment after someone
ness of the active head restraint.
else uses the seat.
O Active head restraints are designed to
supplement other safety systems. Al-
ways wear seat belts. No system can
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SEAT BELTS
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

prevent all injuries in any accident. USAGE
O Do not attach anything to the head re- If you are wearing your seat belt properly
straint stalks. Doing so could impair ac- adjusted, and you are sitting upright and
tive head restraint function. well back in your seat, your chances of
being injured or killed in an accident
and/or the severity of injury may be
The active head restraint moves forward
greatly reduced. INFINITI strongly encour-
utilizing the force that the seatback re-
ages you and all of your passengers to
ceives from the occupant in a rear-end
buckle up every time you drive, even if
collision. The movement of the head re-
your seating position includes a supple-
straint helps support the occupant’s head
mental air bag.
by reducing its backward movement and
helping absorb some of the forces that Most states, provinces or territories re-
may lead to whiplash type injuries. quire that seat belts be worn at all times
when a vehicle is being driven.
Active head restraints are effective for col-
lisions at low to medium speeds in which
it is said that whiplash injury occurs
most.
Active head restraints operate only in cer-
tain rear-end collisions. After the colli-
sion, the head restraints return to their
SSS0186
original positions.
Properly adjust the active head restraints
as described in the previous section. ARMREST (if so equipped)
Pull the armrest forward until it is hori-
zontal.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible around the hips, not the waist.
A lap belt worn too high could increase
the risk of internal injuries in an acci-
dent.
O Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
O Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its effec-
tiveness.
O Do not allow more than one person to
SSS0136A
use the same seat belt.
O Never carry more people in the vehicle
WARNING chance or severity of injury in an acci-
than there are seat belts.
dent. Serious injury or death can occur if
the seat belt is not worn properly. O If the seat belt warning light glows con-
O Every person who drives or rides in this
tinuously while the ignition is turned ON
vehicle should use a seat belt at all O Always route the shoulder belt over your
with all doors closed and all seat belts
times. Children should be properly re- shoulder and across your chest. Never
fastened, it may indicate a malfunction
strained in the rear seat and, if appropri- run the belt behind your back, under
in the system. Have the system checked
ate, in a child restraint. your arm or across your neck. The belt
by an INFINITI dealer.
O The seat belt should be properly ad- should be away from your face and neck,
but not falling off your shoulder. O Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has ac-
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may tivated, it cannot be reused and must be
reduce the effectiveness of the entire re- replaced together with the retractor. See
straint system and increase the an INFINITI dealer.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SSS0134A SSS0016
O Removal and installation of the pre- use during a collision should also be in-
tensioner seat belt system components spected and replaced if either damage or
should be done by an INFINITI dealer. improper operation is noted.
O All seat belt assemblies, including re- O All child restraints and attaching hard-
tractors and attaching hardware, should ware should be inspected after any colli-
be inspected after any collision by an sion. Always follow the restraint manu-
INFINITI dealer. INFINITI recommends facturer’s inspection instructions and re-
that all seat belt assemblies in use placement recommendations. The child
during a collision be replaced unless the restraints should be replaced if they are
collision was minor and the belts show damaged.
no damage and continue to operate
properly. Seat belt assemblies not in
SSS0014
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
CHILD SAFETY senger. See “Supplemental Restraint
Children need adults to help protect them.

WARNING System” later in this section for precau-
tions.
They need to be properly restrained.
Infants and children need special protection. Infants
In addition to the general information in The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them
this manual, child safety information is Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
properly. The shoulder belt may come too
available from many other sources, in- placed in a rear-facing child restraint.
close to the face or neck. The lap belt may INFINITI recommends that infants be
cluding doctors, teachers, government not fit over their small hip bones. In an acci-
traffic safety offices, and community orga- placed in child restraints that comply with
dent, an improperly fitting seat belt could Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
nizations. Every child is different, so be
cause serious or fatal injury. Always use ap- Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
sure to learn the best way to transport
propriate child restraints. You should choose a child restraint that
your child.
fits your vehicle and always follow the
There are three basic types of child re- manufacturer’s instructions for installa-
All US states and provinces of Canada re- tion and use.
straint systems:
quire the use of approved child restraints
O Rear-facing child restraint for infants and small children. (See “Child Small children
restraints” later in this section.)
O Front-facing child restraint Children that are over 1 year old and
Also, there are other types of child re- weigh between 20 lb (9 kg) and 40 lb (18
O Booster seat
straints available for larger children for kg) can be placed in a forward facing
The proper restraint depends on the additional protection. child restraint. Refer to the manufactur-
child’s size. Generally, infants (up to er’s instructions for minimum and
INFINITI recommends that all pre-teens
about 1 year and less than 20 lb (9 kg) maximum weight and height recommen-
and children be restrained in the rear seat
should be placed in rear-facing child re- dations. INFINITI recommends that small
if possible. According to accident statis-
straints. Front-facing child restraints are children be placed in child restraints that
tics, children are safer when properly re-
available for children who outgrow rear- comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
strained in the rear seat than in the front
facing child restraints and are at least 1 Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
seat.
year old. Booster seats are used to help Safety Standards. You should choose a
position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a This is especially important because your child restraint that fits your vehicle and
child who can no longer use a front-facing vehicle has a supplemental restraint always follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
child restraint. system (air bag system) for the front pas- tions for installation and use.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Larger children THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
Children who are too large for child re-
WARNING WITH RETRACTOR
straints should be seated and restrained
by the seat belts which are provided. The Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat WARNING
seat belt may not fit properly if the child and do not allow a child in the cargo areas
is less than 4 feet 9 inches (142.5 cm) tall while the vehicle is moving. The child could O Every person who drives or rides in this
and weighs between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 be seriously injured or killed in an accident vehicle should use a seat belt at all
lb (36 kg). A booster seat should be used or sudden stop. times.
to obtain proper seat belt fit. O Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
INFINITI recommends that a child be PREGNANT WOMEN seatback is reclined. This can be danger-
placed in a commercially available ous. The shoulder belt will not be
booster seat if the shoulder belt in the INFINITI recommends that pregnant against your body. In an accident, you
child’s seating position fits close to the women use seat belts. The seat belt
could be thrown into it and receive neck
face or neck or if the lap portion of the should be worn snug, and always position
the lap belt as low as possible around the or other serious injuries. You could also
seat belt goes across the abdomen. The
hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder slide under the lap belt and receive se-
booster seat should raise the child so
that the shoulder belt is properly posi- belt over your shoulder and across your rious internal injuries.
tioned across the top, middle portion of chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt
O For the most effective protection when
the shoulder and the lap belt is low on over your abdominal area. Contact your
doctor for specific recommendations. the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
the hips. A booster seat can only be used be upright. Always sit well back in the
in seating positions that have a three- INJURED PERSONS seat and adjust the seat belt properly.
point type seat belt. The booster seat
should fit the vehicle seat and have a INFINITI recommends that injured persons
label certifying that it complies with Fed- use seat belts, depending on the injury.
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Check with your doctor for specific recom-
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. mendations.
Once the child has grown so the shoulder
belt is no longer on or near the face and
neck, use the shoulder belt without the
booster seat.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SSS0292 SSS0293 SSS0290
Front seat Rear seat Front seat
Fastening the seat belts • If the seat belt cannot be pulled from 3. Position the lap belt portion low and
its fully retracted position, firmly pull snug on the hips as shown.
1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in the belt and release it. Then
this section. smoothly pull the belt out of the re- 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward
tractor. the retractor to take up extra slack. Be
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-
sure the shoulder belt is routed over
tractor and insert the tongue into the
your shoulder and across your chest.
buckle until it clicks.
• The retractor is designed to lock dur- The front passenger and rear seat belts
ing a sudden stop or on impact. A have a locking mechanism for child re-
slow pulling motion will permit the straint installation. It is referred to as the
belt to move, and allow you some automatic locking mode.
freedom of movement in the seat.
When the locking mechanism is activated
the seat belt cannot be extended again
until the seat belt tongue is detached
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely secured in
the latched position. If they are not com-
pletely secured, passengers may be injured
in an accident or sudden stop.
SSS0291A SSS0326
Rear seat
from the buckle and fully retracted. For Unfastening the seat belts
additional information, see “Child re-
straints” later in this section. To unfasten the belt, push the button on
the buckle. The seat belt will automati-
The automatic locking mode should be cally retract.
used only for child restraint installation.
During normal seat belt use by a pas- Checking seat belt operation
senger, the locking mode should not be ac-
tivated. If it is activated it may cause un- Your seat belt retractors are designed to
comfortable seat belt tension. It can also lock belt movement using two separate
change the operation of the front pas- methods:
senger air bag. See “Front passenger air O when the belt is pulled quickly from
bag and status light” later in this section.
the retractor.
O when the vehicle slows down rapidly.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
You can check their operation as follows:
O grasp the shoulder belt and pull for- WARNING
ward quickly. The retractor should lock
and restrict further belt movement. O After adjustment, release the adjust-
If the retractor does not lock during this ment button and try to move the
check or if you have any questions about shoulder belt anchor up and down to
belt operation, see an INFINITI dealer. make sure it is securely fixed in position.
O The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effective-
ness of the entire restraint system and
increase the chance or severity of injury
SSS0368 in an accident.
Shoulder belt height adjustment

(for Sedan front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best suited for
you. (See “Precautions on seat belt
usage” earlier in this section.) To adjust,
pull the release button q1 , and then move
the shoulder belt anchor q 2 to the de-
sired position, so that the belt passes
over the center of the shoulder. The belt
should be away from your face and neck,
but not falling off of your shoulder. Re-
lease the adjustment button q 1 to lock
the shoulder belt anchor into position.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
make sure that the belt webbing is not
twisted and runs freely through the guide WARNING
when using it.
O Only INFINITI seat belt extenders, made
WARNING by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should be
Always route the shoulder belt over your used with INFINITI seat belts.
shoulder and across your chest. Never run
O Adults and children who can use the
the belt behind your back, under your arm or
standard seat belt should not use an ex-
across your neck. The belt should be away
tender. Such unnecessary use could re-
from your face and neck, but not falling off
sult in serious personal injury in the
your shoulder. Use the shoulder belt guide
event of an accident.
to help position the belt. Failure to properly
SSS0578
position the belt may reduce the effective- O Never use seat belt extenders to install
ness of the entire restraint system and in- child restraints. If the child restraint is
Shoulder belt guide (Coupe)
crease the chance or severity of injury in an not secured properly, the child could be
The shoulder belt guides are attached on accident. seriously injured in a collision or a
the shoulders of the front seats to help sudden stop.
front occupants use the seat belts.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
To use the shoulder belt guides, thread SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
the seat belt into the slot of the guide. If, because of body size or driving posi-
tion, it is not possible to properly fit the O To clean the seat belt webbings, apply
When you enter or exit the rear seat, re-
lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an ex- a mild soap solution or any solution
lease the seat belt from the shoulder belt
tender is available. The extender adds ap- recommended for cleaning upholstery
guide. Replace the seat belt in the guide
proximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length or carpets. Then brush the seat belt
after rear seat access.
and may be used for either the driver or webbing, wipe it with a cloth and
Always adjust the seat belt webbing front passenger seating position. See an allow it to dry in the shade. Do not al-
snugly. The shoulder belt guide can also INFINITI dealer for assistance if the ex- low the seat belts to retract until they
help assist proper fit and comfort. Always tender is required. are completely dry.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
CHILD RESTRAINTS
O If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

guide of the seat belt anchors, the O INFINITI recommends that the child re-
RESTRAINTS
seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-
shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cording to accident statistics, children
cloth. WARNING are safer when properly restrained in the
O Periodically check that the seat belt rear seat than in the front seat.
and all the metal components, such as O Infants and small children should always O An improperly installed child restraint
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible be placed in an appropriate child re- could lead to serious injury or death in
wires and anchors, work properly. If straint while riding in the vehicle. Failure an accident.
loose parts, deterioration, cuts or to use a child restraint can result in seri-
other damage on the seat belt web- ous injury or death. In general, child restraints are designed
bing is found, the entire belt assembly
O Infants and small children should never to be installed with the lap portion of a
should be replaced.
be carried on your lap. It is not possible lap/shoulder seat belt. In addition, this
for even the strongest adult to resist the vehicle is equipped with a universal child
forces of a severe accident. The child restraint lower anchor system, referred to
could be crushed between the adult and as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) system. Some child re-
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the
straints include two rigid or webbing-
same seat belt around both your child
mounted attachments that can be con-
and yourself.
nected to these lower anchors. For de-
O Never install a rear-facing child restraint tails, see “LATCH (Lower Anchors and
in the front seat. An inflating supple- Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM” later in
mental air bag could seriously injure or this section.
kill your child. A rear-facing child re- Child restraints for infants and children of
straint must only be used in the rear various sizes are offered by several manu-
seat. facturers. When selecting any child re-
straint, keep the following points in mind:
O Choose only a restraint with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- O Follow all of the child restraint manufac- O If you must install a front-facing child re-
dard 213. turer’s instructions for installation and straint in the front seat, see “Child re-
use. When purchasing a child restraint, straint installation on front passenger
O Check the child restraint in your ve-
be sure to select one which will fit your seat” later in this section.
hicle to be sure it is compatible with
child and vehicle. It may not be possible
the vehicle’s seat and seat belt O When your child restraint is not in use,
system. to properly install some types of child re-
keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-
straints in your vehicle.
O If the child restraint is compatible with vent it from being thrown around in case
O If the child restraint is not anchored of a sudden stop or accident.
your vehicle, place your child in the
properly, the risk of a child being injured
child restraint and check the various
in a collision or a sudden stop greatly in-
adjustments to be sure the child re-
creases.
straint is compatible with your child. CAUTION
Choose a child restraint that is de- O Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-
signed for your child’s height and tioned to fit the child restraint, but as Remember that a child restraint left in a
weight. Always follow all recom- upright as possible. closed vehicle can become very hot. Check
mended procedures. O After attaching the child restraint, test it the seating surface and buckles before
All US states and Canadian provinces re- before you place the child in it. Push it placing your child in the child restraint.
quire that infants and small children be re- from side to side. Try to tug it forward
strained in approved child restraints at all and check to see if the belt holds the re-
times while the vehicle is being operated. straint in place. The child restraint
should not move more than 1 in (25 mm).
WARNING If the restraint is not secure, tighten the
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may
O Improper use of a child restraint can in- need to try a different child restraint. Not
crease the risk or severity of injury for all child restraints fit in all types
both the child and other occupants of ofvehicles.
the vehicle.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
ON REAR SEAT OUTBOARD OR
CENTER POSITIONS
WARNING
O The three-point seat belt in your vehicle
is equipped with an automatic locking
mode retractor which must be used
when installing a child restraint.
O Failure to use the automatic locking
mode will result in the child restraint not
being properly secured. The restraint SSS0252A SSS0278
could tip over or otherwise be unsecured Rear outboard seat Rear center seat
and cause injury to the child in a sudden
Front facing The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback. If
stop or collision. When you install a child restraint in a rear necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
outboard or center seat, follow these straint to obtain the correct child restraint
steps: fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” ear-
1. Position the child restraint on the lier in this section. If the head restraint is
seat. Always follow the restraint removed, store it in a secure place. Be
manufacturer’s instructions. sure to install the head restraint when the
child restraint is removed. If the seating
position does not have an adjustable
head restraint and it is interfering with
the proper child restraint fit, try another
seating position or a different child re-
straint.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SSS0253G SSS0254H SSS0332C
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the 3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of 4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the
child restraint and insert it into the the belt is fully extended. At this time, belt to remove any slack in the belt.
buckle until you hear and feel the the belt retractor is in the automatic
latch engage. Be sure to follow the locking mode (child restraint mode). It
child restraint manufacturer’s instruc- reverts back to emergency locking
tions for belt routing. mode when the belt is fully retracted.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
6. Check that the retractor is in the auto-
matic locking mode by trying to pull
more belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot pull any more belt webbing out
of the retractor, the belt is in the auto-
matic locking mode.
7. Check to make sure that the child re-
straint is properly secured prior to
each use. If the belt is not locked, re-
peat steps 3 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and
the seat belt is fully retracted, the auto-
matic locking mode (child restraint mode)
SSS0333C is canceled. SSS0334
Rear outboard seat
5. Before placing the child in the child Rear facing
restraint, use force to push the child
restraint from side to side, and tug it When you install a child restraint in a rear
forward to make sure that it is se- outboard or center seat, follow these
curely held in place. It should not steps:
move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it 1. Position the child restraint on the
does move more than 1 in (25 mm), seat. Always follow the restraint
pull again on the shoulder belt to fur- manufacturer’s instructions.
ther tighten the child restraint. If un-
able to properly secure the restraint,
move the restraint to another rear
seating position and try again, or try a
different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SSS0279A SSS0335 SSS0258A
Rear center seat
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the 3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of
child restraint and insert it into the the belt is fully extended. At this time,
buckle until you hear and feel the the belt retractor is in the automatic
latch engage. Be sure to follow the locking mode (child restraint mode). It
child restraint manufacturer’s instruc- reverts back to emergency locking
tions for belt routing. mode when the belt is fully retracted.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
6. Check that the retractor is in the auto-
matic locking mode by trying to pull
more belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot pull any more belt webbing out
of the retractor, the belt is in the auto-
matic locking mode.
7. Check to make sure that the child re-
straint is properly secured prior to
each use. If the belt is not locked, re-
peat steps 3 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and
the seat belt is fully retracted, the auto-
matic locking mode (child restraint mode)
SSS0259A SSS0260A is canceled.
4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up the 5. Before placing the child in the child
belt to remove any slack in the belt. restraint, use force to push the child
restraint from side to side, and tug it
forward to make sure that it is se-
curely held in place. It should not
move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it
does move more than 1 in (25 mm),
pull again on the shoulder belt to fur-
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O The LATCH system anchors are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly fitted child restraints. Under
no circumstance are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses.
Some child restraints include two rigid or

webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at
certain seating positions in your vehicle.
This system is known as the LATCH
system. This system may also be referred
SSS0369 SSS0370 to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible sys-
Sedan Coupe tem. With this system, you do not have to
LATCH (Lower Anchors and use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child
Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM WARNING restraint. Your vehicle is equipped with
1. LATCH lower anchor points (right) special anchor points that are used with
2. LATCH lower anchor points (left) O Attach LATCH system compatible child LATCH system compatible child restraints.
3. LATCH label restraints only at the locations shown. If Check your child restraint for a label stat-
The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for a child restraint is not secured properly, ing that it is compatible with the LATCH
CHildren) anchor points are located in the your child could be seriously injured or system. This information may also be in
seat cushions of the rear outboard killed in an accident.
seating positions only. Do not attempt to the instructions provided by the child re-
install a child restraint in the center posi- O Do not secure a child restraint in the straint manufacturer. If you have such a
tion using the LATCH anchors. center rear seating position using the child restraint, refer to the illustration for
LATCH system anchors. The child re- the rear seating positions equipped with
The LATCH system anchors are located at
the rear of the seat cushion near the seat- straint will not be secured properly. LATCH system anchors which can be used
back. A label is attached to the seatback to to secure the child restraint.
help you locate the LATCH system anchors.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Some child restraints may also require chor attachments to the anchor points
the use of a top tether strap. See “Top on the rear seat.
tether strap child restraint” later in this 2. Insert the anchor attachments into the
section for installation instructions. anchor points. If the child restraint is
When installing a child restraint, carefully equipped with a top tether, see “Top
read and follow the instructions in this tether strap child restraint” later in
manual and those supplied with the child this section for installation instruc-
restraint. tions.
When you install a LATCH system compat- 3. After attaching the child restraint and
before placing the child in it, use force
ible child restraint to the lower anchor at-
to push the child restraint from side to
tachments in the rear seat, follow these
side and tug it forward to make sure
steps. that the child restraint is securely held
in place. It should not move more than SSS0281A
WARNING 1 in (25 mm). Sedan
4. Check to make sure that the child re- TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD
Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your straint is properly secured prior to RESTRAINT
fingers into the lower anchor area and each use.
feeling to make sure there are no obstruc- WARNING
tions over the LATCH system anchors, such
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion mate- O Child restraint anchor points are de-
rial. The child restraint will not be secured signed to withstand only those loads im-
properly if the LATCH system anchors are ob- posed by correctly fitted child restraints.
structed. Under no circumstance are they to be
used for adult seat belts or harnesses.
1. To install the LATCH system compat-
ible child restraint, adjust the height
of the child restraint LATCH system an-
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
First, adjust the seatback so that it is up- Anchor point locations
right (if so equipped). Remove the anchor
cover from the anchor point as illustrated. Anchor points are located on the rear par-
Keep the removed cover in a secure place cel shelf finisher.
to prevent loss or damage. Then secure If you have any questions when installing
the child restraint with the rear seat belt a top strap child restraint on the rear seat,
or the LATCH system (outboard positions), consult an INFINITI dealer for details.
as applicable.
Remove the head restraint from the seat-
back, if equipped with an adjustable rear
head restraint. Store it in a secure place.
Position the top tether strap over the top
of the seatback and secure it to the tether
anchorage that provides the straightest
SSS0282
installation. Tighten the tether strap ac-
Coupe cording to the manufacturer’s instruction
O After removing a rear seat head restraint to remove any slack.
for top tether installation, store it se- For best child restraint fit, see the child
curely to prevent it from causing injury to restraint installation instructions in this
passengers or damage to the vehicle in section and the child restraint manufac-
case of sudden braking or an accident. turer’s instructions.
Always replace it and adjust properly
when top tether is no longer in use.
If your child restraint has a top tether

strap, it must be secured to the anchor
point provided behind its position.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O A child restraint with a top tether strap
should not be used in the front pas-
senger seat.
O The three-point seat belt in your vehicle
is equipped with an automatic locking
mode retractor which must be used
when installing a child restraint.
O Failure to use the retractor’s locking
mode will result in the child restraint not
being properly secured. The restraint
could tip over or otherwise be unsecured
SSS0300A and cause injury to the child in a sudden
stop or collision. Also, it can change the
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION operation of the front passenger air bag.
O INFINITI recommends that child re-
ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT See “Front passenger air bag and status
straints be installed in the rear seat.
light” later in this section.
However, if you must install a front-
WARNING facing child restraint in the front passen-
ger seat, move the passenger seat to the
O Never install a rear-facing child restraint rearmost position. Also, be sure the front
in the front passenger seat. Supple- passenger air bag status light is illumi-
mental front air bags inflate with great nated to indicate the passenger air bag
force. A rear-facing child restraint could is OFF. See “Front passenger air bag and
be struck by the supplemental front air status light” later in this section for
bag in a crash and could seriously injure details.
or kill your child.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seat-
back. If necessary, adjust or remove
the head restraint to obtain the cor-
rect child restraint fit. See “Head re-
straint adjustment” earlier in this sec-
tion.
If the head restraint is removed, store
it in a secure place. Be sure to install
the head restraint when the child re-
straint is removed.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint and it is
SSS0301B interfering with the proper child re- SSS0360
straint fit, try another seating position
Front facing or a different child restraint. 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
If you must install a child restraint in the buckle until you hear and feel the
front seat, follow these steps: latch engage. Be sure to follow the
1. Position the child restraint on the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for belt routing.
front passenger seat. It should be
placed in a front-facing direction only.
Move the seat to the rearmost posi-
tion. Adjust the head restraint to its
highest position. Always follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions. Child restraints for infants must
be used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SSS0361 SSS0424 SSS0302E
3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up 5. Before placing the child in the child
the belt is fully extended. At this time, the shoulder belt to remove any slack restraint, use force to push the child
the belt retractor is in the automatic in the belt. restraint from side to side, and tug it
locking mode (child restraint mode). It forward to make sure that it is se-
reverts back to emergency locking curely held in place. It should not
mode when the belt is fully retracted. move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it
does move more than 1 inch (25 mm),
pull again on the shoulder belt to fur-
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
BOOSTER SEATS
6. Check that the retractor is in the auto- PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS

matic locking mode by trying to pull point type seat belt with a booster seat
more belt out of the retractor. If you can result in a serious injury in sudden
cannot pull any more belt webbing out WARNING stop or collision.
of the retractor, the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode. O Infants and small children should always O An improperly installed booster seat
be placed in an appropriate child re- could lead to serious injury or death in
7. Check to make sure that the child re- an accident.
straint is properly secured prior to straint while riding in the vehicle. Failure
each use. If the seat belt is not to use a child restraint or booster seat
locked, repeat steps 3 through 7. can result in serious injury or death.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po- O Infants and small children should never
sition. The passenger air bag status be carried on your lap. It is not possible
light should illuminate. If this for even the strongest adult to resist the
light is not illuminated, see “Front forces of a severe accident. The child
passenger air bag and status light” could be crushed between the adult and
later in this section. Move the child re-
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the
straint to another seating position.
Have the system checked by an IN- same seat belt around both your child
FINITI dealer. and yourself.
After the child restraint is removed and O INFINITI recommends that the booster
the seat belt is fully retracted, the auto- seat be installed in the rear seat. Accord-
matic locking mode (child restraint mode) ing to accident statistics, children are
will be canceled. safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
O A booster seat must only be installed in
a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a three-
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
LRS0455 LRS0453 LRS0464
O Make sure the child’s head will be

provide the maximum protection during a
WARNING collision.
properly supported by the booster
seat or vehicle seat. The seatback
Booster seats of various sizes are offered must be at or above the center of the
Do not use towels, books, pillows or other child’s ears. For example, if a low back
by several manufacturers. When selecting
items in place of a booster seat. Items such any booster seat, keep the following booster seat q 1 is chosen, the vehicle
as these may move during normal driving or points in mind: seatback must be at or above the cen-
a collision and result in serious injury or O Choose only a booster seat with a ter of the child’s ears. If the seatback
death. Booster seats are designed to be label certifying that it complies with is lower than the center of the child’s
used with a lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard ears, a high back booster seat q 2
are designed to properly route the lap and 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety should be used.
shoulder portions of the seat belt over the Standard 213. O If the booster seat is compatible with
strongest portions of a child’s body to O Check the booster seat in your vehicle your vehicle, place your child in the
to be sure it is compatible with the ve- booster seat and check the various
hicle’s seat and seat belt system. adjustments to be sure the booster
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
seat is compatible with your child. Al-
ways follow all recommended proce- O Adjustable seatbacks should be posi- the seating surface and buckles before
dures. tioned to fit the booster seat, but as up- placing your child in the booster seat.
right as possible.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small O After placing the child in the booster
children be restrained in an approved child seat and fastening the seat belt, make
restraint at all times while the vehicle is sure the shoulder portion of the belt is
being operated. away from the child’s face and neck and
the lap portion of the belt does not cross
WARNING the abdomen.
O Do not put the shoulder belt behind the
O Improper use of a booster seat can in- child or under the child’s arm. If you
crease the risk or severity of injury for must install a booster seat in the front
both the child and other occupants of seat, see “Booster seat installation on
the vehicle. front passenger seat” later in this sec-
O Follow all of the booster seat manufac- tion.
turer’s instructions for installation and O When your booster seat is not in use,
use. When purchasing a booster seat, be keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-
sure to select one which will fit your vent it from being thrown around in case
child and vehicle. It may not be possible of a sudden stop or accident.
to properly install some types of booster
seats in your vehicle.
O If the booster seat and seat belt are not CAUTION
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision or a sudden stop Remember that a booster seat left in a
greatly increases. closed vehicle can become very hot. Check
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
restraint and it is interfering with the
proper booster seat fit, try another
seating position or a different booster
seat.
3. Position the lap portion of the seat
belt low and snug on the child’s hips.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for ad-
justing the belt routing.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take
up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the top,
LRS0452 LRS0451 middle portion of the child’s shoulder.
Outboard position Center position Be sure to follow the booster seat
BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON 1. Position the booster seat on the seat. manufacturer’s instructions for ad-
REAR SEAT OUTBOARD OR CENTER Only place it in a front-facing direc- justing the belt routing.
tion. Always follow the booster seat
POSITIONS manufacturer’s instructions. 5. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-
structions for properly fastening a seat
2. The booster seat should be positioned belt shown in the “Three-point type
CAUTION on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. seat belts with retractor” earlier in
If necessary, adjust or remove the this section.
Do not use a lap/shoulder belt automatic head restraint to obtain the correct
locking mode when using a booster seat booster seat fit. See “Head restraint
with the seat belts. adjustment” earlier in this section. If
the head restraint is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to install
When you install a booster seat in the the head restraint when the booster
rear seat, follow these steps: seat is removed. If the seating posi-
tion does not have an adjustable head
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
4. Position the lap portion of the seat
OFF. See “Front passenger air bag and status belt low and snug on the child’s hips.
light” later in this section for details. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for ad-
justing the belt routing.
If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, follow these steps: 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take
1. Move the seat to the rearmost posi- up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
tion. belt is positioned across the top,
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. middle portion of the child’s shoulder.
Only place it in a front-facing direc- Be sure to follow the booster seat
tion. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for ad-
manufacturer’s instructions. justing the belt routing.
LRS0454 3. The booster seat should be positioned 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. structions for properly fastening a seat
BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON If necessary, adjust or remove the belt shown in the “Three-point type
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT head restraint to obtain the correct seat belt with retractor” earlier in this
booster seat fit. See “Head restraint section.
adjustment” earlier in this section. If
WARNING the head restraint is removed, store it
7. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po-
sition. The passenger air bag status
in a secure place. Be sure to install light should illuminate. If this
INFINITI recommends that child restraints be the head restraint when the booster light is not illuminated, see “Front
installed in the rear seat. However, if you seat is removed. If the seating posi- passenger air bag and status light”
must install a booster seat in the front pas- tion does not have an adjustable head later in this section. Move the booster
senger seat, move the passenger seat to the restraint and it is interfering with the seat to another seating position. Have
rearmost position. Also be sure that the front proper booster seat fit, try another the system checked by an INFINITI
passenger air bag status light is illuminated seating position or a different booster dealer.
seat.
to indicate the passenger air bag is
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL These supplemental restraint systems are

RESTRAINT SYSTEM designed to supplement the crash protec-
tion provided by the driver and passenger
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) seat belts and are not a substitute for
section contains important information them. Seat belts should always be cor-
concerning the driver and passenger front rectly worn and the occupant seated a
impact supplemental air bags (INFINITI ad- suitable distance away from the steering
vanced air bag system), front seat side- wheel, instrument panel and door fin-
impact supplemental air bags, curtain air ishers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this
bags and front seat pre-tensioner seat section for instructions and precautions
belts. on seat belt usage.)
Supplemental front-impact air bag system: The supplemental air bags operate only
The INFINITI advanced air bag system can when the ignition switch is in the ON or
help cushion the impact force to the head START position.
and chest of the driver and front pas-
senger in certain frontal collisions. After turning the ignition switch to the ON
Supplemental side air bag system: This position, the supplemental air bag
system can help cushion the impact force warning light illuminates. The supple-
to the chest area of the driver and front mental air bag warning light will turn off
passenger in certain side impact colli- after about 7 seconds if the systems are
sions. The front seat side-impact supple- operational.
mental air bags are designed to inflate on
the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag
system: This system can help cushion the
impact force to the head of occupants in
front and rear outboard seating positions
in certain side impact collisions. The cur-
tain side-impact air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is
impacted.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
greater risk of injury or death in a crash.
You may also receive serious or fatal in-
juries from the supplemental front air
bag if you are up against it when it in-
flates. Always sit back against the seat
back and as far away as practical from
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Always use the seat belts.
O The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
INFINITI advanced air bag system moni-
SSS0131B
tors the severity of a collision and seat
belt usage then inflates the air bags.
WARNING is lit or if the front passenger seat is un- Failure to properly wear seat belts can
occupied. See 0Front passenger air bag increase the risk or severity of injury in
O The supplemental front air bags ordi- and status light0 later in this section. an accident.
narily will not inflate in the event of a O The seat belts and the supplemental front O The front passenger seat is equipped
side impact, rear impact, rollover, or air bags are most effective when you are with an occupant classification sensor
lower severity frontal collision. Always sitting well back and upright in the seat. (pressure sensor) that turns the front
wear your seat belts to help reduce the Supplemental front air bags inflate with passenger air bag OFF under some con-
risk or severity of injury in various kinds great force. Even with the INFINITI ad- ditions. This sensor is only used in this
of accidents. vanced air bag system, if you are unre- seat. Failure to be properly seated and
O The front passenger air bag will not in- strained, leaning forward, sitting sideways wearing the seat belt can increase the
flate if the passenger air bag status light or out of position in any way, you are at risk or severity of injury in an accident.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
See “Front Passenger air bag and status
light” later in this section.
O Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the
supplemental front air bag inflates.
SSS0132B
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SSS0006 SSS0008 SSS0099
SSS0007 SSS0009 SSS0100
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
O Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of dan-
gerous riding positions are shown in the
previous illustrations.
O Children may be severely injured or
killed when the supplemental front air
bags, side air bags or curtain side-
impact air bags inflate if they are not SSS0059A SSS0188A
properly restrained. Pre-teens and chil-
dren should be properly restrained in the
rear seat, if possible. WARNING O The seat belts, the supplemental side air
bags and curtain side-impact air bags
O Even with the INFINITI advanced air bag are most effective when you are sitting
Supplemental side air bag and curtain side-
system, never install a rear-facing child well back and upright in the seat. The
impact air bag:
restraint in the front seat. An inflating side air bag and curtain side-impact air
supplemental front air bag could seri- O The supplemental side air bag and cur- bag inflate with great force. Do not allow
ously injure or kill your child. For addi- tain side-impact air bag ordinarily will
anyone to place their hand, leg or face
tional information, see “Child re- not inflate in the event of a frontal im-
pact, rear impact, rollover or lower se- near the side air bag on the side of the
straints” earlier in this section.
verity side collision. Always wear your seatback of the front seat or near the
seat belts to help reduce the risk or se- side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sit-
verity of injury in various kinds of ting in the front seats or rear outboard
accidents. seats to extend their hand out of the
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SSS0140 SSS0159 SSS0162
window or lean against the door. Some

examples of dangerous riding positions
are shown in the previous illustrations.
O When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold
onto the seatback of the front seat. If the
side air bag inflates, you may be seri-
ously injured. Be especially careful with
children, who should always be properly
restrained.
O Do not use seat covers on the front seat-
backs. They may interfere with supple-
mental side air bag inflation.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
8. Seat belt pre-tensioner
9. Satellite sensors
10. Occupant classification system control
unit
INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAG
SYSTEM (front seats)
This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI
advanced air bag system for the driver
and front passenger seats. This system is
designed to meet certification require-
ments under U.S. regulations. It is also
permitted in Canada. However, all of the
information, cautions and warnings in this
manual still apply and must be followed.
The driver supplemental air bag is located
in the center of the steering wheel. The
front passenger supplemental air bag is
mounted in the dashboard above the
glove box. The supplemental front air
bags are designed to inflate in higher se-
verity frontal collisions, although they
SSS0416 may inflate if the forces in another type of
Sedan collision are similar to those of a higher
1. Crash zone sensor 5. Supplemental curtain side-impact air
severity frontal impact. They may not in-
2. Supplemental front air bag modules bags flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle
3. Supplemental side air bag modules 6. Supplemental curtain side-impact air damage (or lack of it) is not always an in-
bag modules dication of proper supplemental air bag
4. Occupant classification sensor (pres-
sure sensor) 7. Diagnosis sensor unit operation.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
information from the sensors, only one
front air bag may inflate in a crash, de-
pending on the crash severity and
whether the front occupants are belted or
unbelted. Additionally, the front pas-
senger air bag may be automatically
turned OFF under some conditions, de-
pending on the pressure detected on the
passenger seat and how the seat belt is
used. If the front passenger air bag is
OFF, the passenger air bag status light
will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccu-
pied, the light will not be illuminated, but
the air bag will be off). See “Front pas-
senger air bag and status light” later in
this section for further details. One front
air bag inflating does not indicate im-
proper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air
bag system, contact an INFINITI dealer. If
you are considering modification of your
vehicle due to a disability, you may also
SSS0418 contact an INFINITI dealer. Contact infor-
Coupe mation is contained in the front of this
The INFINITI advanced air bag system has tension sensor. Inflator operation is Owner’s Manual.
dual stage inflators. It also monitors infor- based on the severity of a collision and
When a supplemental front air bag in-
mation from the crash zone sensor, the seat belt usage for the driver. For the flates, a fairly loud noise may be heard,
diagnosis sensor unit, seat belt buckle front passenger, it additionally monitors followed by the release of smoke. This
switches, occupant classification sensor the weight of an occupant or object on smoke is not harmful and does not indi-
(pressure sensor) and passenger seat belt the seat and seat belt tension. Based on cate a fire. Care should be taken not to in-
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
hale it, as it may cause irritation and The supplemental front air bags operate
choking. Those with a history of a breath- only when the ignition switch is in the ON
ing condition should get fresh air or START position.
promptly.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON
Supplemental front air bags, along with position, the supplemental air bag
the use of seat belts, help to cushion the warning light illuminates. The supple-
impact force on the face and chest of the mental air bag warning light will turn off
front occupants. They can help save lives after about 7 seconds if the system is op-
and reduce serious injuries. However, an erational.
inflating front air bag may cause facial
abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags
do not provide restraint to the lower
body.
Even with INFINITI advanced air bags, seat
SSS0367
belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as Front passenger air bag status light
far as practical away from the steering Front passenger air bag and
wheel or instrument panel. The supple- status light
mental front air bags inflate quickly in or-
der to help protect the front occupants.
Because of this, the force of the front air WARNING
bag inflating can increase the risk of in-
jury if the occupant is too close to, or is The front passenger air bag is designed to
against, the air bag module during infla- automatically turn OFF under some condi-
tion. tions. Read this section carefully to learn
The air bag will deflate quickly after a col- how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat
lision. belt and child restraints is necessary for
most effective protection. Failure to follow
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
operated under some conditions as de- The front passenger seat belt sensors are
all instructions in this manual concerning scribed below in accordance with U.S. designed to detect if the seat belt is
the use of seats, seat belts and child re- regulations. If the front passenger air bag buckled and the amount of tension on the
straints can increase the risk or severity of is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The seat belt, such as when it is in the auto-
injury in an accident. driver air bag and other air bags in your matic locking mode (child restraint mode).
vehicle are not part of this system. Based on the weight on the seat detected
by the occupant classification sensor and
Status light: The purpose of the regulation is to help the belt tension detected on the seat belt,
reduce the risk of injury or death from an the INFINITI advanced air bag system de-
The front passenger air bag status light inflating air bag to certain front passenger termines whether the front passenger air
is located in the center display. The seat occupants, such as children, by re- bag should be automatically turned OFF
light operates as follows: quiring the air bag to be automatically as required by the regulations.
O Unoccupied passenger seat: The is turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to
meet the requirements. Front passenger seat adult occupants who
OFF and the front passenger air bag is are properly seated and using the seat
OFF and will not inflate in a crash. One sensor used is the occupant classifi- belt as outlined in this manual should not
O Passenger seat occupied by a small cation sensor (pressure sensor). It is in cause the passenger air bag to be auto-
adult, child or child restraint as out- the bottom of the front passenger seat matically turned OFF. For small adults it
lined in this section: The illumi- cushion and is designed to detect an oc- may be turned OFF, however, if the occu-
nates to indicate that the front pas- cupant and objects on the seat by weight. pant takes his/her weight off the seat
senger air bag is OFF and will not in- It works together with seat belt sensors cushion (for example, by not sitting up-
flate in a crash. described later. For example, if a child is right, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or
in the front passenger seat, the advanced by otherwise being out of position), this
O Occupied passenger seat and the pas- air bag system is designed to turn the could cause the sensor to turn the air bag
senger meets the conditions outlined passenger air bag OFF in accordance with OFF. In addition, if the occupant improp-
in this section: The light is OFF to the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of erly uses the seat belt in the automatic
indicate that the front passenger air the type specified in the regulations is on locking mode (child restraint mode), this
bag is operational. the seat, its weight and the child’s weight could cause the air bag to be turned OFF.
can be detected and cause the air bag to Always be sure to be seated and wearing
Front passenger air bag:
turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor the seat belt properly for the most effec-
The front passenger air bag is designed to operation can vary depending on the front tive protection by the seat belt and
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is passenger seat belt sensors. supplemental air bag.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
INFINITI recommends that pre-teens and sure that you and all vehicle occupants or child restraint in a rear seat. If you
children be properly restrained in a rear are seated and restrained properly. have any questions about whether your
seat. INFINITI also recommends that ap- passenger air bag is working as designed,
Using the passenger air bag status light, your INFINITI dealer can confirm that it is
propriate child restraints and booster
you can monitor when the front pas- working properly by using a special tool.
seats be properly installed in a rear seat.
senger air bag is automatically turned OFF
If this is not possible, the occupant clas- The INFINITI advanced air bag system and
with the seat occupied. The light will not
sification sensor and seat belt sensors passenger air bag status light will take a
illuminate when the front passenger seat
are designed to operate as described few seconds to register a change in the
is unoccupied.
above to turn the front passenger air bag passenger seat status. For example, if a
OFF for specified child restraints as re- If an adult occupant is in the seat but the large adult who is sitting in the front pas-
quired by the regulations. Failing to prop- passenger air bag status light is illumi- senger seat exits the vehicle, the passen-
erly secure child restrains and to use the nated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), ger air bag status light will change from
automatic locking mode (child restraint it could be that the person is a small OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to
mode) may allow the restraint to tip or adult, or is not sitting on the seat prop- OFF. This is normal system operation and
move in an accident or sudden stop. This erly or is not using the seat belt properly. does not indicate a malfunction.
can also result in the passenger air bag If a child restraint must be used in the If a malfunction occurs in the front pas-
inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. front seat, the passenger air bag status senger air bag system, the supplemental
See “Child restraints” earlier in this sec- light may or may not be illuminated, de- air bag warning light , located in the
tion for proper use and installation. pending on the size of the child and the meter and gauges area will blink. Have
type of child restraint being used. If the the system checked by an INFINITI dealer.
If the front passenger seat is not occu-
passenger air bag status light is not illu-
pied, the passenger air bag is designed
minated (indicating that the air bag might
not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy
inflate in a crash), it could be that the
objects placed on the seat could result in
child restraint or seat belt is not being
air bag inflation, because of the object’s
used properly. In rare cases, the pas-
weight detected by the occupant classifi-
senger air bag status light will not illumi-
cation sensor. Other conditions could also
nate even though the air bag is OFF.
result in air bag inflation, such as if a
child is standing on the seat, or if two If such situations happen, properly posi-
children are on the seat, contrary to the tion and restrain the occupant or child re-
instructions in this manual. Always be straint. Otherwise reposition the occupant
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Other supplemental front air bag precau-
tions This could affect proper operation of the O No unauthorized changes should be
supplemental front air bag system. made to any components or wiring of the
WARNING O Tampering with the supplemental front
seat belt system. This may affect the
supplemental front air bag system. Tam-
air bag system may result in serious per-
O Do not place any objects on the steering pering with the seat belt system may re-
sonal injury. Tampering includes
wheel pad or on the instru-ment panel. sult in serious personal injury.
changes to the steering wheel and the
Also, do not place any objects between instrument panel assembly by placing O Work around and on the supplemental
any occupant and the steering wheel or material over the steering wheel pad and front air bag system should be done by
instrument panel. Such objects may be- above the instrument panel or by install- an INFINITI dealer. Installation of elec-
come dangerous projectiles and cause ing additional trim material around the trical equipment should also be done by
injury if the supplemental front air bag air bag system. an INFINITI dealer. The yellow and or-
inflates. ange Supplemental Restraint System
O Modifying or tampering with the front
O Immediately after inflation, several front (SRS) wiring and connectors should not
passenger seat may result in serious
air bag system components will be hot. be modified or disconnected. Unautho-
personal injury. For example, do not
Do not touch them; you may severely rized electrical test equipment and prob-
change the front seats by placing mate-
burn yourself. ing devices should not be used on the air
rial on the seat cushion or by installing
bag system.
O No unauthorized changes should be additional trim material, such as seat
made to any components or wiring of the covers, on the seat. Additionally, do not O A cracked windshield should be replaced
supplemental air bag system. This is to stow any objects under the front passen- immediately by a qualified repair facility.
prevent accidental inflation of the ger seat or the seat cushion and seat- A cracked windshield could affect the
supplemental air bag or damage to the back. Such objects may interfere with function of the supplemental air bag
supplemental air bag system. the proper operation of the occupant system.
classification sensor (pressure sensor).
O Do not make unauthorized changes to O The SRS wiring harness connectors are
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspen- yellow and orange for easy
sion system or front end structure. identification.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
When selling your vehicle, we request tain side-impact air bags are designed to
that you inform the buyer about the inflate in higher severity side collisions
supplemental front air bag system and on the side of the vehicle impacted, al-
guide the buyer to the appropriate sec- though they may inflate if the forces in
tions in this Owner’s Manual. another type of collision are similar to
those of a higher severity side impact.
They are designed to inflate on the side
where the vehicle is impacted. They may
not inflate in certain side collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not al-
ways an indication of proper supple-
mental side air bag and curtain side-
impact air bag operation.
When the supplemental side air bag and
SSS0190
curtain side-impact air bag inflate, a fairly
loud noise may be heard, followed by re-
SUPPLEMENTAL SIDE AIR BAG AND lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
CURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT AIR BAG and does not indicate a fire. Care should
SYSTEMS be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause
irritation and choking. Those with a his-
The supplemental side air bags are lo- tory of a breathing condition should get
cated in the outside of the seatback of fresh air promptly.
the front seats. The supplemental curtain
Supplemental side air bags, along with the
side-impact air bags are located in the
use of seat belts, help to cushion the im-
side roof rails. These systems are de- pact force on the chest of the front occu-
signed to meet voluntary guidelines to pants. Curtain side-impact air bags help to
help reduce the risk of injury to out-of- cushion the impact force to the head of oc-
position occupants. However, all of the in- cupants in the front and rear outboard
formation, cautions and warnings in this seating positions. They can help save lives
manual still apply and must be followed. and reduce serious injuries. However, an
The supplemental side air bags and cur- inflating side air bag, or curtain side-
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
impact air bag may cause abrasions or
other injuries. Supplemental side air bags WARNING could affect proper operation of the
and curtain side-impact air bags do not supplemental side air bag and curtain
provide restraint to the lower body. side-impact air bag system.
O Do not place any objects near the seat-
The seat belts should be correctly worn back of the front seats. Also, do not O Tampering with the supplemental
and the driver and passenger seated up- place any objects (an umbrella, bag, system may result in serious personal
right as far as practical away from the
supplemental side air bag. Rear seat pas- etc.) between the front door finisher and injury. For example, do not change the
sengers should be seated as far away as the front seat. Such objects may become front seats by placing material near the
practical from the door finishers and side dangerous projectiles and cause injury if seatback or by installing additional trim
roof rails. The side air bags and curtain the side air bag inflates. material, such as seat covers, around the
side-impact air bag inflate quickly in side air bag.
order to help protect the front occupants. O Right after inflation, several side air bag
Because of this, the force of the side air and curtain side-impact air bag system O Work around and on the side air bag and
bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflat- components will be hot. Do not touch curtain side-impact air bag system
ing can increase the risk of injury if the them; you may severely burn yourself. should be done by an INFINITI dealer. In-
occupant is too close to, or is against, stallation of electrical equipment should
these air bag modules during inflation. O No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of the also be done by an INFINITI dealer. The
The side air bag and curtain side-impact
air bag will deflate quickly after the colli- side air bag and curtain side-impact air SRS wiring harnesses* should not be
sion is over. bag system. This is to prevent accidental modified or disconnected. Unauthorized
inflation of the side air bag and curtain electrical test equipment and probing
The supplemental side air bags and cur-
side-impact air bag or damage to the devices should not be used on the side
tain side-impact air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON or side air bag and curtain side-impact air air bag system.
START position. bag system. * The SRS wiring harness connectors are
After turning the ignition switch to the ON O Do not make unauthorized changes to yellow and orange for easy
position, the supplemental air bag your vehicle’s electrical system, suspen- identification.
warning light illuminates. The air bag
sion system or side panel. This
warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-
onds if the systems are operational.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
When selling your vehicle, we request The pre-tensioner is encased with the
that you inform the buyer about the side belt system may result in serious per- seat belt’s retractor. These seat belts are
air bag and curtain side-impact air bag sonal injury. used the same as conventional seat belts.
system and guide the buyer to the appro- When the pre-tensioner seat belt acti-
O Work around and on the pre-tensioner
priate sections in this Owner’s Manual. vates, smoke is released and a loud noise
system should be done by an INFINITI
Pre-tensioner seat belt system dealer. Installation of electrical equip- may be heard. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should
(front seats) ment should also be done by an INFINITI
be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test
irritation and choking. Those with a his-
WARNING equipment and probing devices should tory of a breathing condition should get
not be used on the pre-tensioner seat fresh air promptly.
O The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be re- belt system.
If any abnormality occurs in the pre-
used after activation. It must be replaced O If you need to dispose of the pre- tensioner seat belt system, the supple-
together with the retractor and buckle as tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact mental air bag warning light will not
a unit. an INFINITI dealer. Correct pre-tensioner come on, will flash intermittently or will
disposal procedures are set forth in the turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after
O If the vehicle becomes involved in a fron- the ignition switch has been turned to the
tal collision but the pre-tensioner is not appropriate INFINITI Service Manual. In-
ON or START position. In this case, the
activated, be sure to have the pre- correct disposal procedures could cause
pre-tensioner seat belt may not function
tensioner system checked and, if neces- personal injury. properly. They must be checked and re-
sary, replaced by an INFINITI dealer. paired. Take your vehicle to an INFINITI
The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt sys- dealer.
O No unauthorized changes should be
tem activates in conjunction with the front When selling your vehicle, we request
made to any components or wiring of the
supplemental air bag systems. Working that you inform the buyer about the pre-
pre-tensioner seat belt system. This is to
with the seat belt retractor, it helps tensioner seat belt system and guide the
prevent accidental activation of the pre- tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be- buyer to the appropriate sections in this
tensioner seat belt or damage to the pre- comes involved in certain types of colli- Owner’s Manual.
tensioner seat belt operation. Tampering sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-
with the pre-tensioner seat pants.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
When the ignition key is in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates for about 7 sec-
onds and then turns off. This means the
system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur,
the supplemental front air bag, supple-
mental side air bag and curtain side-
impact air bag, and pre-tensioner seat
belt systems need servicing:
O The supplemental air bag warning
light remains on after approximately 7
seconds.
SSS0330 SPA1097
O The supplemental air bag warning
light flashes intermittently.
q
1 SRS air bag warning labels SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
The warning labels are located on the LIGHT O The supplemental air bag warning
surface of the sun visors. light does not come on at all.
The supplemental air bag warning light,
q
2 SRS side-impact air bag warning label
displaying in the instrument panel,
Under these conditions, the supplemental
The warning label is located on the front air bags, supplemental side air
monitors the circuits of the supplemental
side of the passenger’s side center bags, curtain side-impact air bag or pre-
front air bag, supplemental side air bag tensioner seat belt systems may not oper-
pillar. and curtain side-impact air bag and pre- ate properly. They must be checked and
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING tensioner seat belt systems. The circuits repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
LABELS monitored by the air bag warning light are INFINITI dealer.
the diagnosis sensor unit, satellite sen-
Warning labels about the supplemental sors, crash zone sensor, front air bag
front air bag and supplemental side air modules, side air bag modules, curtain
bag systems are placed in the vehicle as side-impact air bag modules, pre-
shown in the illustration. tensioner seat belts and all related wiring.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
person performing the maintenance. The
WARNING ignition switch should always be in the O If you need to dispose of these supple-
LOCK position when working under the mental systems or scrap the vehicle,
If the supplemental air bag warning light is hood or inside the vehicle. contact an INFINITI dealer.
on, it could mean that the supplemental Correct disposal procedures are set forth
front air bag, supplemental side air bag, cur- WARNING in the appropriate INFINITI Service
tain side-impact air bag systems and/or pre- Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures
tensioner seat belt systems will not operate O Once a supplemental front air bag, could cause personal injury.
in an accident. To help avoid injury to your- supplemental side air bag or curtain
self or others, have your vehicle checked by side-impact air bag has inflated, the air
an INFINITI dealer as soon as possible. bag module will not function again and
must be replaced. Additionally, if any of
the supplemental front air bags inflate,
Repair and replacement procedure the activated pre-tensioner seat belts
The supplemental front air bags, supple- must also be replaced. The air bag
mental side air bags, curtain side-impact module and pre-tensioner seat belt
air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts are system should be replaced by an INFINITI
designed to activate on a one-time-only dealer. The air bag module and pre-
basis. As a reminder, unless it is dam- tensioner seat belt system cannot be re-
aged, the supplemental air bag warning paired.
light remains illuminated after inflation O The supplemental front air bag, side air
has occurred. Repair and replacement of bag and curtain side-impact air bag sys-
these systems should be done only by an tems, and the pre-tensioner seat belt
INFINITI dealer. system should be inspected by an
When maintenance work is required on INFINITI dealer if there is any damage to
the vehicle, the supplemental front air the front end or side portion of the
bags, side air bags, curtain side-impact vehicle.
air bags, pre-tensioner seat belts and re-
lated parts should be pointed out to the
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
MEMO
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel .............................................. 2-2 Hazard warning flasher switch ........................ 2-25
Meters and gauges........................................... 2-3 Horn ............................................................... 2-26
Speedometer and odometer ........................ 2-3 Heated seats .................................................. 2-26
Tachometer ................................................. 2-4 SNOW mode switch (if so equipped)............... 2-27
Engine coolant temperature gauge .............. 2-4 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch ....... 2-28
Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-5 Clock .............................................................. 2-29
Compass display .............................................. 2-6 Adjusting the time..................................... 2-29
Warning/indicator lights and audible Power outlet ................................................... 2-29
reminders ......................................................... 2-9 Cigarette lighter and ashtray .......................... 2-30
Checking bulbs ........................................... 2-9 Front ......................................................... 2-30
Warning lights............................................. 2-9 Rear .......................................................... 2-30
Indicator lights .......................................... 2-14 Storage ........................................................... 2-31
Audible reminders ..................................... 2-16 Door pocket .............................................. 2-31
Security systems ............................................. 2-17 Instrument pocket (except for navigation
Vehicle security system.............................. 2-17 system equipped models) .......................... 2-31
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System .......... 2-18 Sunglasses holder .................................... 2-32
Windshield wiper and washer switch .............. 2-19 Cup holder ................................................ 2-32
Rear window and outside mirror defroster Glove box .................................................. 2-35
switch ............................................................ 2-20 Upper glove box (except for navigation
Headlight and turn signal switch..................... 2-21 system equipped models).......................... 2-35
Xenon headlights ....................................... 2-21 Console box .............................................. 2-36
Headlight switch ........................................ 2-21 Rear armrest pocket (Sedan) ..................... 2-37
Turn signal switch ..................................... 2-24 Card holder (driver’s side) ......................... 2-38
Fog light switch ......................................... 2-25 Coat hook (Coupe) .................................... 2-38
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
Stowing golf bags (Coupe) ........................ 2-39 HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if so
Windows......................................................... 2-39 equipped) ....................................................... 2-46
Power windows ......................................... 2-39 Programming HomeLink ........................... 2-47
Automatic adjusting function (Coupe) ........ 2-41 Programming HomeLink for Canadian
Sunroof (if so equipped)................................. 2-42 customers ................................................. 2-48
Automatic sunroof ..................................... 2-42 Operating the HomeLink Universal
Interior lights ................................................. 2-44 Transceiver................................................ 2-49
Room light ................................................ 2-44 Programming trouble-diagnosis................. 2-49
Map lights................................................. 2-44 Clearing the programmed information ....... 2-49
Personal lights ......................................... 2-45 Reprogramming a single HomeLink
Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)................. 2-46 button ....................................................... 2-49
Trunk light...................................................... 2-46 If your vehicle is stolen ............................. 2-50
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Center ventilator
9. Center display - Compass, Air condi-
tioner, Ambient temperature, Front
passenger air bag status light
10. Rear window and outside mirror de-
fogger switch
11. Heater/air conditioner control
12. Clock
13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)
14. Passenger supplemental air bag
15. Upper glove box (except for Naviga-
tion system equipped models)
16. Side ventilator
17. Hood lock release handle
18. Trunk lid release switch
19. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
switch
20. Instrument brightness control
21. Outside mirror remote control switch
22. Fuse box
23. Electric steering column control (if so
equipped)
24. Manual steering column control
25. Ignition switch/steering lock
SSI0159
26. Snow mode switch (if so equipped)
27. Audio system
1. Headlight, fog light and turn signal Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System 28. Ashtray/Cigarette lighter
switch 29. Heated seat switch
(if so equipped) 30. Hazard warning flasher switch
2. Security indicator light 4. Driver supplemental air bag/Horn
3. Steering wheel switch for audio control 31. Glove box
5. Meters/gauges
or steering wheel switch for 6. Cruise control main/set switch *: Refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual.
7. Windshield wiper/washer switch
2-2 Instruments and controls
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
METERS AND GAUGES
SIC2559
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
Odometer/Twin trip odometer/
Up-shift indicator setting (MT
SSI0075
models)
1. Warning/Indicator lights 5. Engine coolant temperature gauge The odometer q 1 /twin trip odometer or
2. Tachometer 6. Trip odometer reset switch up-shift indicator setting (MT models) q
2
3. Automatic transmission position indi- are displayed when the ignition switch is
cator (AT models)/Manual transmis- 7. Odometer (Total/Twin trip)/Up-shift in- in the ON position.
sion up-shift indicator (MT models) dicator setting (MT models)
4. Speedometer 8. Fuel gauge
Instruments and controls 2-3
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the dis-
tance of individual trips.
Changing the display:
Pushing the trip odometer reset switch q
3
changes the display as follows.
AT models:
TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A
MT models:
TRIP A → TRIP B → Up-shift indicator set-
SIC2560 SIC2561
ting mode → TRIP A
See “Driving the vehicle” in the “5. Start- TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
ing and driving” section for the use of the
The tachometer indicates engine speed in GAUGE
up-shift indicator.
revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev The gauge indicates the engine coolant
Resetting the trip odometer: the engine into the red zone q
A . temperature.
Pushing the trip odometer reset switch for The engine coolant temperature is within
more than 1 second resets the trip odom- CAUTION the normal range q A when the gauge
eter to zero. needle points within the zone shown in
When engine speed approaches the red the illustration.
zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the
The engine coolant temperature will vary
engine in the red zone may cause serious en- with the outside air temperature and driv-
gine damage. ing conditions.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
The low fuel warning light comes on when
CAUTION the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon
as it is convenient, preferably before the
gauge reaches the E (Empty) position.
If the gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
There will be a small reserve of fuel in the
perature near the hot (H) of the normal tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease the E (Empty) position.
temperature. If gauge is over the normal
range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely The indicates that the fuel-filler door
is located on the passenger’s side of the
possible. If the engine is overheated, contin-
vehicle.
ued operation of the vehicle may seriously
damage the engine. See “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “6. In case of emergency”
CAUTION
section for immediate action required.
SIC2562 O If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
FUEL GAUGE may come on. Refuel as soon as pos-
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel sible. After a few driving trips, the
level in the tank. lamp should turn off. If the lamp
remains on after a few driving trips, have
The gauge may move slightly during brak-
the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI
ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or
down hill. dealer.
The gauge needle is designed to move to O For additional information, see “Mal-
the E (Empty) position when the ignition function indicator lamp (MIL)” later in
key is turned to the OFF position. this section.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-
ters the E (Empty) position.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
COMPASS DISPLAY
N: north
E: east
S: south
W: west
C: vehicle direction
The above example shows the display
changes from “East” to “East-southeast”.
If the compass unit does not receive any
correct signal for 10 minutes, the com-
pass will display the bar “-- -- --”. Have
the vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer.
SIC2563
The compass is located in the center dis-

play.
Push COMP switch q A to turn the display
on or off when the ignition switch is in
the ON position. The heading direction
will be displayed.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north
and geographical north is known as vari-
ance. In some areas, this difference can
sometimes be great enough to cause
false compass readings. Follow these in-
structions to set the variance for your par-
ticular location if this happens:
1. Establish your location on the zone
map qA . Record your zone number.

sition while pushing the COMP switch.
3. Continue to push the COMP switch for
more than 5 seconds until the current
zone entry number is displayed on the
compass display.
If any operations are not carried out
for more than 5 seconds, the display
shows direction as normal.
4. Push the COMP switch repeatedly until
the new zone entry number is dis-
played.
Once the desired zone number is dis-
played, stop pushing the COMP switch
and the display will show compass direc-
tion within a few seconds.
SIC2243A
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
If a magnet is located near the driver side Correction functions of the
instrument panel (the sensor is located in- compass display
side) or the vehicle is driven where the ter-
restrial magnetism is disturbed, the com- If the direction is not shown correctly,
pass display may not indicate the correct carry out the correction procedure below.
direction. 1. Push the COMP switch for about 10
O The compass may not display correctly seconds. The direction bar starts
at the following places: blinking.
— under a bridge 2. Turn off electrical equipment such as
lights, hazard indicator, air condi-
— among buildings tioner, etc. Then drive the vehicle
— on an iron bridge slowly (less than 3 MPH (5 km/h)) and
turn the vehicle one or more times in
— inside a tunnel an open and safe area. When the com-
— above a subway pass displays the direction, the proce-
dure is completed.
— on a railway crossing
— in an underground parking lot
— near a huge vehicle
— near a transformer substation
If you carry out correction procedure
at one of the above places, the proce-
dure may not be completed correctly.
O If air conditioner fan speed is
maximum, the compass display may
shake. This is normal. Reduce the fan
speed to avoid shaking the display.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light (AWD
Low tire pressure warning light Cruise set switch indicator light
models)
or Anti-lock brake warning light Low washer fluid warning light Front passenger air bag status light
Automatic transmission check warning P position selecting warning light (for

High beam indicator light (Blue)
light Intelligent Key system)
Rear Active Steer (RAS) warning light (if
or Brake warning light Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
so equipped)
Charge warning light Seat belt warning light Slip indicator light
Snow mode indicator light (if so

Door open warning light Supplemental air bag warning light
equipped)
Automatic transmission position indicator
Engine oil pressure warning light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
light
Intelligent Key warning light (for Intelli- Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indica-
Cruise main switch indicator light
gent Key system) tor light
Low fuel warning light
CHECKING BULBS , , , WARNING LIGHTS

Apply the parking brake and turn the igni-
tion key to ON without starting the en- All-wheel drive (AWD)
If any light fails to come on, it may indi-
gine. The following lights will come on: cate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit warning light (AWD models)
, or , , , in the electrical system. Have the system The light comes on when the ignition
The following lights come on briefly and repaired promptly. switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon
then go off: after the engine is started.
, or , , , ,
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
If the AWD system malfunctions, or the di- system (ABS)” in the “5. Starting and
ameter of the front and the rear wheels • blinks slowly (about once every 2 sec- driving” section for further details.
are different, the warning light will either onds):
remain illuminated or blink. See “All- If the light comes on while you are driving,
Pull off the road in a safe area, and
wheel drive (AWD) warning light” in the contact an INFINITI dealer for repair.
idle the engine. Check that all tire
“5. Starting and driving” section. sizes are the same, tire pressure is Automatic transmission
correct and tires are not worn. check warning light
CAUTION
If the warning light is still on after the above When the ignition switch is turned to the
operations, have your vehicle checked by an ON position, the automatic transmission
O If the warning light comes on while
INFINITI dealer as soon as possible. check warning light comes on and then
driving there may be a malfunction in the
turns off. This indicates that the auto-
AWD system. Reduce the vehicle speed
matic transmission system is operational.
and have your vehicle checked by an or Anti-lock brake
INFINITI dealer as soon as possible. If the light comes on while the engine is
warning light running or while driving, it may indicate
O Do not drive on dry, hard surface roads in When the ignition switch is turned to the that the automatic transmission system is
the SNOW mode. ON position, the anti-lock brake warning not functioning properly. Have an INFINITI
light will illuminate and then turn off. This dealer check and repair the transmission.
O If the AWD warning light blinks on when
you are driving: indicates the anti-lock brake system (ABS) or Brake warning
is operational.
• blinks rapidly (about twice a second): light
If the light comes on while the engine is
Pull off the road in a safe area, and The brake warning light indicates the
running, it may indicate the anti-lock
idle the engine. The driving mode will brake system is not functioning properly. parking brake system operation, low
change to 2WD to prevent the AWD brake fluid level of the brake system and
Have the system checked by an INFINITI
system from malfunctioning. Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) malfunction.
dealer.
If the warning light turns off, you can Parking brake indicator:
drive again. If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
anti-lock function of the brake will cease When the ignition switch is in the ON po-
operation but the ordinary brakes will sition, the light comes on when the park-
continue to operate. See “Anti-lock brake ing brake is applied.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Low brake fluid warning light: belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing
The light warns of a low brake fluid level. WARNING or if the light remains on, see an INFINITI
If the light comes on while the engine is dealer immediately.
running with the parking brake not ap- O Your brake system may not be working
plied, stop the vehicle and perform the properly if the warning light is on. CAUTION
following: Driving could be dangerous. If you judge
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake it to be safe, drive carefully to the Do not continue driving if the generator belt
fluid as necessary. See “Brake fluid” nearest service station for repairs. Oth- is loose, broken or missing.
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it- erwise, have your vehicle towed because
yourself” section. driving it could be dangerous.
Door open warning light
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have O Pressing the brake pedal with the engine
the warning system checked by an stopped and/or a low brake fluid level This light comes on when any of the
INFINITI dealer. doors are not closed securely while the
may increase your stopping distance
ignition switch is in the ON position.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) warning and braking will require greater pedal ef-
indicator: fort as well as pedal travel. Engine oil pressure warning
When the parking brake is released and O If the brake fluid level is below the MINI- light
the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both MUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid res-
the brake warning light and the anti-lock This light warns of low engine oil pres-
ervoir, do not drive until the brake sure. If the light flickers or comes on dur-
brake system warning light illuminate, it
may indicate the anti-lock brake system is system has been checked by an INFINITI ing normal driving, pull off the road in a
not functioning properly. Have the brake dealer. safe area, stop the engine immediately
system checked by an INFINITI dealer. See and call an INFINITI dealer or other autho-
“Anti-lock brake warning light” earlier in rized repair shop.
this section. Charge warning light
The engine oil pressure warning light is
If the light comes on while the engine is not designed to indicate a low oil level.
running, it may indicate that the charging Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See
system is not functioning properly. Turn “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and
the engine off and check the alternator do-it-yourself” section.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Low fuel warning light the tire pressure to the recommended
CAUTION This light comes on when the fuel in the
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label to turn the light
tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is OFF.
Running the engine with the engine oil pres- convenient, preferably before the fuel
sure warning light on could cause serious gauge reaches the E (Empty) position. For additional information, see “Tire pres-
damage to the engine almost immediately. sure monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.
There will be a small reserve of fuel re-
Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do Starting and driving” section and in the
maining in the fuel tank when the fuel
so. “6. In case of emergency” section.
gauge needle reaches the E (Empty) posi-
tion. TPMS malfunction:
Intelligent Key warning light Low tire pressure warning If the TPMS is not functioning properly,
(for Intelligent Key system) light the low tire pressure warning light will
flash for approximately 1 minute when the
This light comes on in green when it is Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres- ignition switch is turned ON. The light will
possible to turn the ignition switch. sure monitoring system (TPMS) that moni- remain on after the 1 minute. Have the
tors the tire pressure of all tires except
When the light comes on in red, it is not system checked by an INFINITI dealer.
the spare.
possible to turn the switch.
For additional information, see “Tire pres-
The low tire pressure warning light warns
O The warning light blinks in red when of low tire pressure or indicates that the sure monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.
the Intelligent Key is outside the ve- TPMS is not functioning properly. Starting and driving” section.
hicle with the ignition switch in the
After the ignition switch is turned ON, this
ACC or ON position. Confirm the loca-
light illuminates for about 1 second and
WARNING
tion of the key as soon as possible
when the warning light blinks in red. turns off.
O If the light does not illuminate with the
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key Low tire pressure warning:
with you while driving the vehicle. ignition switch turned ON, have the ve-
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire hicle checked by an INFINITI dealer as
O The warning light goes off about 10 pressure, the warning light will illuminate. soon as possible.
seconds after the Intelligent Key is
When the low tire pressure warning light
brought inside the vehicle.
illuminates, you should stop and adjust
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
When the warning light blinks, move the
O If the light illuminates while driving, CAUTION selector lever to P position and return the
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or ignition switch to the LOCK position.
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, O The TPMS is not a substitute for the
pull off the road to a safe location and Rear Active Steer (RAS)
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Se- warning light (if so
check the tire pressure regularly.
rious vehicle damage could occur and equipped)
may lead to an accident and could result O If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of
less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS If the light comes on while the engine is
in serious personal injury. Check the tire running, it may indicate that there is a
pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire may not operate correctly.
malfunction with the Rear Active Steer
pressure to the recommended COLD tire O Be sure to install the specified size of (RAS) portion of the steering system. Have
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading tires to the four wheels correctly. the system checked by an INFINITI dealer.
Information label to turn the low tire
pressure warning light OFF. If the light For further information about the RAS sys-
still comes on while driving after ad- Low washer fluid warning tem, see “Rear Active Steer (RAS) system”
light in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
justing the tire pressure, a tire may be
flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with This light comes on when the washer tank If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
a spare tire as soon as possible. fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as RAS function will cease but driving can be
necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in continued.
O When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” If the light comes on while you are driving,
replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, section.
the TPMS will not function and the low tire contact an INFINITI dealer for repair.
pressure warning light will flash. Contact P position selecting warning Seat belt warning light and
your INFINITI dealer as soon as possible for light (for Intelligent Key chime
tire replacement and/or system resetting. system)
The light and chime remind you to fasten
O Replacing tires with those not originally The light blinks in red when the selector the driver’s seat belt. The light illuminates
specified by INFINITI could affect the lever is not in the P (Park) position and whenever the ignition switch is pushed to
proper operation of the TPMS. you are outside the vehicle with the Intel- the ON position, and will remain illumi-
ligent Key. nated until the driver’s seat belt is fas-
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
tened. At the same time, the chime will after about 7 seconds if the system is op-
sound for about 6 seconds unless the erational. front air bag, supplemental side air bag, cur-
driver’s seat belt is securely fastened. tain side-impact air bag systems and/or pre-
If any of the following conditions occur,
the supplemental front air bag, supple- tensioner seat belt systems will not operate
The seat belt warning light may also illu-
mental side air bag and curtain side- in an accident. To help avoid injury to your-
minate if the front passenger’s seat belt
impact air bag systems, and pre-tensioner self or others, have your vehicle checked by
is not fastened when the front passen-
ger’s seat is occupied (if so equipped). seat belt need servicing and your vehicle an INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.
For 5 seconds after the ignition switch is must be taken to your an INFINITI dealer.
in the ON position, the system does not O The supplemental air bag warning INDICATOR LIGHTS
activate the warning light for the front light remains on after approximately 7
passenger. seconds. Automatic transmission
If the light blinks or illuminates even if O The supplemental air bag warning position indicator light
the driver’s and front passenger’s seat light flashes intermittently. When the ignition switch is turned to the
belts are fastened, it may indicate that ON position, the indicator in the instru-
the pre-crash seat belt system (if so O The supplemental air bag warning
light does not come on at all. ment panel shows the automatic trans-
equipped) has a malfunction. Have an mission selector lever position. See “Driv-
INFINITI dealer check and repair the Unless checked and repaired, the Supple- ing with automatic transmission” in the
system. mental Restraint System and/or the pre- “5. Starting and driving” section.
See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — tensioner seat belt may not function prop-
Seats, seat belts and supplemental re- erly. For additional information, see Cruise main switch
straint system” section for precautions on “Supplemental restraint system” in the indicator light
seat belt usage. “1. Safety — Seats, restraints and supple-
mental restraint system” section. The light comes on when the cruise con-
Supplemental air bag trol main switch is pushed. The light goes
out when the main switch is pushed
warning light WARNING again. When the cruise main switch indi-
After turning the ignition switch to the ON cator light comes on, the cruise control
position, the supplemental air bag If the supplemental air bag warning light is system is operational.
warning light will illuminate. The supple- on, it could mean that the supplemental
mental air bag warning light will turn off
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Cruise set switch indicator Malfunction indicator lamp on in one of two ways:
light (MIL) O Malfunction indicator lamp on steady
The light comes on while the vehicle If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) — An emission control system mal-
speed is controlled by the cruise control comes on steady or blinks while the en- function has been detected. Check the
system. If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a poten- fuel-filler cap. If the fuel-filler cap is
gine is running, it may indicate the cruise tial emission control malfunction. loose or missing, tighten or install the
control system is not functioning prop- cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
The malfunction indicator lamp may also The lamp should turn off after a
erly. Have the system checked by an
come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is few driving trips. If the lamp
INFINITI dealer.
loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out does not turn off after a few driving
Front passenger air bag of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler trips, have the vehicle inspected by an
status light cap is installed and closed tightly, and INFINITI dealer. You do not need to
that the vehicle has at least three gallons have your vehicle towed to the re-
The front passenger air bag status light, (14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. tailer.
located on the center display, will be lit
and the passenger front air bag will be off After a few driving trips, the lamp O Malfunction indicator lamp blinking —
depending on how the front passenger should turn off if no other potential emis- An engine misfire has been detected
seat is being used. sion control system malfunction exists. which may damage the emission con-
trol system. To reduce or avoid emis-
For front passenger air bag status light If this indicator lamp comes on steady for
20 seconds and then blinks for 10 sec- sion control system damage:
operation, see “INFINITI advanced air bag
onds when the engine is not running, it a) Do not drive at speeds above 45
system” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat
indicates that the vehicle is not ready for MPH (72 km/h).
belts and supplemental restraint system”
an emission control system inspection/ b) Avoid hard acceleration or decel-
section of this manual. maintenance test. See “Readiness for eration.
High beam indicator light inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the c) Avoid steep uphill grades.
“9. Technical and consumer information”
(Blue) section of this manual.
d) If possible, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled or towed.
This light comes on when the headlight
Operation
high beam is on and goes out when the The malfunction indicator lamp may
low beam is selected. The malfunction indicator lamp will come stop blinking and come on steady.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Have the vehicle inspected by an See “SNOW MODE SWITCH” in the “2. In- formation, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control
INFINITI dealer. You do not need to struments and controls” section. (VDC) system” in the “5. Starting and
have your vehicle towed to the re- driving” section of this manual.
tailer. Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights AUDIBLE REMINDERS
CAUTION The light flashes when the turn signal Key reminder chime
switch lever or hazard switch is turned The chime will sound if the driver’s side
Continued vehicle operation without having on. door is opened while the key is left in the
the emission control system checked and re- ignition switch (ignition switch is turned
paired as necessary could lead to poor drive- Vehicle Dynamic Control off). Remove the key and take it with you
ability, reduced fuel economy, and possible (VDC) off indicator light when leaving the vehicle.
damage to the emission control system. The light comes on when the vehicle dy- Light reminder chime
namic control (VDC) off switch is pushed
to OFF. This indicates that the VDC system The chime will sound when the front door
Slip indicator light is not operating. is opened with the headlight switch on
The light will blink when the vehicle dy- unless the ignition switch is in the ON po-
This light also comes on when the igni- sition.
namic control (VDC) system is operating, tion switch is turned to the ON position.
thus alerting the driver to the fact that the The light will turn off if the VDC system is Make sure to turn the light switch off
road surface is slippery and the vehicle is operational. when you leave the vehicle.
nearing its traction limits.
When the VDC off indicator light and slip Brake pad wear warning
This light also comes on when the igni- indicator light come on with the VDC sys-
tion switch is turned to the ON position. tem turned on, this light alerts the driver The disc brake pads have audible wear
The light will turn off if the VDC is opera- to the fact that the VDC system fail-safe warnings. When a brake pad requires re-
tional. mode is operating and the system may placement, it will make a high pitched
not be functioning properly. Have the sys- scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-
Snow mode indicator light tion whether or not the brake pedal is de-
tem checked by an INFINITI dealer. If a
(if so equipped) malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC pressed. Have the brakes checked as
system function will be canceled but the soon as possible if the warning sound is
When selecting SNOW mode while the en-
vehicle is still driveable. For additional in- heard.
gine is running, this light will illuminate.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SECURITY SYSTEMS
that activates when a vehicle is moved or

when a vibration occurs.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but
cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the
theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-
nents in all situations. Always secure your
vehicle even if parking for a brief period.
Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and
always lock it when unattended. Be aware
of your surroundings, and park in secure,
well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protec-
tion, such as component locks, identifica-
SIC2132 tion markers, and tracking systems, are SIC2564
available at auto supply stores and spe-
Your vehicle has two types of security cialty shops. An INFINITI dealer may also How to arm the vehicle security
systems, as follows: offer such equipment. Check with your in- system
surance company to see if you may be eli-
O Vehicle Security System gible for discounts for various theft pro- 1. Close all windows.
O INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System tection features.
The system can be armed even if the win-
The security condition will be shown by dows are open.
the security indicator light. 2. O Remove the key from the ignition
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM switch.
The vehicle security system provides vi- O Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
sual and audible alarm signals if position or remove the mechanical
someone opens the doors, hood, or trunk key from the ignition switch (Intelli-
lid when the system is armed. It is not, gent Key equipped model).
however, a motion detection type system
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
3. Close and lock all doors, hood and Vehicle security system activation nition switch is turned to the ACC or ON
trunk lid. position.
The security system will give the following
Lock all doors by pushing the LOCK alarm: If the system does not operate as de-
button on the keyfob, the Intelli- scribed above, have it checked by an
gent Key or by pushing any front door O The headlights blink and the horn INFINITI dealer.
handle request switch or turning the sounds intermittently.
door key. When using the remote key- INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
O The alarm automatically turns off after
less entry, the hazard indicators will approximately 50 seconds. However, SYSTEM
operate as shown in “Remote keyless the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
entry system” or “Intelligent Key tampered with again. The alarm can will not allow the engine to start without
system” in the “3. Pre-driving checks be shut off by unlocking a door with the use of the registered key.
and adjustments” section. the key, by pushing any front door
handle request switch or by pushing If the engine fails to start using the regis-
4. Confirm that the security indicator the UNLOCK button on the keyfob tered key (for example, when interference
light qA comes on. The security indica-
or Intelligent Key. is caused by another registered key, an
tor light glows for about 30 seconds automated toll road device or automated
and then blinks. The system is now The alarm is activated by:
payment device on the key ring), restart
armed. If, during this 30-second time O Opening the door without using the the engine using the following proce-
period, the door is unlocked by the key or keyfob or Intelligent Key. dures:
key, the remote keyless entry or the
front door request switch, or the igni- O Opening the trunk lid without using 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-
tion switch is turned to the ACC or ON the keyfob or Intelligent Key. sition for approximately 5 seconds.
position, the system will not be O Opening the hood.
armed. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or
How to stop an activated alarm LOCK position and wait approximately
Even when the driver and/or passengers 10 seconds.
are in the vehicle, the system will be The alarm will stop only by unlocking a
armed with all doors, hood and trunk lid door with the key, by pushing any door 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
locked and ignition switch off. Turn the ig- handle request switch or by pushing the 4. Restart the engine while holding the
nition switch to the ACC position to turn off UNLOCK button on keyfob or Intelli- device (which may have caused the in-
the system. gent Key. The alarm will not stop if the ig-
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
terference) separate from the regis-

tered key.
If this procedure allows the engine to
start, INFINITI recommends placing the
registered key on a separate key ring
to avoid interference from other de-
vices.
Statement related to section 15 of FCC
rules for INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer
System (CONT ASSY-BCM, ANT ASSY-
IMMOBILIZER)
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
SIC2564 SIC2821
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions;
Security indicator light The windshield wiper and washer oper-
(1) This device may not cause harmful in- ates when the ignition switch is in the ON
terference, and (2) this device must accept If INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System is position.
any interference received, including inter- malfunctioning, indicator light q
A will re-
ference that may cause undesired opera- main on while the ignition switch is in the Push the lever down to operate the wiper
tion of the device. ON position. at the following speed:
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX- If the light still remains on and/or the en- q
1 Intermittent — intermittent operation
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE- gine will not start, see an INFINITI dealer can be adjusted by turning the knob
SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID for INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System toward q A (Slower) or qB (Faster). Also,
THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE service as soon as possible. Bring all reg- the intermittent operation speed varies
EQUIPMENT. istered keys that you have when visiting in accordance with the vehicle speed.
an INFINITI dealer for service. (For example, when the vehicle speed
is high, the intermittent operation
speed will be faster.)
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR
DEFROSTER SWITCH
q
2 Low — continuous low speed opera-
tion mended levels before pouring the fluid
into the window washer reservoir tank.
q
3 High — continuous high speed opera-
Do not use the window washer reservoir
tion
tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate
Push the lever up q 4 to have one sweep and water.
operation of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you q5 to operate
the washer. Then the wiper will also oper- WARNING
ate several times.
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
CAUTION tion may freeze on the windshield and ob-
scure your vision which may lead to an acci-
dent. Warm the windshield with the de- SIC2565
O Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 30 seconds. froster before you wash the windshield. To defog/defrost the rear window glass
O Do not operate the washer if the reser- and outside mirrors, start the engine and
voir tank is empty. push the switch q 1 on. The indicator light
qA will come on. Push the switch again to
O Do not fill the window washer reservoir turn the defroster off.
tank with washer fluid concentrates at It will automatically turn off in approxi-
full strength. Some methyl alcohol mately 15 minutes.
based washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if spilled CAUTION
while filling the window washer reser-
voir tank.
When cleaning the inner side of the rear win-
O Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with dow, be careful not to scratch or damage the
water to the manufacturer’s recom- rear window defroster.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
XENON HEADLIGHTS When the xenon headlight is initially

turned on, its brightness or color varies
slightly. However, the color and bright-
WARNING ness will soon stabilize.
O The life of xenon headlights will be
HIGH VOLTAGE shortened by frequent on-off opera-
tion. It is generally desirable not to
O When xenon headlights are on, they pro- turn off the headlights for short inter-
duce a high voltage. To prevent an elec- vals (for example, when the vehicle
tric shock, never attempt to modify or stops at a traffic signal). Even when the
daytime running lights are active
disassemble. Always have your xenon
(Canada only), the xenon headlights do
headlights replaced at an INFINITI not turn on. This way the life of the
dealer. xenon headlights is not reduced.
SIC2227
O Xenon headlights provide considerably O If a xenon headlight bulb is close to Type A
more light than conventional headlights. burning out, the brightness will drasti-
If they are not correctly aimed, they cally decrease, the light will start HEADLIGHT SWITCH
might temporarily blind an oncoming blinking, or the color of the light will Lighting
driver or the driver ahead of you and become reddish. If one or more of the
cause a serious accident. If headlights above signs appear, contact an INFINITI q1 Turn the switch to the position:
are not aimed correctly, immediately dealer.
The front park, side marker, tail, li-
take your vehicle to an INFINITI dealer cense plate and instrument lights will
and have the headlights adjusted come on.
correctly.
q
2 Turn the switch to the position:
Headlights will come on and all the
other lights remain on.
w 06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X
To turn the autolight system off, turn the
switch to the OFF, or position.
The autolight system can turn on the
headlights automatically when it is dark,
turn off the headlights when it is light,
and keep the headlights on for up to 45
seconds after you turn the ignition switch
to the OFF position and open any door
then close all the doors.
If the ignition switch is turned off and one
of the doors is opened and this condition
is continued, the headlights remain on for
5 minutes.
SIC2228 SIC2229
Type B Autolight system
Autolight system (if so equipped)
CAUTION
The autolight system allows the head-
Use the headlights with the engine running lights to be set so they turn on and off
automatically.
to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
To set the autolight system:
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in
the AUTO q
1 position.

sition.
3. The autolight system automatically
turns the headlights on and off.
w 06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X
Battery saver system
O When the headlight switch is in the
or position while the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position, the
lights (including the front fog light)
will automatically turn off 5 minutes
after the ignition switch has been
turned to the OFF position.
O When the headlight switch remains in
the or position after the
lights automatically turn off, the lights
will turn on for 5 minutes when the
headlight switch is turned to the OFF
SIC1230C SIC2230 position and then turned to the
or position.
Be sure not to put anything on top of the Headlight beam select
photo sensor q A located on the top left-
hand side of the instrument panel. The q
1 To select the low beam, put the lever CAUTION
photo sensor controls the autolamp; if it is in the neutral position as shown.
covered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is q
2 To select the high beam, push the Even though the battery saver feature auto-
dark and the headlights will illuminate. lever forward while the switch is in the matically turns off the headlights after a pe-
position. Pull it back to select the riod of time, you should turn the headlight
low beam. switch to the OFF position when the engine
is not running to avoid discharging the ve-
q
3 Pulling the lever toward you will flash
the headlight high beam even when hicle battery.
the headlight switch is in the OFF posi-
tion.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Daytime running light system
(Canada only)
The headlights automatically illuminate at
a reduced intensity when the engine is
started with the parking brake released.
The daytime running lights operate with
the headlight switch in the OFF position
or in the position. Turn the headlight
switch to the position for full illumi-
nation when driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the daytime running
lights do not illuminate. The daytime run-
ning lights illuminate once the parking SIC2566 SIC2231
brake is released. The daytime running
lights will remain on until the ignition Instrument brightness control TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
switch is turned off. The instrument brightness control oper- Turn signal
ates when the light switch is in the AUTO
WARNING (when lighting), or position. q
1 Turn signal
Turn the control to the darkening direc- Move the lever up or down to signal the
When the daytime running light system is tion qA or the brightening direction qB to
turning direction. When the turn is com-
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. adjust the brightness of the instrument pleted, the turn signals cancel automati-
It is necessary at dusk to turn on your head- panel (except power window switch cally.
lights. Failure to do so could cause an acci- lights).
dent injuring yourself and others. When the control is turned to the upper
q
2 Lane change signal
end, the light intensity will be at To indicate a lane change, move the lever
maximum. When the control is turned to up or down to the point where lights
the lower end, the light will be turned off. begin flashing.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH
O Do not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless un-
usual circumstances force you to drive
so slowly that your vehicle might be-
come a hazard to other traffic.
O Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flasher can be actuated with the igni-

tion switch either off or on.
SIC1836A SIC2574
FOG LIGHT SWITCH Push the switch on to warn other drivers

when you must stop or park under emer-
To turn the fog lights on, turn the head- gency conditions. All turn signal lights
light switch to the position, then will flash.
turn the switch to the position. To
turn them off, turn the switch to the OFF Some state or provincial laws may prohibit
position. the use of the hazard warning flasher
The headlights must be on and the low switch while driving.
beams selected for the fog lights to oper-
ate. The fog lights automatically turn off WARNING
when the high beam headlights are se-
lected. O If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
HORN HEATED SEATS
SIC1838 SIC2793 SIC2672

AT models MT models
To sound the horn, push on or near the The front seats are warmed by built-in ter OFF position between low and
horn marks of the steering wheel. heaters. The switches located on the cen- high.
ter console can be operated indepen-
The indicator light in the switch q
C will
WARNING dently (driver side seat qA and front pas-
illuminate when low or high is se-
senger seat q B ) of each other.
lected.
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could 1. Start the engine.
affect proper operation of the supplemental The heater is controlled by a thermo-
2. Select heat range. stat, automatically turning the heater
front air bag system. Tampering with the
on and off. The indicator light will re-
supplemental front air bag system may re- q
1 For low heat, push the (Low)
main on as long as the switch is on.
sult in serious personal injury. side of the switch.
3. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed,
q
2 For high heat, push the
or before you leave the vehicle, be
(High) side of the switch.
sure to turn the switch to the off posi-
q
3 For no heat, the switch has a cen- tion (center) q
3 .
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SNOW MODE SWITCH (if so equipped)
CAUTION O If any abnormalities are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn the
O The battery could run down if the seat switch off and have the system checked
heater is operated while the engine is by an INFINITI dealer.
not running.
O Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the seat.
O Do not put anything on the seat which in-
sulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may
become overheated.
SIC2660
O Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar For driving or starting the vehicle on
object. This may result in damage to the snowy roads or slippery areas, push the
heater. SNOW mode switch to the ON position
and then the indicator light in the switch
O Any liquid spilled on the heated seat and the SNOW indicator light in the in-
should be removed immediately with a strument panel will illuminate.
dry cloth. When the SNOW mode is activated, en-
gine output is controlled to reduce wheel
O When cleaning the seat, never use gaso- spin.
line, benzine, thinner, or any similar
materials.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF
SWITCH
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
CAUTION the engine to turn on the system. See
“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”
in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
When turning the vehicle in SNOW mode on
paved roads, you may feel a braking effect.
This is a normal condition of the AWD model.
SIC1881
The vehicle should be driven with the Ve-

hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for
most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will
be reduced even if the accelerator is de-
pressed to the floor. If maximum engine
power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system, push the VDC OFF switch (lo-
cated on the lower side of the instrument
panel). The indicator will come on.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
CLOCK POWER OUTLET
SIC2568 SIC1840B SIC2673

Automatic transmission model Manual transmission models
If the power supply is disconnected, the The power outlet is for powering electrical O Use power outlets with the engine running
clock will not indicate the correct time. Re- accessories such as cellular telephones. to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
adjust the time.
O Avoid using power outlets when the air
ADJUSTING THE TIME CAUTION conditioner, headlights or rear window de-
froster is on.
To move the time forward, push the O The outlet and plug may be hot during or
button q
1 . immediately after use. O Before inserting or disconnecting a plug,
be sure the electrical accessory being used
To move the time backward, push the O This power outlet is not designed for use is turned OFF.
button q
2 . with a cigarette lighter unit.
O Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good
Push and hold each adjusting switch to O Do not use with accessories that exceed a contact is not made, the plug may overheat
move the time forward or backward con- 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not or the internal temperature fuse may open.
tinuously. use double adapters or more than one O When not in use, be sure to close the cap.
electrical accessory. Do not allow water to contact the outlet.
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAY
CAUTION
The cigarette lighter socket is a power
source for the cigarette lighter element only.
The use of the cigarette lighter socket as a
power source for any other accessory is not
recommended. Do not use any other power
outlet for an accessory lighter.
SIC2569 SIC2570
FRONT REAR
To open the ashtray, push q
1 . To open the ashtray, pull q
1 .
To take out the ashtray, pull out q

2 . To take out the ashtray, push down q
2 ,
and pull out.
The cigarette lighter operates when the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON posi-
tion. To heat the cigarette lighter, push in WARNING
q3 until it latches. When the lighter is
heated, it will spring out automatically. The cigarette lighter should not be used
Return the cigarette lighter to its original while driving so full attention may be given
position after use. to vehicle operation.
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
STORAGE
CAUTION
Do not store items in the door pocket that are
larger then the opening in the closed posi-
tion. Do not force the door pocket closed if an
item holds the door pocket in the open posi-
tion. Doing so may damage the door pocket.
SIC3171 SIC2815
DOOR POCKETS INSTRUMENT POCKET (except for

The door pockets are located on the driv- navigation system equipped models)
er’s and front passenger’s doors. The
door pocket opening can be expanded to WARNING
make it easier to store and retrieve items.
Items stored in the door pocket should O The instrument pocket should not be
not be larger than the door pocket used while driving so full attention may
opening in its closed position. Make sure be given to vehicle operation.
the item does not hold the door pocket in O Keep the pocket lid closed while driving
the open position. to help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
To open the instrument pocket, pull the
lid up.
To close, push the lid down.
w 06.1.12/V35-D/V5.0 X
CAUTION
O Do not use for anything other than sun-
glasses.
O Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the sun-
glasses.
SIC1971 SIC2571
Automatic transmission models — Front
SUNGLASSES HOLDER CUP HOLDER
The sunglasses holder can be opened by
pushing the button q A . To close, push the WARNING
holder up until the lock latches.
The cup holder should not be used while
WARNING driving so full attention may be given to ve-
hicle operation.
O The sunglasses holder should not be
used while driving so full attention may
Front (Automatic transmission models):
be given to vehicle operation.
To open the cup holder, push the lid q
1 .
O Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
driving to prevent an accident. The flap will be folded down when insert-
ing a large container.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
To remove the inner tray for cleaning, pull
it up as illustrated q
2 .
SIC2674 SIC2675A
Manual transmission models — Front Manual transmission models — Console box
Front (Manual transmission models): To open the console boxes, push the
knob q
A and pull up the lid.
To open the cup holder, slide the lid q
1 .
To close, push the lid down until the lock
Install the partition plate into the slit q
2 .
latches.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.
SIC1846B SIC2572
Rear Coupe
Soft bottle holder
CAUTION
CAUTION
O Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent O The bottle holder/door pocket should
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it not be used while driving so full atten-
can scald you or your passenger. tion may be given to vehicle operation.
O Use only soft cups in the cup holder. O Do not use bottle holder for any other
Hard objects can injure you in an acci- objects that could be thrown about in the
dent. vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
To open the cup holder, pull the lid.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
SIC2573 SIC1848A
GLOVE BOX UPPER GLOVE BOX (except for

To open the glove box, pull the handle q
1 .
navigation system equipped
models)
To close, push the lid in until the lock
latches. To open the upper glove box, push the
button q
A .
To lock q
2 /unlock q
3 the glove box, use
the master key. To close, push the lid down until the lock
latches.
The glove box light illuminates when the
glove box is opened with the headlight The upper glove box light illuminates
switch on. when the upper glove box is opened with
the headlight switch on.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
Keep upper glove box lid closed while
driving to help prevent injury in an accident
or a sudden stop.
SIC2575 SIC2676
Automatic transmission model Manual transmission model
CONSOLE BOX
To open the console boxes, push the
knob q
A and pull up the lid.
To close, push the lid down until latched.
WARNING
The center console box should not be used
while driving so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Coupe (manual transmission
model)
To remove the console lid:
1. Remove the original hinge mask. At-
tach a cloth when using a screwdriver.
2. Loosen 3 screws, and remove the lid.
3. Install the replacement hinge mask
and latch cover equipped with coupe
manual transmission model.
SIC3013
REAR ARMREST POCKET (Sedan)

The pocket can store a first aid kit, etc.
CAUTION
Do not use for heavy articles.
SIC2677
Coupe − Manual transmission model
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SIC2332 SIC2154A SIC2077A
Type A Type B
CARD HOLDER (driver’s side) Type B COAT HOOK (Coupe)
Type A Pull the sun visor down q 1 and slide a To use the coat hook, push the hook q
A
card qA in the card holder. to release it.
Insert a card in the holder.
CAUTION
WARNING
Avoid hanging heavy goods on the hook.
The card holder should not be used while
driving so full attention may be given to ve-
hicle operation.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
O Make sure that all passengers have their
hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is
in motion and before closing the win-
dows. Use the window lock switch to
prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
O Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
SIC2209 tivate switches or controls and become SIC2576
trapped in a window. Unattended chil- Sedan — Main switch
STOWING GOLF BAGS (Coupe) dren could become involved in serious Main power window switch
Normally, two standard golf bags can be accidents. (driver’s side)
stowed in the trunk. Insert the top of the 1. Driver side window
golf bag into left side of the trunk room 2. Front passenger side window
The power windows operate when the ig-
q1 then put the bag forward q 2 . Insert
nition key is in the ON position and for 3. Rear left passenger side window
the top of the 2nd golf bag into right side 4. Rear right passenger side window
about 45 seconds, after the ignition
of the trunk room q 3 and pull it in all the 5. Window lock button
switch is turned to the OFF position. If the
way q 4 .
driver’s door or the front passenger’s To open or close the window, push down
In some cases, you may not be able to door is opened during this period of qA or pull up qB the switch and hold it.
stow two golf bags in your vehicle, de- about 45 seconds, power to the windows The main switch (driver side switches) will
pending on their sizes or types. is canceled. open or close all the windows.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SIC2577 SIC1892E SIC2578
Coupe — Main switch Front passenger side Sedan — Type A
Locking passenger’s windows Passenger side power window Automatic operation (For front
When the lock button q
C is pushed in,
switch door windows or all door
only the driver side window can be The passenger side switch will open or windows, if so equipped)
opened or closed. Push it in again to can- close only the corresponding window. To
cel. To fully open or close the window, com-
open or close the window, hold the switch pletely push down or pull up the switch
down or up.
and release it; it need not be held. The
window will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the window, just push
or lift the switch in the opposite direction.
Auto reverse function (Automatic
operation equipped model)
If the control unit detects something
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
AUTOMATIC ADJUSTING FUNCTION
(Coupe)
CAUTION
When the battery cable is removed from the
battery terminal, do not close either of the
front doors. The automatic window adjusting
function will not work, and the side roof
panel may be damaged.
The power window has an automatic ad-

justing function. When the door is being
SIC2579 SIC1979B
opened, the window is automatically low-
Sedan — Type B Coupe
caught in a window as it moves up, the ered slightly to avoid contact between the
window and the side roof panel. When the
window will be immediately lowered. WARNING door is closed, the window is automati-
The auto reverse function can be acti-
vated when a window is closed by auto- cally raised slightly.
There are some small distances immediately
matic operation when the ignition switch
is in the ON position, or for about 45 sec- before the closed position which cannot be
onds after the ignition switch is turned to detected. Make sure that all passengers
the OFF position. have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-
fore closing the window.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window oc-
curs.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SUNROOF (if so equipped)
side for less than 1 second and release it;

it need not be held. The roof will auto- WARNING
matically open or close all the way. To
stop the roof, push the switch once more There are some small distances immediately
while it is opening or closing. before the closed position which cannot be
To open or close the sunroof and stop on detected. Make sure that all passengers
the way, push the switch to the CLOSE q1 have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-
or OPEN q 2 side for more than 1 second. fore closing the sunroof.
The roof will stop when releasing the
switch.
Tilting the sunroof (Sedan)
Auto reverse function (When
To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then
closing the sunroof) push and hold the UP q 1 side of the
SIC1854B switch. To tilt down the sunroof, push and
If the control unit detects something
caught in the sunroof when it is closing, hold the DOWN q 2 side.
AUTOMATIC SUNROOF
the sunroof will immediately move back- Tilting the sunroof (Coupe)
The sunroof will only operate when the ig- ward.
nition switch is in the ON position. To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then
The auto reverse function can be acti- push the UP q 1 side of the switch and re-
The automatic sunroof is operational for vated when the sunroof is closed by auto- lease it; it need not be held. To tilt down
about 45 seconds, even if the ignition matic operation when the ignition switch the sunroof, push the DOWN q 2 side.
switch is turned to the OFF position. If the is in the ON position or for about 45 sec-
driver’s door or the front passenger’s onds after the ignition switch is turned to Sun shade
door is opened during this period of the OFF position.
about 45 seconds, power to the sunroof is Open or close the sun shade by sliding it
canceled. Depending on the environment or driving backward or forward.
conditions, the auto reverse function may The shade will open automatically when
Sliding the sunroof be activated if an impact or load similar to the sunroof is opened. However, it must
To fully open or close the sunroof, push something being caught in the sunroof oc- be closed manually.
the switch to the CLOSE q 1 or OPEN q 2 curs.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Sedan: 4. Release the switch when the sunroof
WARNING 1. Push the switch to the CLOSE/UP side
stops.
q1 to tilt up the sunroof. Release the 5. Push and hold the switch to the
O In an accident you could be thrown from switch when the sunroof is in the fully CLOSE/UP q 1 side for approximately 4
the vehicle through an open sunroof. Al- tilted up position. seconds until the sunroof moves auto-
ways use seat belts and child restraints. matically.
2. Push and hold the switch to the Continue to push and hold the switch
O Do not allow anyone to stand up or ex- CLOSE/UP q 1 side for approximately while the sunroof operates automati-
tend any portion of their body out of the 10 seconds until the sunroof moves cally. Do not release the switch.
sunroof opening while the vehicle is in automatically.
6. Release the switch when the sunroof
motion or while the sunroof is closing. Continue to push and hold the switch
stops.
while the sunroof operates automati-
cally. Do not release the switch. 7. If the sunroof does not operate prop-
CAUTION 3. Release the switch when the sunroof
erly after step 6, repeat the procedure
starting with step 1.
stops.
O Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand Have an INFINITI dealer check and repair
from the sunroof before opening. 4. If the sunroof does not operate prop- the sunroof.
erly after step 4, repeat the procedure
O Do not place any heavy object on the starting with step 1.
sunroof or surrounding area.
Coupe:
If the sunroof does not close 1. Push the switch to the CLOSE/UP q
1
side to tilt up the sunroof.
If the sunroof does not close or open au-
tomatically, use the following procedure 2. Release the switch when the sunroof
to return sunroof operation to normal. is in the fully tilted up position.
3. Push and hold the switch to the
CLOSE/UP q 1 side for approximately
10 seconds until the sunroof automati-
cally closes.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
INTERIOR LIGHTS
O The driver’s door is opened and then

closed while the key is removed from
the ignition switch or the ignition is
turned to the LOCK position (Intelli-
gent Key system).
O The key is removed from the ignition
switch or the ignition is turned to the
LOCK position (Intelligent Key system)
while all doors are closed.
The light will turn off while the 30 second
timer is activated, when:
O The driver’s door is locked either with
the keyfob, a key or the power door
SIC2580 SIC2581
lock switch.
ROOM LIGHT O The ignition switch is turned to the ON MAP LIGHTS
position.
The room light has a two-position switch. When the switch is pushed in, the light
When the switch is in the OFF position will turn on. When the switch is pushed
When the switch is in the door position q2 , the room light does not illuminate, re-
q1 , the room light will illuminate when a again, the light will turn off.
gardless of any condition.
door is opened. When the map light switch is in the ON po-
The light will stay on for about 30 sec- sition, it will automatically turn off 30 min-
onds when: utes after the ignition switch has been
turned to the OFF position. To turn on the
O The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, light again, turn the ignition switch to the
a key, power door lock switch or using ON position.
the Intelligent Key system while all
doors are closed. The map, personal, and vanity mirror
lights will automatically turn off 30 min-
utes after the latest operation of the fol-
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
lowing with the ignition switch in the ACC When the rear personal light switch is in
or OFF position: the ON position q 1 , the rear personal
lights illuminate, regardless of any condi-
O Opening or closing any door
tion.
O Locking or unlocking with the keyfob,
When the switch is in the OFF q3 position,
a key, the power door lock switch or
the rear personal lights do not illuminate,
the ignition is turned to the LOCK po-
regardless of any condition.
sition (Intelligent Key system)
When the personal light switch is in the
O Inserting or removing a key from the
ON position, it will automatically turn off
ignition switch
30 minutes after the ignition switch has
These lights will turn on again when any been turned to the OFF position. To turn on
of the above operations is performed after the light again, turn the ignition switch to
the lights have turned off automatically. the ON position.
(The lights will turn off 30 minutes after SIC2582
the latest operation of the above as well.)
PERSONAL LIGHTS
CAUTION Rear (Sedan)
O Turn off the map, personal and vanity qA : Left-hand side
mirror lights when you leave the vehicle. qB : Right-hand side
The rear personal light has a three-

O Do not use for extended periods of time
position switch.
with the engine stopped. This could re-
sult in a discharged battery. When the switch is in the door position
q
2 , the light will illuminate when the rear
door is opened.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
VANITY MIRROR LIGHT (if so equipped) TRUNK LIGHT HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if
so equipped)
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is The HomeLink Universal Transceiver pro-
opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the vides a convenient way to consolidate the
light will go off. functions of up to three individual hand-
held transmitters into one built-in device.
When the trunk light stays on, it will auto-
matically turn off 30 minutes after the ig- HomeLink Universal Transceiver:
nition switch has been turned to the OFF
O Will operate most Radio Frequency
position. To turn on the light again, turn
(RF) devices such as garage doors,
the ignition switch to the ON position.
gates, home and office lighting, entry
door locks and security systems.
O Is powered by your vehicle’s battery.
No separate batteries are required. If
the vehicle’s battery is discharged or
is disconnected, HomeLink will retain
SIC1859
all programming.
The light on the vanity mirror will turn on Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver
when the cover on the vanity mirror is is programmed, retain the original trans-
opened. mitter for future programming procedures
When the vanity mirror light stays on, it (i.e., new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of
will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink
the ignition switch has been turned to the Universal Transceiver buttons should be
OFF position. To turn on the light again, erased for security purposes. For addi-
turn the ignition switch to the ON position. tional information, refer to “Programming
HomeLink ” later in this section.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
PROGRAMMING HomeLink
WARNING To program your HomeLink Transceiver
to operate a garage door, gate, or entry
O Do not use the HomeLink Universal door opener, home or office lighting, you
Transceiver with any garage door opener need to be at the same location as the
that lacks safety stop and reverse features device. Note: Garage door openers (manu-
as required by federal safety standards. factured after 1996) have “rolling code
(These standards became effective for protection”. To program a garage door
opener models manufactured after April 1, opener equipped with “rolling code pro-
1982.) A garage door opener which cannot tection”; you will need to use a ladder to
get up to the garage door opener motor to
detect an object in the path of a closing
be able to access the “training” program
garage door and then automatically stop button.
and reverse, does not meet current federal
SIC3012
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases 1. To begin, push and hold the 2 outer
the risk of serious injury or death. HomeLink buttons (to clear the
O During the programming procedure, your memory) until the indicator light q A
garage door or security gate will open or blinks (after 20 seconds). Release both
close (if the transmitter is within range). buttons.
Make sure that people or objects are clear
2. Position the end of the hand-held trans-
of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are
mitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away
programming.
from the HomeLink surface.
O Your vehicle’s engine should be turned
off while programming the HomeLink
Universal Transceiver.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
programmed HomeLink button - re- 7. Quickly within 30 seconds of pushing
leasing when the device begins to ac- and releasing the garage door opener
tivate. program button, firmly push and re-
lease the HomeLink button you’ve
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink
just programmed. Push and release
blinks rapidly for two seconds and then
the HomeLink button up to three
turns solid, HomeLink has picked up a
times to complete the training.
“rolling code” garage door opener sig-
nal. You will need to proceed with the 8. Your HomeLink button should now be
next steps to train the HomeLink to programmed.
complete the programming which may To program the remaining HomeLink
require a ladder and another person for buttons for additional door or gate
convenience. openers, follow steps 2-8 only.
6. Push and release the training button NOTE:
SIC3011 located on the garage door opener’s
motor to activate the “training mode”. Do not repeat step one unless you want to
3. Using both hands, simultaneously This button is usually located near the “clear” all previously programmed
push and hold both the HomeLink antenna wire that hangs down from HomeLink buttons.
button you want to program and the the motor. If the wire originates from
hand-held transmitter button. If you have any questions or are having
under a light lens, you will need to re-
DO NOT release the buttons until step move the lens to access the training difficulty programming your HomeLink
4 has been completed. button. buttons, refer to the HomeLink web site
at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
4. Hold down both buttons until the indi- NOTE: 3515.
cator light on the HomeLink flashes,
changing from a “slow blink” to a Once you have pushed and released the PROGRAMMING HomeLink FOR
“rapid blink”. When the indicator light training button on the garage door open- CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
flashes rapidly, both buttons may be er’s motor and the “training light” is lit,
released. The rapidly flashing light in- you have 30 seconds in which to perform Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required
dicates successful programming. To step 7. Use the help of a second person for hand-held transmitters to stop transmit-
activate the garage door or other pro- convenience to assist when performing ting after 2 seconds. To program your
grammed device, push and hold the this step. hand-held transmitter to HomeLink , con-
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
tinue to push and hold the HomeLink O position the hand-held transmitter REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
button (note steps 2 through 4 under with its battery area facing away from HomeLink BUTTON
“Programming HomeLink ”) while you the HomeLink surface.
push and re-push (“cycle”) your hand- To reprogram a HomeLink Universal
held transmitter every 2 seconds until the O push and hold both the HomeLink Transceiver button, complete the fol-
indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating and hand-held transmitter buttons lowing.
successful programming). without interruption.
1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink
NOTE: O position the hand-held transmitter 2 button. Do not release the button until
If programming a garage door opener, etc., to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from step 4 has been completed.
it is advised to unplug the device during the HomeLink surface. Hold the
2. When the indicator light begins to
the “cycling” process to prevent possible transmitter in that position for up to 15
flash slowly (after 20 seconds), posi-
damage to the garage door opener compo- seconds. If HomeLink is not pro- tion the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5
nents. grammed within that time, try holding inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the
the transmitter in another position - HomeLink surface.
OPERATING THE HomeLink keeping the indicator light in view at
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER all times. 3. Push and hold the hand-held trans-
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver mitter button.
If you continue to have programming diffi-
(once programmed) may now be used to 4. The HomeLink indicator light will
culties, please contact the INFINITI Con-
activate the garage door, etc. To operate, flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
simply push the appropriate programmed sumer Affairs Department. The phone
When the indicator light begins to
HomeLink Universal Transceiver button. numbers are located in the Foreword of
flash rapidly, release both buttons.
The red indicator light will illuminate this Owner’s Manual.
while the signal is being transmitted. The HomeLink Universal Transceiver but-
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED ton has now been reprogrammed. The
PROGRAMMING INFORMATION new device can be activated by pushing
TROUBLE-DIAGNOSIS Individual buttons cannot be cleared,
the HomeLink button that was just pro-
grammed. This procedure will not affect
If the HomeLink does not quickly learn however to clear all programming, push any other programmed HomeLink but-
the hand-held transmitter information: and hold the two outside buttons and re- tons.
O replace the hand-held transmitter bat- lease when the indicator light begins to
teries with new batteries. flash (approximately 20 seconds).
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change
the codes of any non-rolling code device
that has been programmed into HomeLink .
Consult the Owner’s Manual of each device
or call the manufacturer or dealer of those
devices for additional information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink Uni-
versal Transceiver with your new transmit-
ter information.
FCC Notice:
This device complies with FCC rules part
15. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference and (2) This de-
vice must accept any interference that may
be received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
The transmitter has been tested and com-
plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the device.
DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
FCC I.D.: CB2V67690
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys ................................................................. 3-2 Hood .............................................................. 3-24

Infiniti vehicle immobilizer system keys ...... 3-2 Trunk lid ......................................................... 3-25
Doors ............................................................... 3-3 Opener operation ...................................... 3-25
Locking with key ......................................... 3-3 Interior trunk lid release............................ 3-27
Locking with inside lock knob ..................... 3-4 Secondary trunk lid release ....................... 3-27
Locking with power door lock switch........... 3-4 Fuel-filler door ................................................ 3-28
Child safety rear door lock (Sedan) ............. 3-5 Opening the fuel-filler door ....................... 3-28
Remote keyless entry system (models without Fuel-filler cap ............................................ 3-29
Intelligent Key system) ..................................... 3-5 Steering wheel ............................................... 3-30
How to use remote keyless entry system .... 3-6 Manual operation ...................................... 3-30
Intelligent Key system (if so equipped)............. 3-9 Electric operation (if so equipped) ............. 3-31
Door locks/unlocks precaution .................. 3-11 Sun visors ...................................................... 3-32
Intelligent Key operation ............................ 3-11 Mirrors............................................................ 3-32
Opening and closing windows ................... 3-14 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror (if so
Operating the engine ................................. 3-14 equipped).................................................. 3-32
Intelligent Key operating range ................. 3-16 Outside mirrors ......................................... 3-33
Warning signals ......................................... 3-17 Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) .... 3-34
Trouble-shooting guide .............................. 3-19 Automatic drive positioner operation......... 3-34
Operation with intelligent remote keyless Entry/exit function (if so equipped) ........... 3-34
entry system ............................................. 3-20 Memory storage function ........................... 3-35
Operation with the mechanical key and System operation ...................................... 3-36
valet key ................................................... 3-23 Cancel switch (if so equipped)................... 3-37
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
KEYS
*: Refer to “Intelligent Key system” later

in this section.
A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep it
in a safe place (such as your wallet), not
in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, see
an INFINITI dealer for duplicates by using
the key number.
A key number is necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to dupli-
cate from. If you still have a key, an
INFINITI dealer can duplicate it.
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
You can only drive your vehicle using the
master or valet keys which are registered
to the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
components in your vehicle. These keys
have a transponder chip in the key head.
The master key can be used for all the
SPA2105 SPA2179 locks.
Model without Intelligent Key system Model with Intelligent Key system
1. Master key 2 sets (With built-in tran- 1. Intelligent Key 2 sets* The valet key cannot be used for glove
sponder chip), INFINITI MARK: silver 2. Mechanical key (metal key)* 2 sets box lock and the trunk access window lid
2. Valet key (With built-in transponder 3. Valet key (metal key) lock.
chip), INFINITI MARK: Black 4. Wallet key and key case (card type) To protect belongings when you leave a
3. Wallet key and Key case (Card type) (metal key) key with someone, give them the valet
4. Key number plate 5. Key number plate key only.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
DOORS
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys: WARNING
If you still have a key, the key number is
not necessary when you need extra O Always have the doors locked while driv-
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. ing. Along with the use of seat belts, this
An INFINITI dealer can duplicate it. As provides greater safety in the event of an
many as 5 INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer accident by helping to prevent persons
System keys can be used with one ve- from being thrown from the vehicle. This
hicle. You should bring all registered keys also helps keep children and others from
that you have to an INFINITI dealer for reg- unintentionally opening the doors, and
istration. This is because the registration
will help keep out intruders.
process will erase the memory of all key
codes previously registered into the O Before opening any door, always look for
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System. After and avoid oncoming traffic. SPA1884
the registration process, these compo-
nents will only recognize keys coded into O Do not leave children unattended inside
LOCKING WITH KEY
the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
during registration. Any key that is not tivate switches or controls. Unattended Power
given to your dealer at the time of regis- children could become involved in se-
tration will no longer be able to start your The power door lock system allows you to
rious accidents. lock or unlock all doors, trunk lid and the
vehicle.
fuel-filler door.
Do not allow the immobilizer system key,
which contains an electrical transponder, O Turning the door key cylinder to the
to come into contact with salt water. This front of the vehicle q 1 will lock all
could affect system function. doors, trunk lid and fuel-filler door.
O Turning the door key cylinder to the
rear of the vehicle q
2 once will unlock
the driver’s door.
Turning the door key cylinder to the
rear of the vehicle again within 5 sec-
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
onds will unlock all doors, the trunk
lid and the fuel-filler door.
Opening and closing windows
To open the door windows, turn the door
key cylinder to the rear of the vehicle and
hold the key for about 1 second.
To stop opening, return the door key cyl-
inder to the neutral position by turning
the key.
To close the door windows, turn the door
key cylinder to the front of the vehicle
and hold the key for about 1 second.
SPA1814 SPA1505F
To stop closing, return the door key cylin-
der to the neutral position by turning the LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
key.
To individually lock the doors, push the LOCK SWITCH
In the event of an obstruction, such as a inside lock knob down to the LOCK posi-
hand, in the way of door windows, the All doors will be locked when the power
tion q1 , then close the door. door lock switch is pushed to the LOCK
auto reverse function will activate.
When locking the door using inside lock position q1 with the driver’s or front pas-
knob, be sure not to leave the key inside of senger’s door open. Then close the door
the vehicle. and all doors will be locked.
To unlock, pull the inside lock knob up to When locking the door this way, be certain
the UNLOCK position q 2 . not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock, push the power door lock
switch to the UNLOCK position q
2 .
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (models
without Intelligent Key system)
Lockout protection It is possible to lock/unlock all doors,
trunk lid and fuel-filler door and activate
When the power door lock switch (driver the panic alarm by using the keyfob from
or front passenger) is moved to the LOCK outside the vehicle.
position with the key in the ignition and
Before locking the doors, make sure the
any door open, all doors will lock and un-
key is not left in the vehicle.
lock automatically. This helps to prevent
the keys from being accidentally locked The keyfob can operate at a maximum
inside the vehicle. distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m)
away from the vehicle. (The operating dis-
tance depends upon the conditions
around the vehicle.)
As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with
one vehicle. For information about pur-
chase and use of additional keyfobs, con-
SPA0086A
tact an INFINITI dealer.
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK The keyfob will not function when:
(Sedan)
O the battery is completely discharged,
Child safety rear door lock helps prevent
O the distance between the vehicle and
rear doors from being opened acciden-
tally, especially when small children are the keyfob is more than 33 ft (10 m).
in the vehicle. The panic alarm will not activate when the
When the levers are in the LOCK q 1 posi- key is in the ignition switch.
tion, the rear doors can be opened by the
outside door handles only. CAUTION
To disengage, move the levers to the un-
lock position q
2 . The following conditions or occurrences may
damage the keyfob.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
3. Push the LOCK button on the key-
O Do not allow the keyfob to become wet. fob.
O Do not drop the keyfob. 4. All doors, the trunk lid and the fuel-
filler door will lock.
O Do not strike the keyfob sharply against
another object. All doors will lock when the LOCK
button on the keyfob is pushed even
O Do not place the keyfob for an extended though a door remains open and/or the ig-
period in an area where temperatures ex- nition switch is in any position.
ceed 140°F (60°C).
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and
If a keyfob is lost or stolen, INFINITI recom- the horn chirps once.
mends erasing the ID code of that keyfob. O When the LOCK button is pushed
This will prevent the keyfob from unautho- with all doors locked, the hazard indi-
rized use to unlock the vehicle. For informa- SPA1918 cator flashes twice and the horn
tion regarding the erasing procedure, please chirps once as a reminder that the
contact an INFINITI dealer. q1 LOCK button doors are already locked.
q2 UNLOCK button
For information regarding the replacement *1: Doors lock with the keyfob while a
q3 TRUNK button
key is in the ignition switch. However,
of a battery, see “Keyfob battery replace-
ment” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it- q4 PANIC button the panic alarm will not activate when
yourself” section. the key is in the ignition switch.
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS *2: Doors lock with the keyfob while the
ENTRY SYSTEM ignition switch is in the ON position.
However, the switching indicators will
Locking doors and fuel-filler door not function.
*3: Doors lock with the keyfob while any
1. Remove the ignition key.*1,*2
door is open. However, the switching
2. Close all doors.*3 indicators will not function.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Unlocking doors and fuel-filler O opening trunk lid. when the ignition switch is in any po-
door sition except the ON position.
O turning the ignition switch to the ON
position 2. The trunk lid opens.
1. Push the UNLOCK button on the
keyfob once. The interior light can be turned off The trunk lid cannot be opened by operat-
without waiting for 30 seconds by turning ing the keyfob when the ignition switch is
O The driver’s door and fuel-filler door in the ON position.
unlock the ignition switch to the ON position or
by locking the doors with the keyfob. Using the panic alarm
O The hazard indicator flashes once if all
doors are completely closed with the Opening the windows If you are near your vehicle and feel
ignition switch in any position except Push the UNLOCK button on the threatened, you may activate the alarm to
in the ON position. keyfob. call attention as follows:
O The interior light timer activates and The driver’s door and fuel-filler door will 1. Push the PANIC button on the
the interior light comes on for 30 sec- unlock. keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds
onds when the interior light switch is with the key removed from the ignition
at the DOOR position with the ignition Continue to push the UNLOCK button switch.
switch in any position except in the for more than 3 seconds. The door win-
dows will start to lower. 2. The theft warning alarm and head-
ON position.
lights will stay on for 25 seconds.
2. Push the UNLOCK button on the Continue to push the UNLOCK button
until windows are fully open. 3. The panic alarm stops when:
keyfob again within 5 seconds.
To stop the windows lowering operation, O It has run for 25 seconds, or
O All doors and trunk lid unlock
release the UNLOCK button. O The LOCK button or the UNLOCK
O The hazard indicator flashes once if all
To start the windows lowering operation, button on keyfob is pushed, or
doors are completely closed.
push the UNLOCK button again for O The TRUNK button or the PANIC
All doors will be locked automatically un- more than 3 seconds. button on the keyfob is pushed
less one of the following operations is
Releasing the trunk lid for longer than 0.5 second.
performed within 1 minute of pushing the
UNLOCK button.
1. Push the TRUNK button on the
O opening any door. keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
When pushing the buttons to set hazard
indicator only mode, the hazard indicator
flashes 3 times.
indicator and horn mode, the hazard indi-
cator flashes once and the horn chirps
once.
SPA2180
Setting hazard indicator and horn If horn chirps are not necessary, the
mode system can be switched to hazard indica-
tor mode.
The factory setting of the remote keyless
entry system is in hazard indicator and In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK
horn mode. button is pushed, the hazard indica-
tor flashes twice. When the UNLOCK
In hazard indicator and horn mode, when button is pushed, neither the hazard
the LOCK button is pushed, the indicator nor the horn operates.
hazard indicator flashes twice and the
horn chirps once. When the UNLOCK Switching procedure:
button is pushed, the hazard indica-
tor flashes once. Push the LOCK button and UNLOCK
button on the keyfob simultaneously
for more than 2 seconds to switch from
one mode to the other.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key uses coded radio sig- — when there are strong signals the battery could quickly run down. Do
nals to communicate with the vehicle. coming from a television tower, not place the Intelligent Key near an
When the Intelligent Key is near the ve- power station or broadcasting sta- electric appliance such as a television
hicle, such as in your pocket or purse, it tion. set or personal computer.
allows the vehicle to be locked, unlocked, O Because the ignition switch is elec-
— when you have wireless equipment
or started without inserting the ignition tronically controlled, if the battery is
key. It is also possible to use the remote or a cellular phone with you.
completely discharged when the igni-
control entry function. — when the Intelligent Key is in con- tion switch is in the LOCK position, the
tact with or covered by a metallic steering lock cannot be released and
CAUTION material. the ignition switch cannot be turned
— when radio wave-type remote con- (including the mechanical key). Be
O Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with trol entry is used nearby. careful not to completely discharge the
you. battery.
— when the Intelligent Key is placed
near an electric appliance such as a O In case the battery is completely dis-
O Do not leave the vehicle with the Intelli-
personal computer. charged, make sure to recharge the
gent Key inside. battery immediately.
O The Intelligent Key continually con-
sumes battery power as the key re- For information regarding the replacement
O The Intelligent Key may not function of a battery, see “Keyfob battery replace-
ceives a signal to communicate with
correctly depending on the environment” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
the vehicle. Battery life is about 2
ment or operating conditions. It could yourself” section.
years, although it varies depending on
also malfunction if you do not use it
the operating conditions. When the
correctly.
battery of the Intelligent Key is low, the
O The Intelligent Key transmits faint green blinking key warning light goes
radio waves. out about 30 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position. If
In the following situations, the Intelli-
the battery runs down, replace it with a
gent Key and remote control entry func-
new one.
tions may not operate correctly, and
you may have to use the metal key (me- O If the Intelligent Key receives strong
chanical key, valet key or wallet key): signal over an extended period of time,
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
*: Refer to “INFINITI vehicle immobilizer As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used
system keys” earlier in this section. with one vehicle. For information concern-
ing the purchase and use of additional re-
WARNING mote controllers, contact an INFINITI
dealer.
O The Intelligent Key transmits radio It is possible that the Intelligent Key func-
waves that can adversely affect medical tions can become cancelled. Please con-
electric equipment. tact an INFINITI dealer.
O If you have a pacemaker, you should
contact the medical equipment manufac- CAUTION
turer to ask if it will be affected by the In-
telligent Key signal. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you
when driving. The Intelligent Key is a preci-
sion device with a built-in transmitter. To
The valet key cannot be used for the glove avoid damaging it, please note the fol-
box lock and the trunk access window lid lowing.
lock.
O The Intelligent Key is water resistant,
To protect belongings when you leave a wetting may damage the Intelligent Key.
key with someone, give them the valet If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immedi-
key only. ately wipe until it is completely dry.
SPA2179 Record the key number on the key O Do not bend, drop or strike it against an-
number plate/metal tag and keep it in a other object.
1. Intelligent Key 2 sets safe place (such as your wallet), NOT IN
2. Mechanical key (metal key)* 2 sets THE VEHICLE. A key number plate is sup- O Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
3. Valet key (metal key)* plied with your key. Keep the plate in a extended period in a place where tem-
4. Wallet key and key case (card type) safe place. INFINITI does not record key peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
(metal key) numbers so it is very important to keep
5. Key number plate track of your key number plate.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
O Do not change or modify the Intelligent PRECAUTION
Key.
O After locking with the door handle re-
O Do not use a magnet key holder.
quest switch, make sure the doors are
O Do not place the Intelligent Key near an securely locked.
electric appliance such as a television O To prevent the Intelligent Key from be-
set or personal computer. ing left inside the vehicle, make sure
you carry the key with you and then
O Do not place the Intelligent Key in a stor-
lock the doors.
age area (for example, a door pocket or
glove box). It could be damaged or acti- O To prevent the Intelligent Key from be-
vated unexpectedly. ing left inside the trunk, make sure
you carry the key with you and then
O Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come close the trunk. SPA1887
into contact with water or salt water, and
O You can lock or unlock the doors using
do not wash it in a washing machine. only the door handle, which detects INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION
This could affect the system function. the Intelligent Key. You can lock or unlock the doors without
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI O When you try to unlock the door while taking the key out from your pocket or
recommends erasing the ID code of that In- pulling the door handle, the door may purse.
telligent Key. This will prevent the Intelli- not unlock. In this case, release the
gent Key from unauthorized use to unlock door handle and the door will unlock.
the vehicle. For information regarding the Pull the door handle again and the
erasing procedure, please contact an door will open.
INFINITI dealer.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
When you carry the Intelligent Key with buzzer sounds to warn you. However,
you, you can lock or unlock all doors by doors lock with the metal key even if
pushing the door handle request switch any door is open.
qA within the range of operation. *4: Doors do not lock with door handle
request switch with the Intelligent
Locking doors and fuel-filler door Key inside the vehicle and outside
buzzer sounds to warn you.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
However, when an Intelligent Key is
position and remove the ignition key if inside the vehicle, doors can be
any metal key is in the ignition locked with another Intelligent Key.
switch.*1, *2
Unlocking doors and fuel-filler
2. Close all the doors.*3
door
3. Push any door handle request switch
while carrying the Intelligent Key with 1. Push the door handle request switch
SPA1888 once.
Sedan you.*4
4. All the doors and fuel-filler door will Driver’s side:
lock. O The driver door and fuel-filler door
unlock.
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and
outside buzzer sounds twice. Front passenger side:
*1: Doors lock with the Intelligent Key O Only corresponding door unlocks.
while a mechanical key or valet key is 2. The hazard indicator flashes once and
in the ignition switch. outside buzzer sounds once if all
*2: Doors lock with the Intelligent Key doors are completely closed with the
while the ignition switch is not in the ignition switch in any position except
LOCK position. the ON position.
*3: Doors do not lock by pushing the
door handle request switch or the 3. Push the door handle request switch
LOCK button on the Intelligent again within 5 seconds.
SPA2181 Key while any door is open. Outside
Coupe
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O All doors and the fuel-filler door un-
lock.
O The hazard indicator flashes once and
outside buzzer sounds once if all
doors are completely closed.
All doors will be locked automatically
after pushing the door handle request
switch unless one of the following opera-
tions is performed within 1 minute.
O any door is opened
O the ignition switch is pushed
O the mechanical key or the valet key is
SPA1889 SPA2182
inserted into the ignition switch
Coupe
The interior light, ceiling light (if so Opening trunk lid
equipped) and step light can be turned off
without waiting for 30 seconds by turning 1. Push the trunk open request switch
the ignition switch to the ON position or qA .
by locking the doors. 2. The trunk will be unlatched and buzzer

sounds four times.
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.
Lockout protection:
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout
protection is equipped with the Intelligent
Key system.
SPA1890
Sedan
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
When the trunk lid is closed with the In- ACC (Accessories) q
D :
telligent Key inside the trunk, the outside
This position activates electrical accesso-
buzzer will sound and the trunk will open.
ries such as the radio, when the engine is
OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS not running.
O To open the windows, push the UN- ON (Normal operating position) q
E :
LOCK button on the Intelligent This position turns on the ignition system
Key for about 3 seconds or turn the and electrical accessories.
door key cylinder with the metal key
to the rear of the vehicle for about 2 START q
F :
seconds after the door is unlocked. This position starts the engine. As soon
To stop opening, release the UNLOCK as the engine has started, release the
button or turn the key to the neu- switch immediately. It will automatically
tral position. return to the ON position.
SPA1628
O To close the windows, turn the door For important safety information, see “Ig-
key cylinder to the front of the vehicle OPERATING THE ENGINE nition switch” in the “5. Starting and driv-
for about 2 seconds after the door is ing” section.
locked.
Ignition switch positions
The ignition switch cannot be turned back
To stop closing, turn the key to the Push in the ignition switch in the q
B to the LOCK position unless the shift lever
neutral position. range when you turn it. is in P position. (It can be turned to only
LOCK (Normal parking position) q
A : qC .)
The door windows will open or close
while turning the metal key. See “Doors” The ignition switch can only be locked in
earlier in this section. the qA position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when

it is pushed in, and turned to the ACC po-
sition q D while carrying the Intelligent
Key.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
4. When the engine starts, release the ig-
CAUTION nition switch.
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition WARNING

switch in ACC or ON position when the en-
gine is not running for an extended period. Do not start the engine from outside the ve-
This can discharge the battery. hicle through the window. Doing so could
lead to an accident and injury. Be sure to sit
in the driver’s seat to use the key.
For important safety information, see

“Starting the engine” in the “5. Starting
SPA1891
and driving” section.
O When the ignition switch is pushed
Starting the engine under the following conditions, the In-
telligent Key warning light in the in-
When driving the vehicle, be sure to carry strument panel comes on in red. It is
the Intelligent Key with you. not possible to turn the ignition switch
1. Securely depress the brake pedal. when:
2. Slowly push the ignition switch in. — you do not have the Intelligent Key
When the Intelligent Key warning light with you
qA in the instrument panel comes on — the Intelligent Key battery has run
in green, the ignition switch can be down
turned.
— you have a Intelligent Key for an-
3. Turn the ignition switch to the START other vehicle with you
position and the engine will be
started.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O Slowly turn the ignition switch after
the Intelligent Key warning light WARNING
comes on in green. If it is turned
quickly, it may stick and be difficult to
When you leave the vehicle, be sure to ob-
turn.
serve the following:
O The engine may not start if the Intelli-
gent Key is placed: O Shift the selector lever to P. (In other po-
sitions, the ignition switch will not re-
— inside the glove box or the door turn to LOCK.)
pocket
O Securely return the ignition switch to
— on the instrument panel
LOCK.
— in the corner of interior compart-
ment. O Set the parking brake. Failure to do so
could result in unexpected vehicle move-
O If it is difficult to turn the ignition ment and could lead to severe injury.
switch, perform the following:
— Push the ignition switch and turn it
to the left and then to the right. INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING
RANGE
— Turn the ignition switch while
gently turning the steering wheel to The Intelligent Key functions can be used
the left or right. only when you carry the key with you and
operate as specified in the operating
Stopping the engine range inside or outside the vehicle.
SPA1900
1. Shift the selector lever to the P posi- When the Intelligent Key battery runs Operating range of the door or
tion. down or where there are strong radio trunk lock/unlock function
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC po- waves or noise, the operating range may
be narrower or the key may be inopera- The outside sensors are in the front out-
sition. side door handles and the trunk.
tive.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
The operating range of the door or trunk WARNING SIGNALS
lock/unlock function by pushing the door
handle request switch or trunk open re- To help prevent the vehicle from moving
quest switch is shown in the illustration. unexpectedly by erroneous operation of
the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the
q
1 31.5 in (80 cm) from the door handle vehicle from being stolen, chime or beep
request switch sounds inside and outside the vehicle
q
2 31.5 in (80 cm) from the trunk open re- and a warning light comes on in the in-
quest switch strument panel.
O If you are too close to the outside When a chime or beep sounds or the
door handles or rear bumper, the In- warning light comes on, be sure to check
telligent Key may not operate. the vehicle and Intelligent Key.
O If the Intelligent Key is in the oper- Alarm and warning when locking
ating range, it is possible for anyone SPA1901 the doors
who does not carry the Intelligent Key
to lock/unlock the doors by pushing Operating range for engine start When the front door warning chime or
the door handle request switch. outside buzzer sounds, check for the fol-
function lowing:
The operating range for starting the en- O The ignition switch is turned to the
gine is inside the vehicle. LOCK position.
O If the Intelligent Key is on the instru- O The Intelligent Key is not left inside
ment panel, rear parcel shelf, inside the vehicle.
the glove box or door pocket, or the
corner of interior compartment, it may O Doors are closed securely.
not be possible to start the engine. O The selector lever is in the P position.
O If the Intelligent Key is near the door
or door glass outside the vehicle, it
may be possible to start the engine.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
If the chime sounds continuously when Warning for low battery power
the driver’s door is opened, check the fol-
lowing: O This warning is to let you know that
the battery of the Intelligent Key will
O The selector lever is in the P position run down soon. Replace it with a new
and the ignition switch is turned to one.
the LOCK position.
— The green blinking Intelligent Key
O The mechanical key or the valet key is warning light qA goes out about 30
not inserted into the ignition switch. seconds after the ignition switch is
O The inside warning chime may stop turned to ON.
when one of the following is per- O We recommend replacing the battery
formed. at an INFINITI dealer.
— Returning the ignition switch to the Preventing the Intelligent Key
SPA1892 LOCK position.
from being left in the vehicle
— Removing the mechanical key or
Alarm and warning when the the valet key. If you lock all doors using the power door
engine stops lock switch with the Intelligent Key in the
— Closing the doors. vehicle, all of the doors unlock immedi-
When the P position selecting warning ately and the beep sounds to warn you
light q
B in the instrument panel blinks in Alarm and warning when the when the door is closed.
red: engine starts
O Make sure the selector lever is in the When the Intelligent Key warning light q
A
P position. is blinking in red and the outside buzzer
When the chime sounds intermittently: sounds, make sure the Intelligent Key is
inside the vehicle.
O Make sure the selector lever is in the
P position and the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
TROUBLE-SHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
Take out the Intelligent Key from the ve-
hicle and push the door handle request
switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
When pushing the door handle The outside buzzer sounds for approxi- The doors cannot be locked. tion and push the door handle request
request switch mately 2 seconds. switch while carrying the Intelligent Key
with you.
Close all the doors securely and push the
door handle request switch while carrying
the Intelligent Key with you.
The outside buzzer sounds for approxi- The ignition switch is not turned to the Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
mately 10 seconds. LOCK position. tion.
The Intelligent Key warning light in the
When closing the doors instrument panel blinks in red and the The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you.
outside buzzer sounds 3 times.
The outside buzzer sounds for approxi- The Intelligent Key has been left in the Take out the Intelligent Key from the ve-
mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock. vehicle. hicle and close the door.
When closing the trunk The outside buzzer sounds and the The Intelligent Key has been left in the Take out the Intelligent Key from the trunk
trunk opens. trunk room. room and close the trunk.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
An inside warning chime sounds con- The ignition switch is not in the LOCK tion.
When opening the driver’s door tinuously. position, or the mechanical key or valet
key is inserted into the ignition switch. Remove the mechanical key or valet key
from the ignition switch.
When stopping the engine The P position selecting warning light The selector lever is not in the P posi- Make sure that the selector lever is in the P
in the instrument panel blinks in red. tion. position.
When turning the ignition switch An inside warning chime sounds con- The ignition switch is not turned to the Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tinuously. LOCK position. tion.
The Intelligent Key warning light in the Replace the battery with a new one. See
When starting the engine instrument panel blinks in green. The battery charge is low. “KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
If the Intelligent Key warning light comes
on in red even while you are carrying the
The Intelligent Key warning light in the Intelligent Key, the battery is completely
When pushing the ignition switch instrument panel comes on in red. The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. discharged. Replace the battery with a new
one. See “KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT”
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Troubleshooting examples The lock and unlock buttons on the Intel-
ligent Key will not operate when:
When it is difficult to turn the ignition
switch O the Intelligent Key is too far away from
the vehicle
O Push the ignition switch and turn it to
the left and then to the right. O the Intelligent Key battery runs down
O While gently turning the steering After locking with the Intelligent remote
wheel to the left or right, turn the igni- keyless entry function, pull the door
tion switch. handle to make sure the doors are se-
curely locked.
OPERATION WITH INTELLIGENT The operating range varies depending on
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM the environment. To securely operate the
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, lock and unlock buttons, approach the ve-
fuel-filler door, activate the panic alarm hicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door. SPA1895
and open the windows by pushing the The panic alarm will not activate when the
buttons on the Intelligent Key from out- q1 LOCK button
mechanical key or the valet key is in the ig-
side the vehicle. nition switch. q2 UNLOCK button
Before locking the doors, make sure the q3 TRUNK button
key is not left in the vehicle.
q4 PANIC button
The LOCK /UNLOCK button on
the Intelligent Key can operate at a dis- How to use remote keyless entry
tance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from system
the vehicle. (The effective distance de-
pends upon the conditions around the ve- Locking doors and fuel-filler door:
hicle.)
1. Remove the mechanical key or the va-
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used
let key if any key is in the ignition
with one vehicle. For information concern-
switch.*1
ing the purchase and use of additional In-
telligent Key, contact an INFINITI dealer. 2. Close all the doors.*2
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
3. Push the LOCK button on the In- O The hazard indicator flashes once if all Opening the windows:
telligent Key. doors are completely closed with the
See “Opening and closing windows” on
ignition switch in any position except
4. All doors and fuel-filler door will lock. the previous page.
the ON position.
All of the doors will lock when the LOCK Releasing the trunk lid:
O The interior light turns on and the
button on the Intelligent Key is
light timer activates for 30 seconds 1. Push and hold the TRUNK button
pushed even though the ignition switch is
when the switch is in the DOOR posi- on the Intelligent Key for longer than
in the ON position.
tion with the ignition switch in any po- 0.5 second when the ignition switch is
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and sition except the ON position. in any position except the ON posi-
the horn chirps once. tion.
O When the LOCK button is pushed Intelligent Key again within 5 seconds. 2. The trunk lid opens.
with all doors locked, the hazard indi-
O All doors unlock. The trunk lid cannot be opened by operat-
cator flashes twice and the horn
ing the Intelligent Key when the ignition
chirps once as a reminder that the O The hazard indicator flashes once if all
switch is in the ON position.
doors are already locked. doors are completely closed.
Using the panic alarm:
*1: Doors lock with the Intelligent Key All doors will be locked automatically un-
while the mechanical key or the valet less one of the following operations is If you are near your vehicle and feel
key is in the ignition switch or the ig- performed within 1 minute of pushing the threatened, you may activate the alarm to
nition switch is pushed in. UNLOCK button. call attention as follows:
*2: Doors do not lock with the Intelligent
O opening any door 1. Push the PANIC button on the In-
Key while any door is open.
telligent Key for longer than 0.5 second
O the ignition switch is pushed
Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door: with the metal key removed from the
O the mechanical key or the valet key is ignition switch or the ignition switch
inserted into the ignition switch not pushed in.
Intelligent Key once.
The interior light can be turned off without 2. The theft warning alarm and head-
O The driver’s door and fuel-filler door
waiting for 30 seconds by turning the igni- lights will stay on for 25 seconds.
unlock
tion switch to the ON position or by locking
the doors with the Intelligent Key.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
3. The panic alarm stops when: Hazard indicator and horn mode
O It has run for 25 seconds, or DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK
O The LOCK , UNLOCK , Keyfob or Intelligent Key
TRUNK or PANIC button HAZARD - twice No operation
on the Intelligent Key is pushed for Door handle request switch
longer than 0.5 second.
Hazard indicator mode
DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK
HAZARD - twice
Keyfob or Intelligent Key HORN - once
HORN-once
HAZARD - twice HORN - once

Door handle request switch
OUTSIDE BUZZER - twice OUTSIDE BUZZER - once
Setting hazard indicator and horn mode: In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK
button is pushed, the hazard indica-
This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and tor flashes twice. When the UNLOCK
horn mode when you first receive the ve- button is pushed, neither the hazard
hicle. indicator nor the horn operates.
In hazard indicator and horn mode, when Switching procedure:
the LOCK button is pushed, the haz-
ard indicator flashes twice and the horn Push the LOCK button and UNLOCK
chirps once. When the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key simul-
button is pushed, the hazard indica- taneously for more than 2 seconds to
tor flashes once. switch from one mode to the other.
If horn are not necessary, the system can be

switched to the hazard indicator mode.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
When pushing the buttons to set hazard O To install the mechanical key to the In-
indicator only mode, the hazard indicator telligent Key, securely lock the lock
flashes 3 times. knob and then check that the me-
chanical key will not move.
indicator and horn mode, the hazard indi-
cator flashes once and the horn chirps CAUTION
once.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with the
mechanical key installed in it.
Locking/unlocking the doors with

the metal key (mechanical key,
SPA1878 valet key and wallet key)
The doors can be locked/unlocked by in-
OPERATION WITH THE serting the metal key into the key cylinder
MECHANICAL KEY AND VALET KEY in the driver’s door in the same way as
If the Intelligent Key cannot be used be- the ordinary key.
cause its battery is discharged, use the Starting the engine with the
metal key to lock or unlock the doors and mechanical key
use the mechanical key or the valet key,
which is registered to the INFINITI Vehicle 1. Securely depress the brake pedal.
Immobilizer System components, to start 2. Insert the mechanical key or the valet
the engine. key into the ignition switch.
Removing the mechanical key
O Release the lock knob at the back of
the Intelligent Key and remove the me-
chanical key.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
HOOD
SPA1632 SPA2158
3. Turn the ignition switch to the START 1. Pull the hood lock release handle q 1
position and start the engine. located below the instrument panel; WARNING
the hood will then spring up slightly.
4. After starting the engine, release the
switch. 2. Raise the lever q
2 at the front of the O Make sure the hood is completely closed
hood with your fingertips and raise and latched before driving. Failure to do
When the engine is off, the steering wheel the hood. so could cause the hood to fly open and
lock cannot be unlocked.
3. Insert the assist bar into the slot q
3 in result in an accident.
For important safety information, see the the front edge of the hood. O If you see steam or smoke coming from
“5. Starting and driving” section.
4. When closing the hood, reset the as- the engine compartment, to avoid injury
Windows open/close with the sist bar to its original position, then do not open the hood.
mechanical key slowly close the hood and make sure
it locks into place.
See “Opening and closing windows” on
the previous page.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
TRUNK LID
WARNING
O Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases to
be drawn into the vehicle. See “Precau-
tions when starting and driving” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section for ex-
haust gas.
O Closely supervise children when they are
around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in- SPA2108 SPA1890
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear Sedan
seatback and trunk lid securely latched OPENER OPERATION Trunk open request switch
when not in use, and prevent children’s The trunk lid release switch q
A is located Models without Intelligent Key system:
access to car keys. at the bottom of the instrument panel.
The trunk lid can be opened by pushing
To open the trunk lid, slide the trunk lid the trunk open request switch q A when
release switch qA or push the TRUNK but- the front passenger inside lock knob is in
ton of the keyfob. the unlock position.
To close, push the trunk lid down se- Models with Intelligent Key system:
curely.
The trunk lid can be opened by pushing
the trunk open request switch when the
Intelligent Key is within the operating
range of the trunk lock/unlock function
regardless of the inside lock knob posi-
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
trunk lid can be opened with the TRUNK
button of the keyfob or Intelligent
Key.
SPA2182 SPA1897
Coupe
tion. See “Intelligent Key system” earlier Cancel switch
in this section.
When the cancel switch located inside the
glove box is pushed to the OFF side,
O the trunk lid cannot be opened with
the trunk lid release switch.
O the trunk lid cannot be opened by
pushing the trunk open request
switch.
O for models equipped with the Intelli-
gent Key system, the trunk lockout
protection function is not activated.
When the cancel switch located inside the
glove box is pushed to the OFF side, the
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SPA1591B SPA1561A SPA1590A
Sedan Coupe Sedan
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE
The interior trunk lid release mechanism The secondary trunk lid release mecha-
provides a means of escape in the event nism allows opening of the trunk lid in
of becoming locked inside the trunk. the event of the loss of electrical power
such as a discharged battery.
The handle q 1 is located on the back side
of the trunk lid inside the trunk compart- The handle q 1 is located on the back side
ment. of the trunk lid inside the trunk compart-
ment.
To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull
the release handle towards you until the Sedan
lock releases and push up on the trunk lid.
The release lever is made of a material that Access the handle through the interior
glows in the dark after a brief exposure to trunk access hole (rear seat armrest).
ambient light.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
To open the trunk lid from the rear seat,

pull the release handle towards front of ve-
hicle until the lock releases.
Return the handle to the original position
by securing the latch. Otherwise, it may
cause water to leak into the trunk.
SPA2122 SPA1427C
Coupe Sedan
Coupe OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR
Access the handle from the rear seat. To open the fuel-filler door, unlock the
Pull the strap q 1 , located at center
fuel-filler door lock by using one of the
bottom of the seatback sideways, and following operations, then push the right-
then fold down the seatback q2 . hand side of the lid (Sedan), the left-hand
side of the lid (Coupe).
To open the trunk lid from the rear seat,
pull the release handle towards front of ve- O Push the UNLOCK button on the
hicle until the lock releases. keyfob or Intelligent Key once.
O Insert the key into the door lock cylin-
der and turn the door key cylinder to
the rear of the vehicle.
O Push the power door lock switch to
the UNLOCK position.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SPA1562A SPA1428B SPA1563A
Coupe Sedan Coupe
To lock, close the fuel-filler door and lock FUEL-FILLER CAP
the doors. injured if it is misused or mishandled. Al-
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. ways stop the engine and do not smoke
Tighten the cap clockwise until ratcheting or allow open flames or sparks near the
clicks are heard. vehicle when refueling.
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder O Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap
qA while refueling. a third of a turn, and wait for any
“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuel
WARNING from spraying out and possibly causing
personal injury.
O Gasoline is extremely flammable and O Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank af-
highly explosive under certain condi- ter the fuel pump nozzle shuts off auto-
tions. You could be burned or seriously matically. Continued refueling may
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
STEERING WHEEL
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel-

spray and possibly a fire.
CAUTION
O Use only an original equipment type O If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a flush it away with water to avoid paint
built-in safety valve needed for proper damage.
operation of the fuel system and emis-
sion control system. An incorrect cap can O Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.
result in a serious malfunction and pos- Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap prop-
sible injury. An incorrect cap could also erly may cause the malfunction in-
cause the malfunction indicator dicator lamp (MIL) to illuminate. If the
lamp to illuminate. lamp illuminates because the fuel-
O Do not fill a portable fuel container in the filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or
vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can install the cap and continue to drive the SPA1946
cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vehicle. The lamp should turn off
vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To after a few driving trips. If the lamp MANUAL OPERATION
reduce the risk of serious injury or death does not turn off after a few driving trips,
when filling portable fuel containers:
— Always place the container on the
have the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI WARNING
dealer.
ground when filling. Do not adjust the steering wheel while
— Do not use electronic devices when O For additional information, see the “Mal-
driving. You could lose control of your ve-
filling. function indicator lamp (MIL)” in the “2.
hicle and cause an accident.
— Keep the pump nozzle in contact with Instruments and controls” section.
the container while you are filling it.
— Use only approved portable fuel con- Tilt operation
tainers for flammable liquid.
O Never pour fuel into the throttle body to Pull the lock lever q
1 down and adjust the
attempt to start your vehicle. steering wheel up or down q 2 to the de-
sired position.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Push the lock lever up securely to lock Entry/Exit function operation (if so
the steering wheel in place. equipped):
Telescopic operation The automatic drive positioner system will
make the steering wheel move up
Pull the lock lever q
3 down and adjust automatically when the key is removed
the steering wheel forward or backward from the ignition switch. This lets the
q
4 to the desired position. driver get into and out of the seat more
Push the lock lever up securely to lock easily. The steering wheel moves back
the steering wheel in place. into position when the key is inserted into
the ignition switch. For more information,
see “Automatic drive positioner” later in
this section.
SPA1898
ELECTRIC OPERATION (if so

equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your ve-
hicle and cause an accident.
Tilt or telescopic operation

Move the lever to adjust the steering
wheel up or down, forward or rearward to
the desired position.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SUN VISORS MIRRORS
CAUTION
O Do not store the main sun visor before
storing the extension sun visor.
O Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-
edly downward.
1. To block out glare from the front,

swing down the main sun visor q
1 .
2. To block glare from the side, remove

the main sun visor from the center
SPA2157
mount and swing it to the side q2 .
3. Draw out the extension sun visor q 3 AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDE

from the main sun visor to block from MIRROR (if so equipped)
further glare.
The inside mirror is designed so that it
automatically changes reflection ac-
cording to the intensity of the headlight
of the following vehicle.
When the inside mirror is in the “I”
(AUTO) position q 1 , excessive glare from
the headlights of the vehicle behind you
will be reduced. The AUTO indicator light
qA (green) will be on. When the switch of
the inside mirror is in the “q” (OFF) posi-
tion q2 , the inside mirror will operate nor-
SPA2176 mally.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
For HomeLink Universal Transceiver, see The outside mirror adjustment will op-
the description in the “2. Instruments and erate only when the ignition switch is in
controls” section. the ACC or ON position.
Turn the control knob right or left to se-
lect the right or left outside mirror, then
adjust by tilting the control knob.
SPA1390
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the
passenger side are closer than they appear.
Be careful when moving to the right. Using
only this mirror could cause an accident. Use
the inside mirror or glance over your
shoulder to properly judge distances to
other objects.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so
equipped)
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER door, or when the driver’s door is
OPERATION closed after inserting the key into the
ignition switch.
The automatic drive positioner system
O When the ignition switch is pushed
has two features: with the driver’s door closed.
O Entry/exit function (only available on O When the key or ignition switch is
models equipped with automatic turned to the ON position.
transmission)
Initializing entry/exit function
O Memory storage function
The entry/exit function can be activated
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION (if so or cancelled by pushing and holding the
equipped) SET switch for more than 10 seconds
while the ignition switch is in the LOCK
SPA1829 This system is designed so that the driv- position. The indicator light will blink
er’s seat and steering column will auto- once when the function is cancelled, and
Foldable outside mirrors matically move when the automatic trans- the indicator light will blink twice when
mission selector lever is in the P (Park) the function is activated. If the battery
Fold the outside mirror by pushing it to- position. This allows the driver to get into
ward the rear of the vehicle. cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
and out of the driver’s seat more easily. opens, the entry/exit function will be can-
(This feature is not available on models celled. In such a case, after connecting
equipped with manual transmission.) the battery or replacing with a new fuse,
The driver’s seat will slide backward and open and close the driver’s door more
the steering wheel will move up when the than two times with the ignition switch or
driver’s door is opened with the key or ig- ignition switch in the LOCK position. The
nition switch in the LOCK position. entry/exit function will be activated.
The driver’s seat and steering wheel will
return to the previous positions:
O When the key is inserted into the igni-
tion switch after closing the driver’s
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
tomatic drive positioner memory. Follow are stored in the selected memory (1
these procedures to use the memory sys- or 2).
tem. If a new memory is stored in the same
1. For vehicles equipped with automatic memory switch, the previous memory
transmission, move the selector lever will be deleted.
to the P (Park) position. Linking a keyfob or Intelligent Key
For vehicles equipped with manual to a stored memory position
transmission, move the shift lever to
A keyfob or Intelligent Key can be linked
the N (Neutral) position and apply the
to a stored memory position with the fol-
parking brake.
lowing procedure.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat and steering 1. Follow the steps for storing a memory
column to the desired positions by position.
manually operating each adjusting
switch. For additional information, see 2. While the indicator light for the
“Seats” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat memory switch being set is illumi-
belts and supplemental restraint nated for 5 seconds, push the
system” section and “Steering wheel” button on the keyfob or Intelli-
earlier in this section. gent Key. The indicator light will blink.
After the indicator light goes off, the
3. Turn the ignition ON. keyfob or Intelligent Key is linked to
that memory setting.
SPA2159
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-
onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2) With the key removed from the ignition
fully for at least 1 second. switch, push the button on the
q
1 Coupe
keyfob or Intelligent Key. The driver’s seat
q
2 Sedan The indicator light for the pushed and steering wheel will move to the
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION memory switch will come on and stay memorized position.
on for approximately 5 seconds after
Two positions for the driver’s seat and pushing the switch. After the indicator
steering column can be stored in the au- light goes off, the selected positions
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Confirming memory storage switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 the previous positions (entry/exit
second. function).)
O Turn the ignition ON and push the SET
switch. If the main memory has not O Within 45 seconds of opening the O when the memory switch 1 or 2 is not
been stored, the indicator light will driver’s door, push the memory pushed and held for at least 1 second.
come on for approximately 0.5 sec- switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 O when the seat has already been
onds. When the memory has stored in second. moved to the memorized position.
position, the indicator light will stay The driver’s seat and steering column O when no seat position is stored in the
on for approximately 5 seconds. will move to the memorized position memory switch.
O If the battery cable is disconnected, or with the indicator light flashing, and
then the light will stay on for approxi- O when the parking brake is not applied.
if the fuse opens, the memory will be — MT models
canceled. mately 5 seconds.
O when the speed is above 4 MPH (7
Reset the desired position using the SYSTEM OPERATION km/h) while the parking brake is ap-
previous procedure. plied. — MT models
The automatic drive positioner system will
To restart the drive positioner system,
Selecting the memorized position not work or will stop operating under the
move the parking brake to off and on.
following conditions:
1. For vehicles equipped with automatic O when the front seat is folded for oper-
transmission, move the selector lever O when the vehicle speed is above 4
ating the walk-in mechanism (if so
to the P (Park) position. MPH (7 km/h).
equipped).
For vehicles equipped with manual O when the adjusting switch for the driv- O when the engine is started while the
transmission, move the shift lever in er’s seat and steering column is automatic drive positioner is operating.
the N (Neutral) position and apply the turned on while the automatic drive
parking brake. positioner is operating. O when the AT selector lever is moved
from the P position to any other posi-
2. Use one of the following methods to O when the cancel switch (if so tion. (However, it will not be cancelled
move the driver’s seat and the equipped) is pushed to the CANCEL if the switch is pushed while the seat
steering wheel. side. (However, it will not be cancelled and steering column are returning to
O Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” if the switch is pushed while the seat the previous positions (entry/exit
position and push the memory and steering column are returning to function).)
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O when the driver’s door remains open
for more than 45 seconds and the igni-
tion switch is not in the ON position.
CANCEL SWITCH (if so equipped)
When the CANCEL side of the switch is
pushed, the automatic drive positioner
system will not function.
When the AUTO side of the switch is
pushed, the system will function.
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
MEMO
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and
audio systems
Safety note....................................................... 4-2 Audio system .................................................. 4-14

Control panel buttons — with navigation FM radio reception ..................................... 4-15
system ............................................................. 4-2 AM radio reception .................................... 4-15
Names of the components .......................... 4-2 Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) ... 4-15
How to use joystick and “ENTER” button..... 4-3 Audio operation precautions ...................... 4-16
How to use “BACK” button.......................... 4-3 FM-AM-satellite radio with compact disc
Setting up the start-up screen..................... 4-3 (CD) changer ............................................. 4-22
How to use “INFO” button........................... 4-3 CD care and cleaning ................................ 4-27
How to use “SETTING” button ..................... 4-7 Steering wheel switch for audio control .... 4-28
How to use the button ........................ 4-9 Antenna .................................................... 4-29
Ventilators........................................................ 4-9 Car phone or CB radio ................................... 4-29
Heater and air conditioner (Automatic)............ 4-10 Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with
Automatic operation ................................... 4-11 INFINITI Voice Recognition .............................. 4-30
Manual operation....................................... 4-12 Using the system ...................................... 4-32
Dual button (if so equipped) ...................... 4-12 Control buttons ......................................... 4-34
Ambient temperature ................................. 4-13 Getting started .......................................... 4-34
Operating tips............................................ 4-13 List of voice commands............................. 4-36
In-cabin microfilter..................................... 4-13 Speaker adaptation (SA) mode .................. 4-42
Servicing air conditioner ................................. 4-14 Troubleshooting guide .............................. 4-44
w 06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X
SAFETY NOTE CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
WARNING
O Positioning of the heating or air condi-
tioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving, in
order that full attention may be given to
driving operation.
O Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in acci-
dents, fire, or electric shock.
O Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or SAA1301
lack of sound. Continued use of the When you use this system, make sure the NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS
system may result in accident, fire or engine is running.
electric shock. 1., 2., 5., 6., 9., 10. and 11.
If you use the system with the engine not
O In case you notice any foreign object in running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long For Navigation control buttons: refer to
the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or time, it will use up all the battery power, the separate Navigation Owner’s Manual.
notice smoke or smell coming from it, and the engine will not start. 3. “SETTING” button (P. 4-7)
stop using the system immediately and
Reference symbols: 4. “INFO” button (P. 4-3)
contact an INFINITI dealer. Ignoring such
conditions may lead to accidents, fire, or “ENTER” button — This is a button on the 7. Joystick and “ENTER” button (P. 4-3)
electric shock. control panel.
8. brightness control button
“Display” key — This is a select key on (P. 4-9)
the screen. By selecting this key you can
proceed to the next function. 12. “BACK” button (P. 4-3)
4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND If you do not push the “ENTER” button,
“ENTER” BUTTON the Navigation system will not proceed to
the next step display.
Choose an item on the display using the
joystick and push the “ENTER” button for To proceed to the next step, refer to the
operation. separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
HOW TO USE “BACK” BUTTON
This button has two functions.
O Go back to the previous display.
When this button is pushed during setup,
setup will be canceled, and the screen
will return to the previous screen.
SAA1304
O Finish setup.
When this button is pushed after setup is HOW TO USE “INFO” BUTTON
completed, the settings will be renewed The “Vehicle Information” screen will ap-
as directed, and the screen will return to pear when the “INFO” button is pushed.
the map.
Choose an item using the joystick and
SETTING UP THE START-UP push the “ENTER” button.
SCREEN
After viewing or adjusting the information
When you turn the ignition switch to the on the following screens, push the
ACC or ON position, the SYSTEM “BACK” button to return to the VEHICLE
START-UP warning is displayed on the INFORMATION menu.
screen. Read the warning and select the
“OK” key then push the “ENTER” button.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
If the “View” key is highlighted with the
joystick and the “ENTER” button is
pushed, the average fuel consumption
history will be displayed in graph form
along with the average for the previous
Reset-to-Reset period.
The unit can be converted between “US”
and “Metric”. See “How to use SETTING
button” later in this section.
SAA1074 SAA1075
Fuel economy information

The distance to empty, average fuel
economy and current fuel economy
(shown on the right side bar) will be dis-
played for reference.
To reset the Average Fuel Economy, use
the joystick to highlight the “Reset” key
and push the “ENTER” button.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SAA1305 SAA1290 SAA1291
Trip computer information Maintenance information 1. Reset the driving distance to the new
maintenance schedule.
Elapsed Time, Driving Distance and Av- To set the maintenance interval for the
erage Speed will be displayed. Engine Oil or Oil Filter, choose an item 2. Set the interval (mileage) of the main-
using the joystick and push the “ENTER” tenance schedule. To determine the
To reset, use the joystick to highlight the recommended maintenance interval,
button.
“Reset” key and push the “ENTER” button refer to your “INFINITI Service and
immediately before driving the vehicle. You can also set to display a message to Maintenance Guide”.
remind you that the maintenance needs
The unit can be converted between “US” 3. To display the maintenance informa-
to be performed.
and “Metric”. See “How to use SETTING tion automatically when the set
button” later in this section. The following example shows how to set trip distance is reached, highlight the
the engine oil change interval. Use the “Interval Reminder” key with the joy-
same steps to set the other maintenance stick and push the “ENTER” button.
information.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
4. To return the display to the “Mainte-
nance” screen, push the “BACK”
button.
“Maintenance” display cannot be oper-
ated when the vehicle is moving. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place to see the informa-
tion.
SAA1332 SAA1292
Engine Oil q
1 /Oil Filter q
2
Maintenance notice To return to the previous display after the
“Maintenance Notice” screen is dis-
The “Maintenance Notice” screen (“EN- played, push the “BACK” button.
GINE OIL” or “OIL FILTER”) will be auto-
matically displayed as shown when both The “Maintenance Notice” screen displays
of the following conditions are met: each time the ignition switch is turned ON
until one of the following conditions are
O the vehicle is driven the set distance met:
and the ignition switch is turned to
the OFF position. O “Reset Display” is selected.
O the ignition switch is turned to the ON O “Interval Reminder” is set OFF.
position the next time the vehicle will O the maintenance interval is set again.
be driven.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
5 seconds after the operation is finished
on the map display.
To turn on the screen, select the “Dis-
play” key and turn on the “ON” indicator.
Brightness/Contrast/Background Color:
To adjust the brightness and contrast of
the screen, select the “Brightness” or
“Contrast” key and push the “ENTER”
button. Then you can adjust the bright-
ness to darker or brighter and the con-
trast to lower or higher using the joystick.
For information on the “Background
SAA1293 SAA1294 Color” key, refer to the separate Naviga-
tion System Owner’s Manual.
*: Refer to the separate Navigation Display settings
System Owner’s Manual.
The following menu will appear when
HOW TO USE “SETTING” BUTTON pushing the “SETTING” button, selecting
The “Settings” screen will appear when the “Display” key and pushing the
the “SETTING” button is pushed. “ENTER” button.
Display:
To turn off the screen, select the “Dis-
play” key and push the “ENTER” button to
turn off the “ON” indicator. When any
mode button is pushed with the screen
off, the screen turns on for further opera-
tion. The screen will turn off automatically
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Clock Format:
Choose either the 12-hour clock display or
the 24-hour clock display.
Offset Adjust:
Adjust the time by increasing or de-
creasing per minute.
Daylight Saving Time:
Turn this item to ON for daylight saving
time application.
Time Zone:
Choose the time zone from the following
SAA1091 SAA1295
O Pacific
Clock settings Language/Units settings
O Mountain
The following display will appear when The Language/Units setting screen will
O Central
pushing the “SETTING” button, selecting appear when selecting the “Language/
the “Clock” key and pushing the “ENTER” O Eastern Units” key and pushing the “ENTER”
button. button.
O Atlantic
On-screen Clock: O Newfoundland
When this item is turned to ON, a clock is
always displayed in the upper right corner
of the screen.
This clock will indicate the time almost
exactly because it is always adjusted by
the GPS system.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
VENTILATORS
HOW TO USE THE BUTTON

To change the display brightness, push
the button. Pushing the button again
will change the display to DAY or NIGHT
display. Then, adjust the brightness mov-
ing the joystick right or left.
If no operation is done within 10 seconds,
or if the “BACK” button is pushed, the
display will return to the previous display.
SAA1296 SAA0563A
Display of Select Language Front
Select the “Select Language” or “Select Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.
Units” key and push the “ENTER” button.
Open or close, and adjust the air flow di-
Language: “English” or “Français” rection of ventilators.
Unit: “US” — Mile, °F, MPG : This symbol indicates that the
“Metric” — km, °C, L/100 km vents are closed when the vent le-
ver is moved left (front) or down
Select the “ON” key of the desired lan-
(rear).
guage or units and push the “ENTER” but-
ton. : This symbol indicates that the
vents are open when the vent
lever is moved right (front) or up
(rear).
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(Automatic)
SAA0564B
Rear (if so equipped)
SAA1306
1. Front window defroster button 6. Fan speed control button

2. Rear window defroster button 7. MODE (air flow control) button
(Refer to the “2. Instruments and con- 8. A/C (Air Conditioner) button
trols” section.) 9. OFF button
3. Outside air circulation button 10. DUAL button (if so equipped)
4. Air recirculation button 11. TEMP (Temperature control) dial
5. AUTO/ECON button
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
AUTOMATIC OPERATION economy. It allows higher humidity than
WARNING normal operation.
Cooling and/or dehumidified
heating (AUTO) Pushing the AUTO/ECON button changes
O The air conditioner cooling function op- operations as follows while the A/C
erates only when the engine is running. This mode may be normally used all year button indicator is on. AUTO → ECON →
round as the system automatically works AUTO
O On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a to keep a constant temperature. Air flow
closed vehicle could quickly become distribution and fan speed are also con- Heating (A/C off)
high enough to cause severe or possibly trolled automatically.
fatal injuries to people or animals. Do The air conditioner does not activate.
1. Push the AUTO/ECON button on. When you need to heat only, use this
not leave children or adults who would
(AUTO will be displayed.) mode.
normally require the assistance of
others in your vehicle. Unattended pets 2. If the A/C button indicator is off, push 1. Push the AUTO/ECON button. (AUTO
should also not be left alone. the A/C button to activate air condi- will be displayed.)
tioner. The A/C button indicator will
O Do not use the recirculation mode for come on. 2. Push the A/C button to turn off the air
long periods as it may cause the interior conditioner. The A/C button indicator
3. Turn the temperature control dial to will turn off.
air to become stale and the windows to set the desired temperature.
fog up. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to
O Adjust the temperature to about 75°F set the desired temperature.
O Positioning of the heater and/or air con- (24°C) for normal operation.
ditioner controls should not be done O The temperature of the passenger
O The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained auto-
while driving so full attention may be
compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan
given to vehicle operation. matically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automati-
speed are also controlled automatically.
Start the engine and operate the controls cally.
O Do not set the temperature lower than
to activate the air conditioner. Economical operation (ECON) the outside air temperature. Otherwise
the system may not work properly.
Economical operation reduces some load
to the engine to improve the fuel O Not recommended if windows fog up.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Dehumidified defrosting or MANUAL OPERATION Air flow control (MODE)
defogging Fan speed control Pushing the MODE button selects the air
1. Push the front window defroster outlet to:
Push the fan speed control button −
button on. (The indicator light on : Air flows from center and side
or + to manually control the fan
the button will come on.) ventilators.
speed.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to : Air flows from center and side
Push the AUTO/ECON button to return to
set the desired temperature. ventilators and foot outlets.
automatic control of the fan speed.
O To quickly remove ice from the outside : Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
of the windows, push the fan speed Fresh air
control button + and set to the Push the outside air circulation button : Air flows from defroster and foot
maximum position. to draw outside air into the passen- outlets.
O As soon as possible after the wind- ger compartment. The indicator light on To turn the system off
shield is clean, push the AUTO/ECON the button will come on.
button to return to the auto mode. Push the OFF button.
Air recirculation
O When the front window defroster DUAL BUTTON (if so equipped)
Push the air recirculation button to
button is pushed, the air condi- You can set the temperature of the driver
recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.
tioner will automatically be turned on and front passenger sides individually.
The indicator light on the button will
at outside temperatures above 23°F
come on. Pushing the DUAL button changes the set-
(−5°C) to defog the windshield, and
the air recirculation mode will auto- The air recirculation button will not be acting position as follows:
matically be turned off. tivated when the air conditioner is in the Driver/Passenger → Driver → Passenger
defroster mode.
Outside air is drawn into the pas- If selecting the Driver/Passenger position
senger compartment to improve the again after the temperature is individually
defogging performance. set, the display will show the temperature
set for the driver side.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE The filter should be replaced if air flow de-
creases significantly or if windows fog up
The outside ambient temperature will be easily when operating the heater or air
shown on the center display. conditioning system.
The ambient temperature sensor is lo-
cated in front of the radiator. The sensor
may be affected by road or engine heat,
wind direction and other driving condi-
tions. The display may differ from the ac-
tual outside temperature or the tempera-
ture displayed on various signs or bill-
boards.
OPERATING TIPS
HA1011-A
When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air
The sensor qA on the instrument panel
flow from the foot outlets may not operate
helps maintain a constant temperature;
for a maximum of 150 seconds. However,
this is not a malfunction. After the coolant do not put anything on or around this
temperature warms up, the air flow from sensor.
the foot outlets will operate normally. IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The air conditioning system is equipped
with an in-cabin microfilter which collects
dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure air
conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates
efficiently, replace the filter in accordance
with the maintenance schedule in the
INFINITI Service and maintenance guide.
To replace the filter, contact an INFINITI
dealer.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM
The air conditioning system in your Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON Remember that a moving vehicle is not
INFINITI vehicle is charged with a refriger- position and push the POWER or RADIO the ideal place to listen to a radio. Be-
ant designed with the environment in button to turn on the radio. If you listen to cause of the movement, reception condi-
mind. This refrigerant will not harm the the radio with the engine not running, the tions will constantly change. Buildings,
earth’s ozone layer. However, special key should be turned to the ACC position. terrain, signal distance and interference
charging equipment and lubricant are re- from other vehicles can work against
Radio reception is affected by station sig- ideal reception. Described below are
quired when servicing your INFINITI air
nal strength, distance from radio trans- some of the factors that can affect your
conditioner. Using improper refrigerants
mitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and radio reception.
or lubricants will cause severe damage to
other external influences. Intermittent
your air conditioning system. See “Ca-
changes in reception quality normally are
pacities and recommended fuel/
caused by these external influences.
lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con-
sumer information” section for air condi- Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-
tioning system refrigerant and lubricant hicle may influence radio reception
recommendations. quality.
An INFINITI dealer will be able to service Radio reception
your environmentally friendly air condi-
tioning system. Your radio system is equipped with state-
of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance
radio reception. These circuits are de-
WARNING signed to extend reception range, and to
enhance the quality of that reception.
The air conditioner system contains refriger-
However there are some general charac-
ant under high pressure. To avoid personal teristics of FM, AM and satellite radio sig-
injury, any air conditioner service should be nals that can affect radio reception
done only by an experienced technician with quality in a moving vehicle, even when
proper equipment. the finest equipment is used. These char-
acteristics are completely normal in a
given reception area, and do not indicate
any malfunction in your radio system.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves in areas with many tall buildings. It can
away from a station transmitter, the sig- also occur for several seconds during
nals will tend to fade and/or drift. ionospheric turbulence even in areas
where no obstacles exist.
Static and flutter: During signal interfer-
ence from buildings, large hills or due to Static: Caused by thunderstorms, elec-
antenna position, usually in conjunction trical power lines, electric signs and even
with increased distance from the station traffic lights.
transmitter, static or flutter can be heard. SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
This can be reduced by adjusting the equipped)
treble control counterclockwise to reduce
treble response. When the satellite radio is first installed
or the battery has been replaced, the sat-
Multipath reception: Because of the re- ellite radio may not work properly. This is
flective characteristics of FM signals, di- not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 min-
SAA0306
rect and reflected signals reach the re- utes with satellite radio ON for satellite
FM RADIO RECEPTION ceiver at the same time. The signals may radio to receive all of the necessary data.
cancel each other, resulting in momentary
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 flutter or loss of sound. No satellite radio reception is available
to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural unless optional satellite receiver and an-
(single channel) FM having slightly more AM RADIO RECEPTION tenna are installed and an XM or
range than stereo FM. External influences AM signals, because of their low fre- SIRIUSTM satellite radio service subscrip-
may sometimes interfere with FM station quency, can bend around objects and tion is active.
reception even if the FM station is within skip along the ground. In addition, the Satellite radio is not available in Alaska
25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM signals can be bounced off the iono- and Hawaii.
signal is directly related to the distance sphere and bent back to earth. Because
between the transmitter and receiver. FM of these characteristics. AM signals are Satellite radio performance may be af-
signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhib- also subject to interference as they travel fected if cargo carried on the roof blocks
iting many of the same characteristics as from transmitter to receiver. the satellite radio signal.
light. For example they will reflect off ob- If possible, do not put cargo over the sat-
jects. Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is
passing through freeway underpasses or ellite antenna.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS O CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,
scratched, covered with fingerprints, or
Compact Disc (CD) player that have pin holes may not work prop-
erly.
O During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the hu- O The following CDs may not work prop-
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD erly:
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely. — Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
O The player may skip while driving on — Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
rough roads. — Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
O The CD player sometimes cannot func- O Do not use the following CDs as they
tion when the passenger compartment may cause the CD player to malfunc-
temperature is extremely high. De- tion.
crease the temperature before use.
— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs
— CDs that are not round
— CDs with a paper label
— CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
O CDs with MP3 or WMA format cannot be
SAA0480 written in this audio system.
O Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 O If the CD cannot be played, one of the
cm) round discs that have the “COM- following messages will be displayed.
PACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the
disc or packaging.
O Do not expose the CD to direct sun-
light.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
CHECK DISC: Compact Disc (CD) with MP3 or compressed digital audio file is deter-
WMA mined by the bit rate used when en-
• Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-
coding the file.
rectly (the label side is facing up, Explanation of terms:
etc.). O Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-
O MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pic- quency is the rate at which the
• Confirm that the CD is not bent or tures Experts Group Audio Layer 3. samples of a signal are converted
warped and it is free of scratches. MP3 is the most well-known com- from analog to digital (A/D conversion)
PUSH EJECT: pressed digital audio file format. This per second.
format allows for near “CD quality”
This is a malfunction due to excessive sound, but at a fraction of the size of O Multisession — Multisession is one of
temperature inside the player. Remove normal audio files. MP3 conversion of the methods for writing data to media.
the CD by pushing the EJECT button. Af- an audio track from CD-ROM can re- Writing data once to the media is
ter a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD duce the file size by approximately called a single session, and writing
can be played when the temperature of 10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible more than once is called a multises-
the player returns to normal. loss in quality. MP3 compression re- sion.
UNPLAYABLE: moves the redundant and irrelevant O ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3 tag is the
parts of a sound signal that the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file
The file is unplayable in this audio sys- human ear doesn’t hear. that contains information about the
tem (only MP3 or WMA CD). digital music file such as song title,
O WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)
is a compressed audio format created artist, album title, encoding bit rate,
by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-
The WMA codec offers greater file mation is displayed on the
compression than the MP3 codec, en- Album/Artist/Track title line on the
abling storage of more digital audio display.
tracks in the same amount of space * Windows and Windows Media are
when compared to MP3s at the same either registered trademarks or trade-
level of quality. marks of Microsoft Corporation in the
O Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number United States and/or other countries.
of bits per second used by a digital
music file. The size and quality of a
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O The names of folders not containing
MP3/WMA files are not shown in the
display.
O If there is a file in the top level of the
disc, “ROOT” is displayed.
O The playback order is the order in
which the files were written by the
writing software. Therefore, the files
might not play in the desired order.
SAA1025
Playback order:
Playback order of the CD with compressed
files (MP3/WMA) is as illustrated above.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Specification chart:
Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet

Supported file systems * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not sup-
ported.
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

Supported versions*
Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
WMA Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder),

Folder levels
Files: 512
Text character number limitation 128 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16

BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM
Displayable character codes
Big Endian), 05: (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16
BOM Little Endian)
* Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate
cannot be played.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the
player.
Cannot play If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be
played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and
number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Poor sound quality
The bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long time be- If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before
fore the music starts playing. the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might
Music cuts off or skips
not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Move immediately to the next When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by
song when playing. copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in
desired order. the desired order.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
1. CD EJECT button
2. CD play button
3. RADIO (FM/AM/SAT*) band select
button
4. Audio display
5. PTY/CAT (Type A), SSV (Type B) button
6. DISP (Display) CHANGE button
7. SEEK, APS REW/APS FF, TRACK
CHANGE button
8. CD LOAD button
9. POWER ONzOFF button, Volume control
knob
SAA0937 10. AUTOzP (Automatic preset) button
Type A
11. RPT (repeat) play (Type A), RPT (re-
peat) play/CAT button (Type B)
12. SCAN tuning button
13. Station preset (FM/AM/SAT)/CD insert
or CD play select button
14. AUDIO (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BAL-
ANCE, SSV (Type A only)) button
15. RADIO TUNE/FFzREW/AUDIO (BASS,
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, SSV (Type A
only)) ADJUSTING button
* No satellite radio reception is available
unless optional satellite receiver and
antenna are installed and an XM or
SIRIUSTM satellite radio service sub-
SAA0938 scription is active.
Type B
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
It may take some time to receive the acti- call up the mode (radio, tape or CD) which or Balance modes. Fader adjusts the
vation signal after subscribing to the XM was playing immediately before the sound level between the front and rear
or SIRIUSTM satellite radio provider. After system was turned off. When no CD or speakers and Balance adjusts the sound
receiving the activation signal, an avail- tape is loaded, the radio will come on. between the right and left speakers.
able channel list will be automatically up- While the system is on, pushing the To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW,
dated in the radio. For XM , turn the igni- POWER on/off button turns the system MID or HIGH, push the or (TUNE)
tion switch from the LOCK to ACC position off. button (Type A) or push the SSV button
to update the channel list. (Type B).
Volume control:
Satellite radio is not available in Alaska After 10 seconds, the radio, or CD display
Turn the volume control knob to adjust
and Hawaii. reappears. Once the sound quality is set
the volume.
to the desired level, push the AUDIO but-
FM-AM-SATELLITE RADIO WITH This vehicle has Speed Sensitive control ton repeatedly until the radio, or CD dis-
COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume play appears.
changes as the driving speed changes.
Audio main operation DISPLAY CHANGE:
AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, This button will work during FM radio, sat-
Head unit:
BALANCE, SSV (Type A only)): ellite radio (if so equipped) and CD opera-
The radio has an FM diversity reception tion. Find the detailed function in the de-
Push the AUDIO button to change the se-
system, which employs two antennas scription of each item.
lecting mode as follows.
printed on the rear window. This system
automatically switches to the antenna BASS → TREBLE → FADER → BALANCE → FM-AM-SAT radio operation
which is receiving less interference. SSV (Type A only) → (Normal) → BASS RADIO (FM/AM/SAT) band select:
The auto loudness circuit enhances the To adjust Bass, Treble, Fader and Bal- Pushing the band select button will
low frequency range automatically in both ance, push the AUDIO button until the de- change the band as follows:
radio reception and CD playback. sired mode BASS, TREBLE, FADER or BAL-
ANCE appears in the display. Push the (Without satellite radio)
POWER on/off:
TUNE
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON ( or ) button to adjust Bass and
position, and then push the POWER Treble to the desired level. Use the
on/off button while the system is off to or button also to adjust Fader
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
(With satellite radio) TUNE (Tuning): SCAN tuning:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → SAT1 → SAT2 → AM Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from
low to high frequencies and stops at each
No satellite radio reception is available WARNING broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Push-
unless optional satellite receiver and an-
ing the button again during this 5 sec-
tenna are installed and an XM or SIRI- The radio should not be tuned while driving onds period will stop SCAN tuning and
USTM satellite radio service subscription
so full attention may be given to vehicle op- the radio will remain tuned to that sta-
is active.
eration. tion.
Satellite radio is not available in Alaska
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed
and Hawaii.
Push these buttons for manual tuning. To within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to
When the RADIO band select button is move quickly through the channels, push the next station.
pushed while the ignition switch is in the and hold either of the TUNE buttons down DISPLAY:
ACC or ON position, the radio will come for more than 0.5 second.
on at the station last played. O By pushing the DISP button for more
SEEK tuning: than 1.5 seconds while receiving FM
The last station/channel played will also
For AM and FM radio: radio waves, “PS NAME” switches be-
come on when the ONzOFF/VOL control
tween ON and OFF (Type A only).
knob is pushed to ON. Push the SEEK button or , to
tune from high to low or low to high fre- O Pushing the DISP button will display
If another audio source is playing when
quencies and stops at the next broadcast- additional information about the satel-
the RADIO button is turned to ON, the
ing station. lite radio broadcast (for example:
other audio source will automatically be
Artist name, Title).
turned off and the last radio station For satellite radio: Keep pushing the DISP button, and it
played will come on.
Push the SEEK button or to will change the information of the sat-
The FM stereo indicator ST will glow seek channels of the next or previous cat- ellite radio broadcast to be displayed
during FM stereo reception. When the ste- egory. as follows:
reo broadcast signal is weak, the radio CH Number → CH Name → Artist
will automatically change from stereo to Name → Song Title → CH Number
monaural reception.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Station memory operations: To preset the FM, AM, SAT or PTY preset buttons; but these can be changed
station/channel, push the AUTO.P button by pushing the station preset buttons for
Twelve stations/channels can be set for
for more than 1.5 seconds. more than 1.5 seconds when the desired
the FM band (six for FM1, six for FM2),
Program type/category (Type A) PTY name is in the display.
twelve for satellite radio (six for SAT1, six
for SAT2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band. Repeat/category (Type B):
1. Tune to the desired station using the When the PTY button is pushed for more
SEEK, SCAN or TUNE button. than 1.5 seconds during FM mode, the PTY
name of the current tuned station is dis-
2. Select the desired station/channel played (Type A only). During this time if
and keep pushing any of the desired the PTY data code is zero, or the data is
station preset buttons (1 to 6) until a unreadable; the display will show NONE.
beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes
when the select button is pushed.) When the PTY (CAT) — type A, or RPT (CAT)
— Type B, button is pushed for more than
3. The channel indicator will then come 1.5 seconds during the satellite radio
on and the sound will resume. Memo- mode, the category name of the current
rizing is now complete. channel is displayed.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same 1. PTY (CAT) selection mode
manner. PTY (CAT) name selection can be done
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if by the up/down TUNE button or
the fuse blows, the preset station memory in the PTY (CAT) selection mode.
2. PTY SEEK tuning mode
will be erased. In that case, reset the de- It is possible to shift the PTY (CAT) name
sired stations. After selecting a PTY name, push the
by one step, with one push of the
up/down tuning button or . SEEK button or within 10
Automatic preset: seconds. Tuning to the PTY station will
PTY name selection can also be achieved start. If you do not push the SEEK but-
To select the preset FM, AM, SAT or PTY
by pushing the preset buttons. ton within the 10 second period, the
station/channel, push the AUTO.P button
for less than 1.5 seconds. Initial PTY names are stored in the station PTY mode will be canceled.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
3. PTY SCAN tuning mode When the CD button is pushed with the
Push the SCAN tuning button to tune CAUTION CD loaded with the radio playing, the
the PTY name station, and stop at radio will automatically be turned off and
each broadcasting station for 5 sec- O Do not force the compact disc into the the compact disc will start to play.
onds. Pushing the button again during slot. This could damage the player. DISPLAY:
this 5 second period will stop SCAN
tuning and the radio will remain tuned O Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs. When the display button is pushed for
to that station. If the SCAN tuning but- more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is be-
ton is not pushed within 5 seconds, If the system has been turned off while ing played, the music information dis-
SCAN tuning moves to the next sta- the CD was playing, pushing the played can be changed in the following
tion. ONzOFF/VOL control button will start the order.
compact disc.
Compact disc (CD) changer CD:
CD LOAD:
operation
To insert a CD in the CD changer, push
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON the LOAD button for less than 1.5 sec-
position, push the LOAD button and insert onds. Select the loading slot by pushing
the compact disc into the slot with the la- the CD insert select button (1 to 6), then
bel side facing up. The CD will be guided CD with MP3 or WMA:
insert the CD.
automatically into the slot and start play-
ing. To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in suc-
After loading the disc, the number of cession, push the LOAD button for more
tracks on the disc and the play time will than 1.5 seconds.
appear on the display. The inserted slot numbers will illuminate FF (Fast Forward), REW
If the radio is already operating, it will au- on the display. (Rewind):
tomatically turn off and the CD will play.
PLAY: CD:
When the CD button is pushed with the When the (fast forward) or (re-
system off and the compact disc loaded, wind) button is pushed while the compact
the system will turn on and the compact disc is being played, the CD will play
disc will start to play. while fast forwarding or rewinding. When
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
the button is released, the CD will return CD PLAY select button: CD:
to normal play speed.
To change CD, push the CD play select
CD with MP3 or WMA: button (1 to 6).
When the or button is pushed SCAN tuning: CD with MP3 or WMA:
for less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is
When the SCAN tuning button is pushed
being played, the folders in the CD will be
for less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is
changed.
being played, the beginning of all the CD
When the or button is pushed programs in each track will be played for
for more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is 10 seconds in sequence.
being played, the CD will play while fast CD EJECT:
When the SCAN tuning button is pushed
forwarding or rewinding. When the button When the CD EJECT button is pushed with
for more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is
is released, the CD will return to the the CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.
being played, the first program in all the
normal play speed.
CDs will be played for 10 seconds. To eject the discs selected by the CD se-
APS (Automatic Program lect button, push the EJECT button for less
Search) FF, APS REW: Pushing the button again during this 10
second period will stop SCAN tuning. than 1.5 seconds.
When the (APS FF) button is pushed To eject all the discs, push the EJECT but-
while the CD is being played, the program If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed
within 10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to ton for more than 1.5 seconds.
after the present one will start to play
from its beginning. Push several times to the next disc program. When this button is pushed while the CD
skip through programs. The CD will ad- REPEAT (RPT): is being played, CD will come out and the
vance the number of times the button is system will turn off.
pushed. (When the last program on the When the RPT button is pushed while the
CD is played, the play pattern can be If the CD comes out and is not removed, it
CD is skipped through, the first program
changed as follows: will be pulled back into the slot to protect
will be played.) When the (APS REW)
it.
button is pushed, the program being
played returns to its beginning. Push sev-
eral times to skip back through programs.
The CD will go back the number of times
the button is pushed.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
CD IN indicator: O A new disc may be rough on its inner
and outer edges. Remove the rough
CD IN indicator appears on the display
edges using the side of a pen or pen-
when the CD is loaded with the system
cil as illustrated.
on.
SAA0451
CD CARE AND CLEANING

O Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch
the surface of the disc. Do not bend
the disc.
O Always place the discs in the storage
case when they are not being used.
O To clean a disc, wipe the surface from
the center to the outer edge using a
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
using a circular motion.
Do not use a conventional record
cleaner or alcohol intended for indus-
trial use.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
1. VOLUME control switch system on. Push the switch to change the
2. POWER on/off switch mode in the sequence of AM, FM1, FM2,
3. MODE select switch SAT1 (if so equipped), SAT2 (if so
4. Tuning switch equipped) and CD.
5. POWER on/MODE select switch VOLUME control switch
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR Push up/down the VOLUME control switch
AUDIO CONTROL to increase or decrease the volume.
The audio system can be operated using Tuning switch
the controls on the steering wheel.
Memory change (radio):
POWER on/off switch Push up/down the tuning switch or
With the ignition switch turned to the ACC for less than 1.5 seconds to change
SAA0974 or ON position, push the POWER switch to the radio frequency.
Type A turn the audio system on or off. SEEK tuning (radio):
MODE select switch Push up/down the tuning switch or
Push the MODE select switch to change for more than 1.5 seconds to seek
the mode in the sequence of AM, FM1, the next or previous radio station.
FM2, SAT1 (if so equipped), SAT2 (if so APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS
equipped) and CD. REW (CD):
Pushing this switch also turns the audio Push up/down the tuning switch or
system on when it is off. for less than 1.5 seconds to return to
the beginning of the present program or
POWER on/MODE select switch (if skip to the next program. Push several
so equipped) times to skip back or skip through pro-
With the ignition switch turned to the ACC grams.
or ON position, push the POWER
SAA1349 on/MODE select switch to turn the audio
Type B
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
This system searches for the blank inter- When installing a CB, ham radio or car
vals between selections. If there is a CAUTION phone in your INFINITI, be sure to observe
blank interval within one program or there the following cautions, otherwise the new
is no interval between programs, the sys- equipment may adversely affect the En-
O Do not place metalized film near the rear
tem may not stop in the desired or ex- gine control system and other electronic
pected location. window glass or attach any metal parts parts.
to it. This may cause poor reception or
FOLDER change (CD with MP3/WMA): noise.
WARNING
Push up/down the tuning switch or O When cleaning the inside of the rear win-
for more than 1.5 seconds to change
dow, be careful not to scratch or damage O A cellular telephone should not be used
the folders (if it has folders).
the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe while driving so full attention may be
Push up/down the tuning switch or along the antenna with a dampened soft given to vehicle operation. Some juris-
for less than 1.5 seconds to return to cloth. dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-
the beginning of the present program or
phones while driving.
skip to the next program.
DISC change (CD without MP3/WMA): O If you must make a call while your ve-
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellular
Push up/down the tuning switch or phone operational mode (if so equipped)
for more than 1.5 seconds to change is highly recommended. Exercise ex-
the playing disc up or down.
treme caution at all times so full atten-
ANTENNA tion may be given to vehicle operation.
Window antenna O If a conversation in a moving vehicle re-

quires you to take notes, pull off the road
The antenna pattern is printed inside the to a safe location and stop your vehicle
rear window.
before doing so.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
WITH INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION
CAUTION WARNING
O Keep the antenna as far away as pos- O Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
sible from the electronic control mod- in a safe location. If you have to use a
ules. phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
O Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
be given to vehicle operation.
(20 cm) away from the electronic control
system harness. Do not route the an- O If a conversation in a moving vehicle re-
tenna wire next to any harness. quires you to take notes, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop your vehicle
O Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
before doing so.
as recommended by the manufacturer.
O Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body. CAUTION
O For details, consult an INFINITI dealer.
To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a
phone after starting the engine.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
connecting procedure is required. Your
phone is automatically connected with
the in-vehicle phone module when the ig-
nition switch is turned to the ON position
with the paired cellular phone turned on
and carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to 5 different
Bluetooth cellular phones to the in-
vehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following
notes.
O Set up the wireless connection be-
tween a cellular phone and the in-
vehicle phone module before using
the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Sys-
tem.
O Some Bluetooth enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized by the
in-vehicle phone module. Please visit
SAA1302 www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for a rec-
ommended phone list.
Your INFINITI is equipped with the With Bluetooth wireless technology, you
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. If can make or receive a hands-free tele- O You will not be able to use a hands-
you are an owner of a Bluetooth enabled phone call with your cellular phone in the free phone under the following condi-
vehicle. tions:
cellular phone, you can set up the wire-
less connection between your cellular Once your cellular phone is paired to the — Your vehicle is outside of the tele-
phone and the in-vehicle phone module. in-vehicle phone module, no other phone phone service area.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
— Your vehicle is in an area where it Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Initialization
is difficult to receive radio waves; Manual regarding the telephone charges,
such as in a tunnel, in an under- cellular phone antenna and body, etc. When the ignition switch is turned to the
ground parking garage, near a tall ON position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is
This device complies with Part 15 of the initialized, which takes a few seconds.
building or in a mountainous area.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- When completed, the amber light on the
— Your cellular phone is locked to lowing two conditions: (1) this device may
overhead console illuminates and the
prevent it from being dialed. not cause harmful interference, and (2)
system is ready to accept voice com-
this device must accept any interference
When the radio wave condition is not mands. If the button is pushed be-
received, including interference that may
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may fore the initialization completes, the
cause undesired operation.
be difficult to hear the other person’s system will announce “Hands-free phone
voice during a call. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement: system not ready” and will not react to
Do not place the cellular phone in an area This equipment complies with FCC radia- voice commands.
surrounded by metal or far away from the tion exposure limits set forth for an un-
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone controlled environment. This equipment
Operating tips
quality degradation and wireless connec- should be installed and operated with To get the best performance out of the
tion disruption. minimum distance 8 inch (20 cm) be- INFINITI Voice Recognition system, ob-
tween the radiator and your body. This serve the following:
While a cellular phone is connected
Transmitter must not be co-located or op-
through the Bluetooth wireless connec- O Keep the interior of the vehicle as
erating in conjunction with any other an-
tion, the battery power of the cellular quiet as possible. Close the windows
tenna or transmitter.
phone may discharge quicker than usual. to eliminate surrounding noises
If the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone USING THE SYSTEM (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),
System seems to be malfunctioning, The INFINITI Voice Recognition system al- which may prevent the system from
please refer to “Troubleshooting guide” lows hands-free operation of the recognizing voice commands correctly.
later in this section. You can also visit Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. O Wait until the tone sounds before
www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for trouble- speaking a command. Otherwise, the
shooting help. If the vehicle is in motion, some com-
mands may not be available so full atten- command will not be received properly.
tion may be given to vehicle operation. O Start speaking a command within 5
seconds after the tone sounds.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O Speak in a natural voice without paus- saying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system Example: 1-800-662-6200
ing between words. announces “Cancel” and ends the VR
— “One eight hundred six six two six
session. You can also push the
Giving voice commands button on the steering wheel at
two oh oh”,
To operate INFINITI Voice Recognition, any time. Whenever the VR session is — NOT “One eight hundred six six two
push and release the button located cancelled, a double beep is played to sixty two hundred, and
on the steering wheel. The light on the indicate you have exited the system.
— NOT “One eight oh oh six six two
overhead console flashes to signal you O If you want to adjust the volume of the sixty two hundred.
have entered a voice recognition (VR) ses- voice feedback, push the volume con-
sion. After the tone sounds, speak a com- trol switches (+ or -) on the steering O Numbers can be spoken in small
mand. wheel while being provided with feed- groups. The system will prompt you to
back. You can also use the radio continuing entering digits, if desired.
The command given is picked up by the
volume control knob. Example: 1-800-662-6200
microphone, and voice feedback is given
when the command is accepted. How to say numbers — “One eight oh oh”
O If you need to hear the available com- INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a cer-
The system repeats the numbers and
mands for the current menu again, say tain way to speak numbers in voice com-
prompts you to enter more.
“Help” and the system will repeat mands. Refer to the rules and examples
them. below. — “six six two”
O If a command is not recognized, the O Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for The system repeats the numbers and
system announces, “Command not “0”. prompts you to enter more.
recognized. Please try again.” Repeat
Example: 1-800-662-6200 — “six two oh oh”
the command in a clear voice.
— “One eight oh oh six six two six two O You can say “Star” for * and “Pound”
O If you want to go back to the previous
oh oh”, or for # at anytime in any position of the
command, you can say “Go back” or
phone number.
“Correction” anytime the system is — “One eight zero zero six six two six
waiting for a response. two oh oh” Example: 1-555-1212 *123
O You can cancel a command when the O Words can be used for the first 4 dig- — “One five five five one two one two
system is waiting for a response by its places only. star one two three”
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
NOTE: MODE/PHONE END
For best results, say phone numbers as Push the button to cancel a VR
single digits. session or end a call.
GETTING STARTED
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetooth Hands-Free
Phone System with INFINITI Voice Recog-
nition. For additional command options,
refer to “List of voice commands” later in
this section.
Choosing a language
SAA1303 You can interact with the Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System using English,
CONTROL BUTTONS Spanish or French.
The control buttons for the Bluetooth To change the language, perform the fol-
Hands-Free Phone System are located on lowing.
the steering wheel. 1. Press and hold the button for
TALK/PHONE SEND more than 5 seconds.
Push the button to initiate a VR 2. The system announces: “Press the

session or answer an incoming call. PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the
hands-free phone system to enter the
You can also use the button to speaker adaptation mode or press the
skip through system feedback and to PHONE/END ( ) button to select a
enter commands during a call. See different language.”
“List of voice commands” and “During
a call” later in this section for more in-
formation.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
3. Press the button. Pairing procedure lar phone, operate it to enter the code
“1234”.
For information on speaker adapta-
tion, see “Speaker adaptation (SA) The code is always “1234” regardless
mode” later in this section. of the number of phones paired.
4. The system announces the current lan- The pairing procedure of the cellular
guage and gives you the option to phone varies according to each cel-
change the language to Spanish (in lular phone manufacturer. See the cel-
Spanish) or French (in French). Use the lular phone Owner’s Manual for de-
following chart to select the language. tails. You can also visit
NOTE: www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for in-
structions on pairing INFINITI recom-
Note: You must press the button or mended cellular phones.
the button within 5 seconds to 1. Push the button on the steering
change the language. wheel. The system announces the 5. The system asks you to say a name for
available commands. the phone qE .
Press Press
If the name is too long or too short,
Current (TALK/PHONE (MODE/PHONE 2. Say: “Setup” q A . The system acknowl-
language SEND) END) the system tells you, then prompts
edges the command and announces
to select to select you for a name again.
the next set of available commands.
Also, if more than one phone is paired
English Spanish French 3. Say: “Pair phone” qB . The system ac-
and the name sounds too much like a
knowledges the command and an-
Spanish English French name already used, the system tells
nounces the next set of available com-
you, then prompts you for a name
French English Spanish mands.
again.
5. If you decide not to change the lan- 4. Say: “New phone” q C . The system ac-
6. The system asks you to assign a prior-
guage, do not press either button. knowledges the command and asks
ity level q
F . The priority level deter-
After 5 seconds, the VR session will you to initiate pairing from the phone
mines which phone is active when
end, and the language will not be handset q D .
more than one paired Bluetooth
changed. When you are asked to enter a PIN phone is in the vehicle. Follow the in-
code for pairing your Bluetooth cellu- structions provided by the system or
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
refer to “Setup” later in this section 4. When you have finished speaking the LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
for more information on changing pri- phone number, the system repeats it
orities. back and announces the available
commands.
7. The system will ask if you would like
to select a custom ring tone qG . Follow 5. Say: “Dial” q
C . The system acknowl-
the instructions provided by the edges the command and makes the
system or refer to “Setup” later in this call.
section for more information on se-
For additional command options, see “List
lecting ringtones.
of voice commands” later in this section.
When you push and release the but-
Making a call by entering a phone Receiving a call ton on the steering wheel, you can
number choose from the commands on the Main
When you hear the ring tone, press the Menu. The following pages describe these
button on the steering wheel. commands and the commands in each
Once the call has ended, press the sub-menu.
button on the steering wheel. Remember to wait for the tone before
NOTE: speaking.
If you do not wish to take the call when you You can say “Help” to hear the list of
1. Push the button on steering hear the ring tone, press the button commands currently available anytime the
wheel. A tone will sound. on the steering wheel to reject the call. system is waiting for a response.
2. Say: “Call” q A . The system acknowl- If you want to end an action without com-
For additional command options, see “List
edges the command and announces pleting it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit”
of voice commands” later in this section.
the next set of available commands. at anytime the system is waiting for a re-
sponse. The system will end the VR ses-
3. Say the number you wish to call q B .
sion. Whenever the VR session is can-
For example, 555-1212 can be said as celled, a double beep is played to indi-
“five five five one two one two.” See cate you have exited the system.
“How to say numbers” earlier in this
section for more information. If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” or “Cor-
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
rection” anytime the system is waiting for See “Phone book” later in this section to If a redial number does not exist, the sys-
a response. learn how to store entries. tem announces, “There is no number to
redial” and ends the VR session.
When you get used to the menus in the When prompted by the system, say the
system, you can talk ahead by saying name of the phone book entry you wish to “Call back” q
D
more than one command at a time. For call. The system acknowledges the name. Use the Call Back command to dial the
example, say, “Call five five five one two number of the last incoming call within
If there are multiple locations associated
one two” or “Memo pad record.” the vehicle.
with the name, the system asks you to
Also, when you get used to the system re- choose the location. The system acknowledges the command,
sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone repeats the number and begins dialing. If
Once you have confirmed the name and
by pressing the button on the steer- a call back number does not exist, the
location, the system begins the call.
ing wheel. However, if you press the system announces, “There is no number
button when the system is waiting Number (speak digits) q
B to call back” and ends the VR session.
for a response from you it will end the VR
session. When prompted by the system, say the During a call
number you wish to call. Refer to “How to During a call there are several command
“Call” say numbers” and “Making a call by en- options available. Press the button
tering a phone number” earlier in this on the steering wheel to mute the receiv-
section for more details. ing voice and enter commands.
“Redial” q
C O “Help” — The system announces the
Use the Redial command to call the last available commands.
number that was dialed within the ve- O “Go back/Correction” — The system
hicle. announces “Go back,” ends the VR
session and returns to the call.
NOTE:
O “Cancel/Quit” — The system an-
Name (speak name) q
A The system will not redial the last number nounces “Cancel,” ends the VR ses-
dialed by the handset keypad. sion and returns to the call.
If you have stored entries in the Phone
Book, you can dial a number associated The system acknowledges the command,
with a name and location. repeats the number and begins dialing.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the NOTE: When prompted by the system, say the
Send command to enter numbers dur- name you would like to give the new
ing a call. For example, if you were di- If the other party ends the call or the cellu- entry.
rected to dial an extension by an auto- lar phone network connection is lost while
the Mute feature is on, the Mute feature For example, say: “Mary.”
mated system:
may need to be reset to “off.” If the name is too long or too short, the
Say: “Send one two three four.”
“Phone book” system tells you, then prompts you for a
The system acknowledges the com- name again.
mand and sends the tones associated
Also, if the name sounds too much like a
with the numbers. The system then
name already stored, the system tells
ends the VR session and returns to
you, then prompts you for a name again.
the call.
Once the system accepts the name and
O “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call
you confirm it is correct, the system asks
command to transfer the call from the
for a location (Home, Office, Mobile or
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System
Other).
to the cellular phone when privacy is
desired. For example, say: “Home.”
The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for
The system announces, “Transfer call. each phone paired with the system. Each The system acknowledges the location
Call transferred to privacy mode.” The name can have up to 4 locations/phone and asks for a number.
system then ends the VR session. numbers associated with it. For example, say: “five five five one
You can also issue the Transfer Call NOTE: two one two.” See “How to say num-
command again to return to a hands- bers” earlier in this section for more
free call through the vehicle. Each phone has its own separate phone information.
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone
O “Mute” — Use the Mute command to book if you are currently connected with The system repeats the number and
mute your voice so the other party Phone B. prompts you for the next command. When
cannot hear it. Use the mute command you have finished entering numbers,
again to unmute your voice. “New entry” q
A choose “Store.”
Use the New Entry command to store a
new name in the system.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
The system confirms the name, location try has been stored. The system then The system recites the phone book en-
and number. The system then asks if you ends the VR session. tries but does not include the actual
would like to store another location for phone numbers. When the playback of
“Delete” q
C
the list is complete the system ends the
the same name. If you do not wish to
store another location, the system ends Use the Delete command to erase one en- VR session.
the VR session. try from the phone book, all entries from You can stop the playback of the list at
the phone book, the current redial any time by pressing the button on
“Edit” q
B
number or the current call back number. the steering wheel. The system ends the
Use the Edit command to alter an existing VR session.
phone book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or To delete entries from the phone book,
4th phone number to an existing entry. say a name or “All entries” when “Memo pad”
prompted by the system.
When prompted by the system, say the
name of the entry you wish to edit. The system acknowledges the command
and asks you to confirm the deletion.
The system acknowledges the name and
asks you for the location you would like To delete the current redial number or call
to edit. back number, say “redial number” or “call
back number” when prompted by the sys-
Say the name of the location. The system
tem.
acknowledges and asks you for the phone
number you would like to store with this If a redial number or a call back number The Memo Pad records a maximum of 3
location. exists, the system deletes them without voice memos, each up to 20 seconds
asking for confirmation. long.
See “How to say numbers” earlier in this
section for more information. If there is no number for the entry you are “Play” q
A
trying to delete, the system says so and The system plays back all the memos in
The system repeats the number and
ends the VR session. the order of newest to oldest. The system
prompts you for the next command. When
you have finished entering numbers, “List names” q
D ends the VR session.
choose “Store.” If there are no memos recorded, the
Use the List Names command to hear all
The system confirms the name, location the names and locations in the phone system announces “No messages to
and number, then announces that the en- book. play.” The system ends the VR session.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
“Record” q
B “Setup” that you must first delete one phone or
replace an existing phone.
The system announces “Recording” and a
tone sounds signaling you to begin. If you try to pair a phone that has already
Speak the information you wish to record been paired to your vehicle’s system, the
clearly. When you are done, press the system announces the name the phone is
or button on the steering already using. The pairing procedure will
wheel. then be cancelled.
A tone sounds and the system announces When prompted by the system, choose
“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds from the following commands:
to end the VR session. O “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing a
If the memo pad is full, the system asks if phone” earlier in this section.
you wish to record over the oldest memo. O “Replace phone” — The system an-
“Delete” q
C Use the Setup command to change op- nounces the names of the phones al-
tions associated with the Bluetooth ready paired and asks which you
The Delete command erases all memos. would like to replace.
The system asks you to confirm this ac- Hands-Free Phone System.
tion before deleting all memos. “Pair phone” q
A
Once you say the name of the phone
you wish to replace, the paring proce-
Use the Pair Phone command to pair a dure will begin. Refer to “Pairing pro-
phone to the Bluetooth Hands-Free cedure” earlier in this section.
Phone System.
O “List phone” — See the description
When you are asked to enter a PIN code for below.
pairing your Bluetooth cellular phone, op-
erate it to enter the code “1234”. “List phones” q
B
The code is always “1234” regardless of Use the List Phone command to hear the
the number of phones paired. names of the phones currently paired. If
no phones are paired, the system an-
Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to nounces, “No paired phones to list.” The
pair a sixth phone, the system announces system then ends the VR session.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
“Select phone” q
C For example, if the current priority levels “Select ringtone” q
F
are:
Use the Select Phone command to select Use the Select Ringtone command to se-
a phone of lesser priority when two or Priority Level 1 = Phone A lect the tone heard in the vehicle when an
more phones paired with Bluetooth Priority Level 2 = Phone B incoming call is received.
Hands-Free Phone System are in the ve- Priority Level 3 = Phone C
The system announces the name of the
hicle at the same time. and you change the priority level of Phone active phone and asks you to choose from
The system asks you to name the phone C to Level 1, then: the following commands:
and confirm the selection. Priority Level 1 = Phone C O “Ringtone” — The system plays a ring-
Once the selection is confirmed, the se- Priority Level 2 = Phone B tone and asks if you would like to se-
lected phone remains active until the igni- Priority Level 3 = Phone A lect that tone. If you say no, the
tion switch is turned OFF or you select a “Delete phone” q
E system plays the next ringtone avail-
new phone. able and continues to cycle through
Use the Delete Phone command to delete the ringtones until you select one or
“Change priority” q
D a specific phone or all phones from the quit.
Use the Change Priority command to Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.
O “Silent” — The system asks you to
change the priority level of the active The system announces the names of the confirm your wish to disable the ring-
phone. phones already paired with the system and tone.
The priority level determines which phone their priority level. The system then gives
you the option to delete a specific phone, “Bluetooth off” q
G
is active when more than one paired
Bluetooth phone is in the vehicle. all phones or listen to the list again. Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn
Once you chose to delete a phone or all off the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Sys-
The system states the priority level of the
phones, the system asks you to confirm tem.
active phone and asks for a new priority
level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5). this action. When Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone
NOTE: System is off, you will not be able to
If the new priority level is already being
make or receive calls using INFINITI Voice
used for another phone, the two phones When you delete a phone, the associated
Recognition. Also, you will not have ac-
will swap priority levels. phone book for that phone will also be de-
cess to the Phone Book.
leted.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
You can still use the Memo Pad and ac- 2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine 9. When training is finished, the system
cess Setup. running, the parking brake on, and the will tell you an adequate number of
transmission in Park. phrases have been recorded.
To turn on the system again, choose the
Bluetooth On command from the Setup 3. Press and hold the button for 10. The system will ask you to say your
command. more than 5 seconds. name. Follow the instructions to regis-
ter your name.
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE 4. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the 11. The system will announce that
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of hands-free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation has been com-
dialect users to train the system to improve speaker adaptation mode or press the pleted and the system is ready.
recognition accuracy. By repeating a PHONE/END ( ) button to select a
number of commands, the users can create The SA mode will stop if:
different language.”
a voice model of their own voice that is O The button is pressed for more
stored in the system. The system is ca- 5. Press the button. than 5 seconds in SA mode.
pable of storing a different speaker adapta-
tion model for memory A and memory B. For information on selecting a dif- O The vehicle is driven during SA mode.
ferent language, see “Choosing a lan-
If memory A is available, the system will guage” earlier in this section. O The ignition switch is turned to the
use memory A to store the model. If OFF or LOCK position.
memory A is in use and memory B is 6. Voice memory A or memory B is se-
available, the system will use memory B lected automatically. If both memory Training phrases
to store the model. If both of the memory locations are already in use, the During the SA mode, the system instructs
locations are in use, the system will ask system will prompt you to overwrite you to say the following phrases.
the user to select which memory location one. Follow the instructions provided
should be overwritten. by the system. (The system will prompt you for each
phrase.)
Training procedure 7. When preparation is complete and you
are ready to begin, the press the O phone book new entry
The procedure for training a voice is as button.
O dial three oh four two nine
follows.
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow
O delete call back number
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably the instructions provided by the
quiet outdoor location. system. O setup pair phone
w 06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X
O memo pad play O Home
O eight pause nine three two pause O four three pause two nine pause zero
seven
O delete redial number
O delete all entries
O phone book list names
O call seven two four zero nine
O call eight oh five four one
O phone book delete entry
O Correction
O memo pad record
O setup change ring tone
O dial star two one seven oh
O dial seven four oh one eight
O Yes
O setup main menu
O No
O Delete
O select ring tone
O dial nine seven two six six
O dial eight five six nine two
O memo pad delete
O Bluetooth on
O call seven six three oh one
O setup change priority
O go back
O call three one nine oh two
O call five six two eight zero
O nine seven pause pause three oh eight
O dial six six four three seven
O Cancel
O call back number
O call star two zero nine five
O delete phone
O dial eight three zero five one
w 06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solu-
tions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the ve-
hicle.
System fails to interpret the command cor-
rectly. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is
too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to
improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed
The system consistently selects the wrong en- by using the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section.
try from the phone book.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
w 06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving.............. 5-2 Cruise control ................................................. 5-20
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .................. 5-2 Precautions on cruise control .................... 5-20
Three way catalyst....................................... 5-3 Cruise control operations .......................... 5-20
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ..... 5-3 Break-in schedule ........................................... 5-22
Avoiding collision and rollover..................... 5-5 Increasing fuel economy ................................. 5-22
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ............. 5-5 All-wheel drive (AWD) (if so equipped) ............ 5-23
All-wheel drive (AWD) driving safety All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light ........... 5-23
precautions (for AWD models) .................... 5-6 Parking/parking on hills ................................. 5-24
Ignition switch (except Intelligent Key Power steering ................................................ 5-25
system)............................................................. 5-6 Brake system.................................................. 5-26
Automatic transmission ............................... 5-6 Braking precautions .................................. 5-26
Manual transmission .................................. 5-7 Anti-lock brake system (ABS)..................... 5-26
Key positions .............................................. 5-8 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .......... 5-28
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System ............ 5-8 Rear active steer (RAS) system (if so
Ignition switch (models with the Intelligent equipped) ....................................................... 5-29
Key system) ...................................................... 5-9 Cold weather driving....................................... 5-30
Ignition switch positions ............................. 5-9 Freeing a frozen door lock......................... 5-30
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System .......... 5-10 Anti-freeze................................................. 5-30
Before starting the engine............................... 5-10 Battery ...................................................... 5-30
Starting the engine .......................................... 5-11 Draining of coolant water .......................... 5-30
Driving the vehicle .......................................... 5-12 Tire equipment .......................................... 5-30
Automatic transmission.............................. 5-12 Special winter equipment........................... 5-31
Manual transmission ................................ 5-16 Driving on snow or ice ............................... 5-31
Parking brake.................................................. 5-19 Engine block heater (if so equipped) ......... 5-32
w 06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause to prevent carbon monoxide entry into
unconsciousness or death. the vehicle.
O Do not leave children, impaired adults, or O If you suspect that exhaust fumes are O If a special body, camper, or other equip-
pets alone in your vehicle. They could ac- entering the vehicle, drive with all win- ment is added for recreational or other
cidentally injure themselves or others dows fully open, and have the vehicle in- usage, follow the manufacturer’s recom-
through inadvertent operation of the ve- spected immediately. mendation to prevent carbon monoxide
hicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, tempera- entry into the vehicle. (Some recre-
O Do not run the engine in closed spaces
tures in a closed vehicle could quickly be- ational vehicle appliances such as
such as a garage.
come high enough to cause severe or pos- stoves, refrigerators, heaters, etc. may
sibly fatal injuries to people or animals. O Do not park the vehicle with the engine also generate carbon monoxide.)
running for any extended length of time. O The exhaust system and body should be
O Closely supervise children when they are
around cars to prevent them from O Keep the trunk lid closed while driving, inspected by a qualified mechanic when-
playing and becoming locked in the otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn ever:
trunk where they could be seriously in- into the passenger compartment. If you — Your vehicle is raised while being ser-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear must drive with the trunk lid open, follow viced.
seatback and trunk lid securely latched these precautions:
when not in use, and prevent children’s — You suspect that exhaust fumes are
— Open all the windows. entering into the passenger compart-
access to car keys.
— Set the air recirculation switch OFF ment.
and the fan control at high to circu- — You notice a change in the sound of
EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide) late the air. the exhaust system.
WARNING O If electrical wiring or other cable connec- — You have had an accident involving
tions must pass to a trailer through the damage to the exhaust system, un-
seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow derbody, or rear of the vehicle.
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain
the manufacturer’s recommendation
colorless and odorless carbon monoxide.
5-2 Starting and driving
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
THREE WAY CATALYST inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
The three way catalyst is an emission con- help reduce exhaust pollutants. vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-
trol device installed in the exhaust bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
system. Exhaust gas in the converter is O Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
burned at high temperatures to help re- tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
duce pollutants. electrical systems can cause overrich
should determine the proper tire inflation
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, pressure for those tires.)
WARNING causing it to overheat. Do not keep
driving if the engine misfires, or if no- As an added safety feature, your vehicle
ticeable loss of performance or other un- has been equipped with a tire pressure
O The exhaust gas and the exhaust system monitoring system (TPMS) that illumi-
usual operating conditions are detected.
are very hot. Keep people, animals or nates a low tire pressure telltale when
Have the vehicle inspected promptly by
flammable materials away from the ex- one or more of your tires is significantly
an INFINITI dealer. under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low
haust system components.
O Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
O Do not stop or park the vehicle over flam- level. Running out of fuel could cause the should stop and check your tires as soon
mable materials such as dry grass, engine to misfire, damaging the as possible, and inflate them to the
waste paper or rags. They may ignite and three-way catalyst. proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
cause a fire. under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
O Do not race the engine while warming it heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
up. inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
CAUTION O Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
handling and stopping ability.
the engine.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-
O Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
from leaded gasoline will seriously re- TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-
SYSTEM (TPMS) rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumi-
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), nation of the TPMS low tire pressure tell-
should be checked monthly when cold and tale.
Starting and driving 5-3
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate example a flat tire while driving). and may lead to an accident and could re-
when the system is not operating properly. sult in serious personal injury. Check the
O Tire pressure rises and falls de-
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the
pending on the heat caused by the ve-
bined with the low tire pressure telltale. tire pressure to the recommended COLD
hicle’s operation and the outside tem-
When the system detects a malfunction, the tire pressure shown on the Tire and
perature. Low outside temperature can
telltale will flash for approximately one Loading Information label to turn the low
lower the temperature of the air inside
minute and then remain continuously illu- tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have
the tire which can cause a lower tire
minated. This sequence will continue upon a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as
inflation pressure. This may cause the
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the soon as possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “6.
low tire pressure warning light to illu-
malfunction exists. When the malfunction In case of emergency” section for changing
minate. If the warning light illuminates
indicator is illuminated, the system may not a flat tire.)
in low ambient temperature, check the
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
tire pressure for all four tires. O When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the in- For additional information, see “Low tire is replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-
stallation of replacement or alternate tires pressure warning light” in the “2. Instru- cated, the TPMS will not function and the
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the ments and controls” section and “Tire low tire pressure warning light will flash.
TPMS from functioning properly. Always pressure monitoring system (TPMS)” in Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after the “6. In case of emergency” section. possible for tire replacement and/or sys-
replacing one or more tires or wheels on tem resetting.
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the
WARNING O Replacing tires with those not originally
TPMS to continue to function properly. specified by INFINITI could affect the
O If the low tire pressure warning light illumi- proper operation of the TPMS.
Additional information nates while driving, avoid sudden steering
O The TPMS does not monitor the tire maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce ve- O Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
pressure of the spare tire. hicle speed, pull off the road to a safe loca- tire sealant into the tires, as this may
tion and stop the vehicle as soon as pos- cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
O The TPMS will activate only when the ve-
sible. Serious vehicle damage could occur sensors.
hicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
AVOIDING COLLISION AND crash, an unbelted or improperly belted
CAUTION ROLLOVER person is significantly more likely to be in-
jured or killed than a person properly
wearing a seat belt.
Do not place metalized film or any metal WARNING
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
may cause poor reception of the signals from Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and DRIVING
the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will prudent manner may result in loss of control
not function properly. or an accident. WARNING
FCC Notice: Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid exces-
Changes or modifications not expressly sive speed, high speed cornering, or sud- drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces
approved by the party responsible for com- den steering maneuvers. These driving coordination, delays reaction time and im-
pliance could void the user’s authority to practices could cause you to lose control pairs judgement. Driving after drinking alco-
operate the equipment. of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss hol increases the likelihood of being in-
This device complies with Part 15 of the of control could result in a collision with volved in an accident injuring yourself and
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. other vehicles or objects, or cause the ve- others. Additionally, if you are injured in an
hicle to rollover, particularly if the loss of accident, alcohol can increase the severity of
Operation is subject to the following two control causes the vehicle to slide side-
conditions: (1) This device may not cause ways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid the injury.
harmful interference, and (2) this device driving when tired. Never drive under the
must accept any interference received, in- influence of alcohol or drugs (including INFINITI is committed to safe driving. You
cluding interference that may cause un- prescription or over-the-counter drugs must not drive under the influence of al-
desired operation of the device. which may cause drowsiness). Always cohol. Every year thousands of people are
wear your seat belt as outlined in the “1. injured or killed in alcohol related acci-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple- dents. Although the local laws vary on
mental restraint system” section and also what is considered to be legally intoxi-
instruct your passengers to do so. cated, the fact is that alcohol affects all
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in people differently and most people under-
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover estimate the effects of alcohol.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
IGNITION SWITCH (except Intelligent Key
system)
Remember, drinking and driving don’t
mix! O This vehicle is not designed for off-road
(rough road) use. Do not drive on sandy
And that’s true for drugs too (over the
or muddy roads that tires may get stuck
counter, prescription, and illegal drugs).
in.
Don’t drive if your ability to operate your
vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or O Do not place an AWD equipped vehicle
some other physical condition. on a two wheel dynamometer or raise
two wheels off the ground and shift the
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) DRIVING
transmission to any D (drive) or R (re-
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (for AWD verse) position. Doing so may result in
models) transmission damage or unexpected ve-
hicle movement which could result in se-
WARNING rious vehicle damage or personal injury.
SSD0392
O Never operate the accelerator pedal with
O Do not drive beyond the performance ca- any wheels raised and the other wheels AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
pability of the tires, even with AWD en- on the ground while jacking up or with
gaged. Accelerating quickly, sharp The ignition lock is designed so the key
any wheels on a roller and the other cannot be turned to the LOCK position
steering maneuvers or sudden braking wheels on the ground. Otherwise, the and removed until the selector lever is
may cause loss of control. vehicle could lurch forward or backward. moved to the P (Park) position.
O Always use tires of the same type, size, O When a wheel is off the ground due to an When removing the key from the ignition
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel switch, make sure the selector lever is in
radial), and tread pattern on all four excessively. the P (Park) position.
wheels. Install tire chains on the rear
If the selector lever is not returned to the
wheels when driving on slippery roads P (Park) position, the key cannot be
and drive carefully. moved to the LOCK position.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
When the key cannot be turned toward To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to
the LOCK position, proceed as follows to the LOCK position. Remove the key.
remove the key:
To unlock the steering wheel, insert the
1. Move the selector lever into the P po- key and turn it gently while rotating the
sition. steering wheel slightly right and left.
2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward
the ON direction. WARNING
3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK po-
4. Remove the key. sition while driving. The steering wheel will
If the key is removed from the ignition lock. This may cause the driver to lose con-
switch, the selector lever cannot be trol of the vehicle and could result in serious
moved from the P position. The selector vehicle damage or personal injury.
SSD0503
lever can be moved if the ignition switch is
in the ON position and the foot brake pedal
is depressed.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
There is an OFF position q 1 in between The ignition switch includes a device that
the LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF po- helps prevent accidental removal of the
sition is indicated by a “1” on the key cyl- key while driving.
inder. When the ignition switch is in the The key can only be removed when the ig-
OFF position, the steering wheel is not nition switch is in the LOCK position.
locked.
To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
In order to lock the steering wheel, it position from the ACC or ON position, turn
must be turned about 1/6 of a turn coun- the key to the OFF position, push the key
terclockwise from the straight up posi- in, then turn the key to the LOCK position.
tion.
There is an OFF position q 1 in between the
LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position
is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
In order for the steering wheel to be OFF (1) If the engine fails to start using a regis-
locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a tered key (for example, when interference
The engine can be turned off without
turn clockwise from the straight up posi- is caused by another registered key, an
locking the steering wheel.
tion. automated toll road device or automated
The ignition lock is designed so that the payment device on the key ring), restart
To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to
key cannot be turned to the LOCK position the engine using the following proce-
the LOCK position. Remove the key.
and removed until the selector lever is dures:
To unlock the steering wheel, insert the moved to the P position (for automatic
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-
key and turn it gently while rotating the transmission) or the key is pushed in
sition for approximately 5 seconds.
steering wheel slightly right and left. while turning the key between the ACC
and LOCK positions. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or
WARNING ACC (Accessories) (2)
LOCK position and wait approximately
10 seconds.
This position activates electrical accesso-
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK po- 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
ries when the engine is not running.
sition while driving. The steering wheel will 4. Restart the engine while holding the
lock. This may cause the driver to lose con- ON (Normal operating position) (3)
device (which may have caused the in-
trol of the vehicle and could result in serious This position activates ignition system in terference) away from the registered
vehicle damage and/or personal injury. addition to electrical accessories. key.
START (4) If this procedure allows the engine to
KEY POSITIONS start, INFINITI recommends placing the
This position activates the starter motor, registered key on a separate key ring to
The ignition switch includes an anti-theft starting the engine. avoid interference from other devices.
steering lock device. INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
LOCK (Normal parking position) (0) SYSTEM
The ignition key can only be removed The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
when the ignition switch is in this posi- will not allow the engine to start without
tion. the use of the registered key.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
IGNITION SWITCH (models with the
Intelligent Key system)
1. Move the selector lever into the P po- the LOCK position, even using the me-
sition. chanical key or valet key.
2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the
ON direction. WARNING
3. Turn the key toward the LOCK posi- Never turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
tion. position while driving. The steering wheel
The selector lever can be moved from the P will lock. This may cause the driver to lose
position if the ignition switch is in the ON control of the vehicle and could result in se-
position and the foot brake pedal is de- rious vehicle damage and/or personal injury.
pressed.
There is an OFF position in between the IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
LOCK and ACC positions, although it does
SPA1628
not show on the lock cylinder. When the Push in the ignition switch to the q
B
ignition is in the OFF position the steering range when you turn it.
The ignition lock is designed so that the
ignition switch cannot be turned to the wheel is not locked. LOCK (Normal parking position):
LOCK position and removed until the se- In order for the steering wheel to be The ignition switch can only be locked in
lector lever is moved to the P (Park) posi- locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a the qA position.
tion. turn counterclockwise from the straight
up position. The ignition switch will be unlocked when
When turning the ignition switch, make it is pushed in, and turned to the ACC po-
sure the selector lever is in the P position. To lock the steering wheel, turn the igni- sition q D while carrying the Intelligent
tion switch to the LOCK position. To unlock Key.
If the selector lever is not returned to the
the steering wheel, push the ignition
P position, the ignition switch cannot be ACC (Accessories) q
D :
switch in and turn it gently while rotating
moved toward the LOCK position. the steering wheel slightly right and left. This position activates electrical accesso-
When the ignition switch cannot be If the battery of the vehicle equipped with ries such as the radio, when the engine is
turned toward the LOCK position, proceed the Intelligent Key system is discharged, not running.
as follows: the ignition switch cannot be turned from
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
ON (Normal operating position) q

E : INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER O Make sure the area around the vehicle
SYSTEM is clear.
This position turns on the ignition system
and electrical accessories. The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System O Maintenance items should be checked
periodically, for example, each time
START q
F : will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered key. you check engine oil.
This position starts the engine. As soon
If the engine does not start using a regis- O Check that all windows and lights are
as the engine has started, release the
tered key (for example, when interference clean.
switch immediately. It will automatically
return to the ON position. is caused by another registered key, an O Visually inspect tires for their appear-
automated toll road device or an auto- ance and condition. Also check tires
For important safety information, see “Ig- mated payment device on the key ring), for proper inflation.
nition switch” in the “5. Starting and driv- restart the engine using the following pro-
ing” section. cedures: O Lock all doors.
The ignition switch cannot be turned back 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po- O Position seat and adjust head re-
to the LOCK position unless the shift lever sition for approximately 5 seconds. straints.
is in P position. (It can be turned to only
O Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
qC .) 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately O Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-
CAUTION 10 seconds. gers to do likewise.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. O Check the operation of warning lights
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition 4. Restart the engine while holding the when the ignition key is turned to the
switch in ACC or ON position when the en- device (which may have caused the in- ON position. See “Warning/indicator
gine is not running for an extended period. terference) separate from the regis- lights and audible reminders” in the
This can discharge the battery. tered key. “2. Instruments and controls” section.
If this procedure allows the engine to

start, INFINITI recommends placing the
registered key on a separate key ring to
avoid interference from other devices.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Apply the parking brake. Release the key and the accelerator cold weather, keep the engine running
pedal when the engine starts. for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before
2. Automatic transmission: shutting it off. Starting and stopping
O If the engine is very hard to start be- the engine over a short period of time
Move the selector lever to the P or N
cause it is flooded, depress the accel- may make the vehicle more difficult to
position. (P preferred.)
erator pedal all the way to the floor start.
The starter is designed so that the and hold it. Crank the engine for 5 to
starter does not operate unless the se- 6 seconds. After cranking the engine,
lector lever is in either one of the release the accelerator pedal. Crank
above positions. the engine with your foot off the accel-
erator pedal by turning the ignition key
Manual transmission:
to the START position. Release the key
Move the shift lever to the N position. when the engine starts. If the engine
Depress the clutch pedal fully to the starts, but fails to run, repeat the
floor. above procedure.
The starter is designed so that it does
not operate unless the clutch pedal is
CAUTION
fully depressed.
Do not operate the starter for more than 15
3. Turn the ignition switch to START (4) seconds at a time. If the engine does not
to crank the engine with your foot off
start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds
the accelerator pedal. Release the key
when the engine starts. before cranking again, otherwise the starter
could be damaged.
If the engine starts, but fails to run, re-
peat the above procedure. 4. Warm-up
O If the engine is very hard to start in Allow the engine to idle for at least 30
extremely cold weather or when re- seconds after starting. Do not race the
starting, depress the accelerator pedal engine while warming it up. Drive at
a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) moderate speed for a short distance
and while holding, crank the engine. first, especially in cold weather. In
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION other gear positions if the ignition switch

is turned to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position O Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)
5-speed automatic transmission or if the key is removed from the switch. while vehicle is moving forward. Never
shift to P (Park) or D (Drive) while vehicle
The automatic transmission in your ve- 1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
hicle is electronically controlled by a is moving rearward. Failure to do so
and push the selector lever button to
transmission control module to produce could cause you to lose control and have
shift into a driving gear.
maximum efficiency and smooth opera- an accident.
tion. 2. Release the parking brake and foot
brake, then gradually start the vehicle
Shown on the following pages are the rec- in motion.
ommended operating procedures for this CAUTION
transmission. Follow these procedures for
maximum vehicle performance and WARNING When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
driving enjoyment. grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing
O Do not depress the accelerator pedal the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should
Starting the vehicle while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) be used for this purpose.
After starting the engine, fully depress the to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manual shift
foot brake pedal and push the selector le- mode. Always depress the brake pedal
ver button before shifting the selector until shifting is completed. Failure to do
lever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D so could cause you to lose control and
(Drive) or Manual shift mode position. Be have an accident.
sure the vehicle is fully stopped before at-
tempting to shift the selector lever. O Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
This automatic transmission model is de- caution when shifting into a forward or
signed so that the foot brake pedal must reverse gear before the engine has
be depressed before shifting from P (Park) warmed up.
to any drive position while the ignition
O On slippery roads, do not downshift.
switch is the ON position.
This may cause a loss of control.
The selector lever cannot be moved out of
the P (Park) position and into any of the
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
can be selected without pushing the the N (Neutral) position or any drive position
button. to the P (Park) position. Apply the parking
brake. When parking on a hill, first depress
the foot brake pedal, apply the parking
WARNING brake, then move the lever to the P (Park)
position.
Apply the parking brake if the selector lever
is in any position while the engine is not run- CAUTION
ning. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle
to move unexpectedly or roll away and result
Use this position only when the vehicle is
in serious personal injury or property
completely stopped.
damage.
R (Reverse):
SSD0413 If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC po-
sition for any reason while the vehicle is Use this position to back up. Always be
To move the selector lever, in the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or any D sure the vehicle is completely stopped be-
(Drive) position, the key cannot be turned fore selecting the R (Reverse) position.
: Push the button while depressing The brake pedal must be depressed and
the brake pedal, to the LOCK position and be removed
from the ignition switch. Move the se- the selector lever button pushed in to
: Push the button, move the selector lever from the P (Park), N
: Just move the selector lever. lector lever to the P (Park) position, then
the key can be turned to the LOCK posi- (Neutral) or any drive position to the R (Re-
Shifting tion. verse) position.
After starting the engine, fully depress the P (Park): N (Neutral):

brake pedal and shift the selector lever Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-
Use this selector position when the vehicle
from the P (Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neu- gaged. The engine can be started in this
is parked or when starting the engine.
tral), D (Drive), or Manual shift mode posi- position. You may shift to the N (Neutral)
Make sure the vehicle is completely
tion. position and restart a stalled engine while
stopped. The brake pedal must be de-
Push the button to shift into the P (Park) pressed and the selector lever button the vehicle is moving.
or R (Reverse) position. All other positions pushed in to move the selector lever from
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
D (Drive): 3M (3rd) and 2M (2nd): O In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
sion may not shift to the selected gear.
Use this position for all normal forward Use for hill climbing or engine braking on
driving. downhill grades. This helps maintain driving perfor-
mance and reduces the chance of ve-
Manual shift mode 1M (1st): hicle damage or loss of control.
When the selector lever is shifted from Use this position when climbing steep In the manual shift mode, the transmission
the D position to the manual shift gate hills slowly or driving slowly through automatically shifts down to 1st gear be-
with the vehicle stopped or while driving, deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum fore the vehicle comes to a stop. When ac-
the transmission enters the manual shift engine braking on steep downhill grades. celerating again, it is necessary to shift up
mode. Shift range can be selected manu- O Remember not to drive at high speeds to the desired range.
ally. for extended periods of time in lower
than 4M range. This reduces gas mile- Accelerator downshift
In the manual shift mode, the shift range
is displayed on the position indicator in age. — In D position —
the meter. O When shifting up, move the selector For passing or hill climbing, fully depress
Shift ranges up or down one by one as lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts to the accelerator pedal to the floor. This
follows: higher range.) shifts the transmission down into the
→ → → → lower gear, depending on the vehicle
1M 2M 3M 4M 5M O When shifting down, move the se-
← ← ← ← speed.
lector lever to the − (down) side.
5M (5th): (Shifts to lower range.) Fail-safe
Use this position for all normal forward O Moving the selector lever rapidly to When the fail-safe operation occurs, the
driving. the same side twice will shift the automatic transmission will be locked in
ranges in succession. the 4th gear.
4M (4th):
O When canceling the manual shift If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-
For driving up or down long slopes where
mode, return the selector lever to the ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning
engine braking would be advantageous.
D position. The transmission returns and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe
to the normal driving mode. system may be activated. This will occur
even if all electrical circuits are functioning
properly. In this case, turn the ignition
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
switch to the OFF position and wait for 3 To release the shift lock, complete the fol-
seconds. Then turn the key back to the ON lowing procedure:
position. The vehicle should return to its
normal operating condition. If it does not
position and remove the key.
return to its normal operating condition,
have an INFINITI dealer check the trans- 2. Apply the parking brake.
mission and repair if necessary.
3. Remove the shift lock cover q
A using a
suitable tool.
4. Insert a suitable tool in the shift lock
slot, and push down q B .
5. Push the selector lever button qC and

move the selector lever to the N (Neu-
tral) position qD while holding down
SSD0477
the shift lock.
Shift lock release 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po-
sition to unlock the steering wheel.
If the battery charge is low or discharged, Now the vehicle may be moved to the
the selector lever may not be moved from desired location.
the P (Park) position even with the brake
pedal depressed and the selector lever If the lever cannot be moved out of the P
button pushed. (Park) position, have an INFINITI dealer
check the automatic transmission system
To move the selector lever, release the as soon as possible.
shift lock and push the selector lever but-
ton. The selector lever can be moved to
the N (Neutral) position. However, the
steering wheel will be locked unless the
ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Trans-
mission damage could occur. CAUTION
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to
2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in se- O Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
quence according to the vehicle speed. while driving. This may damage the
To back up, depress the shift lever and clutch.
then move it to the R (Reverse) position O Fully depress the clutch pedal before
after stopping the vehicle completely. shifting to help prevent transmission
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into damage.
the R (Reverse) or 1 position (Low gear),
shift to the N (Neutral) position, and then O Stop your vehicle completely before
release the clutch pedal once. Fully de- shifting into R (Reverse).
press the clutch pedal again and shift O When the vehicle is stopped for a period
SSD0536
into the R or 1 position. of time, for example at a stop light, shift
MANUAL TRANSMISSION to N (Neutral) and release the clutch
WARNING pedal with the foot brake applied.
Shifting
O Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
To change gears, or when up shifting or
down shifting, fully depress the clutch roads. This may cause a loss of control.
pedal, shift into the appropriate gear, O Do not over-rev the engine when shifting
then slowly and smoothly release the to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of
clutch. control or engine damage.
This vehicle is equipped with a short
throw shifter manual transmission. To en-
sure smooth gear changes, fully depress
the clutch pedal before operating the shift
lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully de-
pressed before the transmission is
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Use the up-shift indicator when driving as
follows:
O If the maximum engine speed is de-
sired, set the figure at 7,000 rpm. (The
indicator starts flashing from about
6,500 rpm and comes on steady at
7,000 rpm.)
O If the maximum engine torque is de-
sired, set the figure at 4,800 rpm.
(The indicator starts flashing from
about 4,300 rpm and comes on steady
at 4,800 rpm.)
O If you want to break in your vehicle,
SSD0432 SSD0433
use of the up-shift indicator with a
rather low figure will help you to avoid
Up-shift indicator the high engine speed.
Up-shift indicator setting:
The manual transmission up-shift indi- The desired engine speed (rpm) for the
To make the up-shift indicator not come up-shift indicator can be set while the up-
cator is located in the meter and shows on, set the figure at above 7,900 rpm.
the driver the timing to shift into a higher shift indicator setting mode is selected.
gear by illuminating. The use of the up- There may be a slight difference between Change the display to the up-shift indica-
the timing of the up-shift indicator illumi- tor mode by pushing the trip odometer
shift indicator will help you to upshift at a
nation and the tachometer indication. reset switch q 1 . When the up-shift indica-
constant engine speed (rpm) from any
tor setting mode is selected, the engine
gear. speed currently set is displayed. (The ini-
The up-shift indicator will start flashing tial factory setting is 8,000 rpm.) The fig-
when the engine speed is within about ure can be changed between 2,000 and
500 rpm of the set figure while driving, 8,000 rpm.
and then illuminate after the engine
speed reaches the set figure.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Push the trip odometer reset switch more For normal acceleration in low altitude ar- posted speed limits, and drive according
than approximately 2 seconds and then eas [less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]: to the road conditions, which will ensure
the figure in the display will start safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine
blinking. Gear change MPH (km/h) when shifting to a lower gear as it may
1st to 2nd 8 (13) cause engine damage or loss of vehicle
Pushing the trip odometer reset switch for 2nd to 3rd 16 (25) control.
less than approximately 1 second while
3rd to 4th 25 (40)
the figure is blinking will add the figure Gear MPH (km/h)
by 100 rpm. If pushing for more than ap- 4th to 5th 30 (50)
1st 35 (56)
proximately 1 second, the figure will in- 5th to 6th 33 (53)
2nd 60 (96)
crease by 500 rpm. For quick acceleration in low altitude 3rd 90 (144)
If you have not operated the trip odom- areas or in high altitude areas [over 4,000 4th —
eter reset switch for 5 seconds, the set- ft (1,219 m)]: 5th —
ting mode will end. The display will illumi- 6th —
Gear change MPH (km/h)
nate instead of blink.
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
If the battery cable is disconnected, the 2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
set engine speed will be returned to the 3rd to 4th 40 (64)
initial figure (8,000 rpm).
4th to 5th 45 (72)
Suggested up-shift speeds 5th to 6th 50 (80)
Shown below are suggested vehicle Suggested maximum speed in
speeds for shifting into a higher gear.
These suggestions relate to fuel economy
each gear
and vehicle performance. Actual up-shift Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is
speeds will vary according to road condi- not running smoothly, or if you need to
tions, the weather and individual driving accelerate.
habits.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested
speed (shown below) in any gear. For
level road driving, use the highest gear
suggested for that speed. Always observe
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
O Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
leased before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
O Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
O Do not use the gear shift in place of the
parking brake. When parking, be sure
the parking brake is fully engaged.
SPA1286E SPA2110
O Do not leave children unattended in a ve-
Automatic transmission model Manual transmission model hicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident.
To apply: Fully depress the parking brake To apply: Pull the parking brake lever up
pedal q
A . q1 .
To release: To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake. 1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Depress the parking brake pedal q
A 2. Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
and the parking brake will be reposition.
leased.
3. While pulling up on the parking brake
3. Before driving, be sure the brake lever slightly, push the button q2 and
warning light goes out. lower the lever completely q 3 .
4. Before driving, be sure the brake

warning light goes out.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
CRUISE CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
WARNING CONTROL
O If the cruise control system malfunc-
Do not use the cruise control when driving tions, it cancels automatically. The
under the following conditions: SET indicator light on the instrument
O When it is not possible to keep the ve- panel then blinks to warn the driver.
hicle at a set speed. O If the engine coolant temperature be-
O In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in comes excessively high, the cruise
speed. control system will be canceled auto-
matically.
O On winding or hilly roads.
O If the SET indicator light blinks, turn
O On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
the cruise control MAIN switch off and
O In very windy areas. have the system checked by an SSD0428
INFINITI dealer.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle con-
1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch
trol and result in an accident. O The SET indicator light may blink when
the cruise control MAIN switch is 2. SET/COAST switch
turned on while pushing the
RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST, or 3. CANCEL switch
CAUTION CANCEL switch. To properly set the 4. MAIN (ONzOFF) switch
cruise control system, perform the fol-
On manual transmission models, do not shift lowing procedures. CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
into N (Neutral) without depressing the
The cruise control allows driving at a
clutch pedal when the cruise control is set. speed between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144
Should this occur, depress the clutch pedal km/h) without keeping your foot on the
and turn the main switch off immediately. accelerator pedal.
Failure to do so may cause engine damage.
To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN
switch on. The CRUISE indicator light on
the instrument panel will come on.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
To set at cruising speed, accelerate your O The cruise control will automatically To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
vehicle to the desired speed, push the be cancelled if the vehicle slows down one of the following methods:
SET/COAST switch and release it. (The below approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h).
a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
SET indicator light will come on.) Take
O If you depress the clutch pedal vehicle reaches the desired speed,
your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your
vehicle will maintain the set speed. (manual transmission), or move the push the SET/COAST switch and re-
selector lever to the N (Neutral) posi- lease it.
O To pass another vehicle, depress the tion (automatic transmission), the
accelerator pedal. When you release b) Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.
cruise control will be canceled.
the pedal, the vehicle will return to Release the switch when the vehicle
the previously set speed. To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one slows down to the desired speed.
of the following methods:
O The vehicle may not maintain the set c) Push, then quickly release the SET/
speed when going up or down steep a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When COAST switch. This will decrease the
hills. If this happens, drive without the the vehicle reaches the desired speed, vehicle speed by about 1 MPH (1.6
cruise control. push and release the SET/COAST km/h).
switch.
To cancel the preset speed, follow either of To resume the preset speed, push and re-
these three methods: b) Push and hold the RESUME/ lease the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.
ACCELERATE switch. When the vehicle The vehicle will resume the last set cruis-
a) Push the CANCEL switch. The SET indi- reaches the speed you desire, release ing speed when the vehicle speed is over
cator light will go out. the switch. 25 MPH (40 km/h).
b) Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator c) Push, then quickly release the
light will go out. RESUME/ACCELERATE set switch. This
c) Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the will increase the vehicle speed by
CRUISE indicator and SET indicator about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
lights will go out.
O If you depress the brake pedal while
pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE
switch and reset at the cruising speed,
turn the MAIN switch off once and
then turn it on again.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
O Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Main- O When cruising at highway speeds, it is

CAUTION tain cruising speeds with a constant more economical to use the air condi-
accelerator position. tioner and leave the windows closed
to reduce drag.
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), O Drive at moderate speeds on the high-
follow these recommendations to obtain way. Driving at high speed will lower
maximum engine performance and ensure fuel economy.
the future reliability and economy of your
O Avoid unnecessary stopping and brak-
new vehicle. Failure to follow these recom-
ing. Maintain a safe distance behind
mendations may result in shortened engine
other vehicles.
life and reduced engine performance.
O Use a proper gear range which suits
road conditions. On level roads, shift
O Avoid driving for long periods at con- into high gear as soon as possible.
stant speed, either fast or slow. Do
not run the engine over 4,000 rpm. O Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
O Do not accelerate at full throttle in any O Keep your engine tuned up.
gear.
O Follow the recommended periodic
O Avoid quick starts. maintenance schedule.
O Avoid hard braking as much as pos- O Keep the tires inflated at the correct
sible. pressure. Low pressure will increase
tire wear and waste fuel.
O Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy
load for the first 500 miles (800 km). O Keep the front wheels in correct align-
ment. Improper alignment will cause
not only tire wear but also lower fuel
economy.
O Air conditioner operation lowers fuel
economy. Use the air conditioner only
when necessary.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so equipped)
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) WARNING If the warning light is blinking after the
LIGHT above operation, have your vehicle
checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as
The AWD warning light is located on the possible.
instrument panel.
The AWD warning light comes on when WARNING
the ignition switch is turned to the ON po-
sition. It turns off soon after the engine is Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped vehicle
started. with two wheels on a two wheel dynamometer
and the other two wheels raised. Doing so may
If any malfunction occurs in the AWD sys-
result in transmission damage or unexpected
tem while the engine is running, the
warning light will come on. vehicle movement which could result in serious
vehicle damage or personal injury.
The warning light may blink rapidly (about
twice per second) while trying to free a
stuck vehicle due to high power train oil CAUTION
temperature. The driving mode may
change to 2 wheel drive. If the warning
light blinks rapidly during operation, stop O Do not operate the engine on a free roller
the vehicle with the engine idling in a when any of the wheels are raised.
safe place immediately. Then if the light O If the warning light comes on while
goes off after a while, you can continue driving there may be a malfunction in the
SSD0336A driving. AWD system. Reduce the vehicle speed
A large difference between the diameters and have your vehicle checked by an
The full-time all-wheel drive (AWD) system of front and rear wheels will make the INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.
automatically changes the driving mode. warning light blink slowly (about once per
O Never drive on dry hard surface roads in
two seconds). Pull off the road in a safe
area, and idle the engine. Check that all the SNOW mode, as this will over load
tire sizes are the same, tire pressure is the power train and may cause a serious
correct and tires are not worn. malfunction.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
O If the warning light remains on after the

above operation, have your vehicle
checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible.
O The power train may be damaged if you
continue driving with the warning light
blinking rapidly.
SD1006MA
WARNING O Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the
O Do not stop or park the vehicle over flam- transmission placed into P (Park).
mable materials such as dry grass, Failure to do so could cause the vehicle
waste paper or rags. They may ignite and to move unexpectedly or roll away and
cause a fire. result in an accident.
O Never leave the engine running while the O Make sure the shift lever has been
vehicle is unattended. pushed as far forward as it can go and
cannot be moved without depressing the
O Never leave children unattended inside button at the end of the lever.
the vehicle.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
POWER STEERING
1. Firmly apply the parking brake. O HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO The power assisted steering uses a hy-
CURB: q
3 draulic pump, driven by the engine, to as-
2. Automatic transmission models:
sist steering.
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
road so the vehicle will move away If the engine stops or the drive belt
position.
from the center of the road if it moves. breaks, you will still have control of the
Manual transmission models: vehicle. However, much greater steering
effort is needed, especially in sharp turns
Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position and remove the key.
or at low speeds.
position. When parking on an uphill
grade, place the shift lever in the 1
(Low gear) position. WARNING
3. To help prevent the vehicle from
If the engine is not running or is turned off
rolling into the street when parked on
a sloping drive way, it is a good prac- while driving, the power assist for the steer-
tice to turn the wheels as illustrated. ing will not work. Steering will be much
harder to operate.
O HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: q
1
Turn the wheels into the curb and

move the vehicle forward until the
curb side wheel gently touches the
curb.
O HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: q
2
Turn the wheels away from the curb

and move the vehicle back until the
curb side wheel gently touches the
curb.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKING PRECAUTIONS brake is weakened or whenever the park-

ing brake shoes and/or drums/rotors are erating could cause the wheels to skid
The brake system has two separate hy- and result in an accident.
replaced, in order to assure the best
draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunc-
braking performance.
tions, you will still have braking ability at O If the engine is not running or is turned
two wheels. This procedure is described in the vehicle off while driving, the power assist for the
Vacuum assisted brake service manual and can be performed by brakes will not work. Braking will be
your INFINITI dealer. harder.
The brake booster aids braking by using
engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you Using the brakes
can stop the vehicle by depressing the ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal
brake pedal. However, greater foot pres-
sure on the brake pedal will be required while driving. This will cause overheating The anti-lock brake system (ABS) controls
to stop the vehicle and the stopping dis- of the brakes, increases wear on the the brakes so the wheels will not lock when
tance will be longer. brakes and pads, and reduces gas braking abruptly or when braking on slip-
mileage. pery surfaces. The system detects the rota-
Wet brakes tion speed at each wheel and varies the
To help save the brakes and to prevent
When the vehicle is washed or driven brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel
the brakes from overheating, reduce
through water, the brakes may get wet. from locking and sliding. By preventing
As a result, your braking distance will be speed and downshift to a lower gear be-
wheel lockup, the system helps the driver
longer and the vehicle may pull to one fore going down a slope or long grade.
maintain steering control and helps to mini-
side during braking. Overheated brakes may reduce braking mize swerving and spinning on slippery sur-
performance and could result in loss of faces.
To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
vehicle control.
speed while lightly tapping the brake
pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until
Using the system
the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving WARNING Depress the brake pedal and hold it
the vehicle at high speeds until the down.
brakes function correctly. O While driving on a slippery surface, be
Parking brake break-in careful when braking, accelerating or
Break-in the parking brake shoes when- downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-
ever the stopping effect of the parking
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
puter. The computer has a built-in diag-
WARNING nostic feature that tests the system each system. Stopping distances may also be
time you start the engine and move the longer on rough, gravel or snow covered
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may vehicle at a low speed in forward or re- roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always
result in increased stopping distances. verse. When the self-test occurs, you may maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in
hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation front of you. Ultimately, the responsibility
in the brake pedal. This is normal and is for safety of self and others rests in the
Normal operation not an indication of any malfunction. If hands of the driver.
the computer senses any malfunction, it
The ABS will not operate at speeds below switches the ABS off and turns on the Tire type and condition of tires may also af-
3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h) to stop the ve- ABS warning light in the instrument fect braking effectiveness.
hicle. (The speeds will vary according to panel. The brake system operates nor-
road conditions.) When the anti-lock O When replacing tires, install the speci-
mally, but without anti-lock assistance. fied size of tires to the front and rear.
system senses that one or more wheels
are close to locking up, the actuator If the light comes on during the self-test O When installing a spare tire, make sure it
(under the hood) rapidly applies and re- or while driving, take the vehicle to an
leases hydraulic pressure (like pumping is the proper size and type as specified
INFINITI dealer for repair.
the brakes very quickly). While the actua- on the Tire and Loading Information
tor is working, you may feel a pulsation in label. See “Vehicle identification” in the
the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibra-
WARNING “9. Technical and consumer informa-
tion from the actuator under the hood. tion” section for the Tire and Loading In-
This is normal and indicates that the ABS The anti-lock brake system is a sophisticated formation label location.
is working properly. However, the ABS op- device, but it cannot prevent accidents re-
eration may indicate that road conditions sulting from careless or dangerous driving
are hazardous and extra care is required techniques. It can help maintain vehicle con-
while driving. trol during braking on slippery surfaces, but
Self-test feature remember that the stopping distance on slip-
pery surfaces will be longer than on normal
The anti-lock brake system consists of surfaces even with the anti-lock brake
electronic sensors, electric pumps, and
hydraulic solenoids controlled by a com-
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
When accelerating or driving on a slippery The VDC system uses an Active Brake Lim-
surface, the tires may spin or slide. With ited Slip (ABLS) system to improve vehicle WARNING
the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) traction. The ABLS system works when
system, sensors detect these movements one of the driving wheels is spinning on a O The VDC system is designed to help im-
and control the braking and engine slippery surface. The ABLS system brakes prove driving stability but does not pre-
output to help improve vehicle stability. the spinning wheel which distributes the
vent accidents due to abrupt steering op-
driving power to the other driving wheel.
O When the VDC system is operating, eration at high speeds or due to careless
If the vehicle is operated with the VDC
the “SLIP” indicator in the instrument or dangerous driving. Reduce vehicle
system turned off, all VDC system func-
panel blinks. speed and be especially careful when
tions and TCS functions will be turned off.
O When only the Traction Control System The ABLS system and ABS will still op- driving and cornering on slippery sur-
(TCS) portion of the VDC system is operate with the VDC system off. When the faces and always drive carefully.
erating, the “SLIP” indicator in the in- ABLS system is activated, the “SLIP” indi-
O If engine related parts such as muffler
strument panel blinks. cator light will blink and you may hear a
clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the are not standard equipment or are ex-
O If the “SLIP” indicator blinks, the road brake pedal. This is normal and is not an tremely deteriorated, the “VDC OFF” in-
conditions are slippery. Be sure to ad- indication of a malfunction. dicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indi-
just your speed and driving to these cator lights may illuminate.
While the VDC system is operating, you
conditions. Be sure to drive carefully.
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and O Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
See “Slip indicator light”, and “Ve-
hear a noise or feel a vibration from under If suspension parts such as shock ab-
hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indica- the hood. This is normal and indicates that
tor light” in the “2. Instruments and sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars
the VDC system is working properly. and bushings are not INFINITI-approved
controls” section.
The VDC system computer has a built in or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC
O Indicator light diagnostic feature that tests the system system may not operate properly. This
If a malfunction occurs in the system, each time you start the engine and move could adversely affect vehicle handling
the “SLIP” and “VDC OFF” indicator the vehicle forward or backward. When performance, and the “VDC OFF” indi-
lights illuminate in the instrument the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk cator or “SLIP” indicator or both indi
panel. As long as these indicators are noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake cator lights may illuminate.
illuminated, the VDC system function pedal. This is normal and is not an indica-
is canceled. tion of a malfunction.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
REAR ACTIVE STEER (RAS) SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
The Rear Active Steer (RAS) system is an
O If brake related parts such as brake O The VDC system is not a substitute for electronically controlled four-wheel
pads, rotors and calipers are not stan- winter tires or tire chains on a snow cov- steering system.
dard equipment or are extremely dete- ered road. The angle of the rear wheels are adjusted
riorated, the “VDC OFF” indicator or by the RAS system, depending on the ve-
“SLIP” indicator or both indicator lights hicle speed and steering angle. The rear
may illuminate. wheels are designed to turn momentarily
in the opposite direction and then change
O When driving on extremely inclined sur-
to the same direction as the front wheels.
faces such as higher banked corners, the
Vehicle Dynamic Control system may not At low speeds, the rear wheels will not
operate properly and the “VDC OFF” indi- turn and the system functions as a two-
cator or “SLIP” indicator or both indi- wheel steering system.
cator lights may illuminate. Do not drive If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
on these types of roads. RAS function will stop but the ordinary
two-wheel steering system will operate
O When driving on an unstable surface normally. The “RAS” warning light will il-
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or luminate.
ramp, the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP”
indicator or both indicator lights may il- If the light illuminates while you are driv-
luminate. This is not a malfunction. Re- ing, contact an INFINITI dealer for repair.
start the engine after driving onto a
stable surface.
O If wheels or tires other than those rec-
ommended are used, the VDC system
may not operate properly and the “VDC
OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or
both indicator lights may illuminate.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

WARNING To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
tion for changing engine coolant.
de-icer or glycerin to it through the key TIRE EQUIPMENT
The RAS system, although a sophisticated hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the
device, cannot prevent accidents resulting key before inserting it into the key hole. 1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to
from careless or dangerous driving tech- provide superior performance on dry
niques. Ultimately the responsibility for ANTI-FREEZE pavement. However, the performance
safety of self and others rests in the hands of In the winter when it is anticipated that the of these tires will be substantially re-
the driver. Therefore only through attentive temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), duced in snowy and icy conditions. If
and careful driving methods can the RAS check antifreeze to assure proper winter you operate your vehicle on snowy or
protection. For additional information, see icy roads, INFINITI recommends the
system be fully appreciated and safety as-
“Engine cooling system” in the “8. Mainte- use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON
sured.
nance and do-it-yourself” section. tires on all four wheels. Please consult
an INFINITI dealer for the tire type,
BATTERY size, speed rating and availability in-
If the battery is not fully charged during formation.
extremely cold weather conditions, the 2. For additional traction on icy roads,
battery fluid may freeze and damage the studded tires may be used. However,
battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, some provinces and states prohibit
the battery should be checked regularly. their use. Check local, state and pro-
For additional information, see “Battery” vincial laws before installing studded
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” tires.
section.
Skid and traction capabilities of
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER studded snow tires, on wet or dry sur-
faces, may be poorer than that of non-
If the vehicle is to be left outside without studded snow tires.
antifreeze, drain the cooling system by
opening the drain plug located under the 3. Tire chains may be used if desired.
radiator. Refill before operating the ve- Make sure they are of proper size for
hicle. See “Engine cooling system” in the the tires on your vehicle and are in-
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
stalled according to the chain manu- O Never install the tire chains on TEMPO- O a shovel to dig the vehicle out of
facturer’s suggestions. However, some RARY USE ONLY spare tires. snow-drifts.
provinces and states prohibit their
use. Check local state and provincial O Do not use the tire chains on dry roads. O extra window washer fluid to refill the
laws before installing tire chains. Use reservoir tank.
O The tire chains must be installed only
only SAE Class S chains. Class “S” on the rear wheels and not on the front DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
chains are used on vehicles with re- wheels.
stricted tire to vehicle clearance. Ve-
hicles that can use Class “S” chains Do not drive with tire chains on paved WARNING
are designed to meet the SAE stan- roads which are clear of snow. Driving
dard minimum clearances between the with chains in such conditions can O Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
tire and the closest vehicle suspen- cause damage to the various mecha- very cold snow or ice can be slick and
sion or body component required to nisms of the vehicle due to some over- very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
accommodate the use of a winter trac- stress. have much less traction or “grip” under
tion device (tire chains or cables). The
minimum clearances are determined 4. For all-wheel drive (AWD): these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
using the factory equipped tire size. If you install snow tires, they must wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.
Other types may damage your vehicle. also be the same size, brand, con-
O Whatever the condition, drive with cau-
Use chain tensioners when recom- struction and tread pattern on all four
tion. Accelerate and slow down with
mended by the tire chain manufac- wheels.
turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end care. If accelerating or downshifting too
links of the tire chain must be secured SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT fast, the drive wheels will lose even
or removed to prevent the possibility more traction.
It is recommended that the following items
of damage to the fenders or under- be carried in the vehicle during winter: O Allow more stopping distance under
body. If possible, avoid fully loading
O a scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re- these conditions. Braking should be
your vehicle when using tire chains. In
addition, drive at a reduced speed. move ice and snow from the windows started sooner than on dry pavement.
Otherwise, your vehicle may be dam- and wiper blades.
aged and/or vehicle handling and per-
formance may be adversely affected. O a sturdy, flat board to be placed under
the jack to give it firm support.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O Allow greater following distances on WARNING
slippery roads.
O Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). Do not use your heater with an ungrounded
These may appear on an otherwise clear electrical system or tow-pronged (cheater)
road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is adapters. You can be injured by an electrical
seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try shock if you use an ungrounded connection.
not to brake while on the ice, and avoid
any sudden steering maneuvers.
O Do not use cruise control on slippery
roads.
O Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases
under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of
the exhaust pipe and from around your
vehicle.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)
An engine block heater to assist extreme
cold temperature starting is available
through an INFINITI dealer.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
6 In case of emergency
Roadside assistance program ........................... 6-2 If your vehicle overheats ................................. 6-11
Flat tire ............................................................ 6-2 Towing your vehicle ........................................ 6-12
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) .... 6-2 Towing recommended by INFINITI .............. 6-12
Changing a flat tire ..................................... 6-2 Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck
Jump starting ................................................... 6-8 vehicle) ...................................................... 6-15
Push starting .................................................. 6-10
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM FLAT TIRE
Every new INFINITI comes with a 4 year, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

unlimited mileage Roadside Assistance damage could occur and may lead to an
SYSTEM (TPMS)
plan. In the event of a roadside accident and could result in serious per-
emergency, Roadside Assistance Service This vehicle is equipped with the tire pres- sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for all
is available to you. Please refer to your sure monitoring system (TPMS). It monitors four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
Warranty Booklet (U.S.) or Warranty & tire pressure of all tires except the spare. recommended COLD tire pressure shown
Roadside assistance information booklet When the low tire pressure warning light is on the Tire and Loading Information label
(Canada) for details. Both the Warranty lit, or flashing continuously one or more of to turn the low tire pressure warning light
Booklet and Roadside Assistance Calling your tires is significantly under-inflated. If
Card in your Owner’s Literature Portfolio OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a
the vehicle is being driven with low tire
provide the Toll-Free Number to call for spare tire as soon as possible.
pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn
assistance. Roadside Assistance is you of it by the low tire pressure warning O When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is
provided 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, light. This system will activate only when replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-
for 4 years from the date sold to give the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16
emergency roadside help, in the event of cated, the TPMS will not function and the
MPH (25 km/h). For more details, refer to
mechanical or nonmechanical trouble(s) low tire pressure warning light will flash.
“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-
such as flat tires, out-of-gas, dead battery, minders” in the “2. Instruments and con- Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as
lost keys, mechanical breakdown, trols” section and “Tire pressure moni- possible for tire replacement and/or
accident, etc. toring system (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting system resetting.
and driving” section. O Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
WARNING proper operation of the TPMS.
O If the low tire pressure warning light illu- O Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire
minates while driving, avoid sudden sealant into the tires, as this may cause a
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to
a safe location and stop the vehicle as CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
soon as possible. Serious vehicle If you have a flat tire, follow the instruc-
tions below.
6-2 In case of emergency
w 06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X
Stopping the vehicle
O Never change tires when the vehicle is
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
away from traffic. hazardous.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. O Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
3. Park on a level surface and apply the close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-
parking brake. Shift the manual trans- sional road assistance.
mission into the R (Reverse) position
(automatic transmission into the P
(Park) position).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic,
and to signal professional road assis- MCE0001A
tance personnel that you need assis-
tance. Blocking wheels
6. Have all passengers get out of the ve- Place suitable blocks q1 at both the front
hicle and stand in a safe place, away and back of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the flat tire to prevent the vehicle
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.
from moving when it is jacked up.
WARNING WARNING
O Make sure the parking brake is securely Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
applied and the manual transmission is may move and result in personal injury.
shifted into R (Reverse), or the automatic
transmission into P (Park).
In case of emergency 6-3
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SCE0382B SCE0563
Sedan — Type A Sedan — Type B
Getting the spare tire and tools
Remove jacking tools 1 and spare tire 2
from the storage area located inside the
trunk as illustrated.
If spacers are equipped, remove them be-
fore removing the spare tire.
SCE0383B
Sedan
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SCE0424B CE1089-A
Coupe Jack-up point
Jacking up the vehicle and
removing the damaged tire
Carefully read the caution label attached
to the jack body and the following instruc-
tions.
1. Place the jack directly under the
jack-up point as illustrated above so
that top of the jack contacts the ve-
hicle at the jack-up point. Align the
jack head between the two notches in
the front or the rear as shown. Also fit
the groove of the jack head between
the notches as shown.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O Never use any other part of the vehicle
for jack support.
O Never jack up the vehicle more than nec-
essary.
O Never use blocks on or under the jack.
O Do not start or run the engine while ve-
hicle is on the jack. This is especially
true for vehicles with limited slip differ-
entials.
O Do not allow passengers to stay in the
SCE0504 vehicle while it is on the jack.
The jack should be used on level firm

ground. WARNING
2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two
turns by turning counterclockwise with O Never get under the vehicle while it is
the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove supported only by the jack. If it is neces-
the wheel nuts until the tire is off the sary to work under the vehicle, support it
ground. with safety stands.
3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire
O Use only the jack provided with your ve-
clears the ground. To lift the vehicle,
securely hold the jack lever and rod hicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
with both hands as shown above. Re- jack provided with your vehicle on other
move the wheel nuts, and then re- vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
move the tire. only your vehicle during a tire change.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
aligned with the pin on the brake As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts
rotor. to the specified torque with a torque
wrench.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly until Wheel nut tightening torque:
they are tight.
80 ft-lb (108 Nzm)
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
touches the ground. Then, with the
specification at all times. It is recom-
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
nuts securely in the sequence illus-
specification at each lubrication interval.
trated (q1 , q
2 , q
3 , q
4 , q
5 ). Lower the
vehicle completely. Adjust the tire pressure to the COLD pres-
sure.
WARNING COLD pressure:
SCE0039
After the vehicle has been parked for three
Installing the spare tire O Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tight-
hours or more or driven less than 1 mile
ened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
The spare tire is designed emergency use. become loose or come off. This could
See specific instructions under the cause an accident. COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “8. and Loading Information label affixed to
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section. O Do not use oil or grease on the wheel the driver side center pillar.
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface to become loose.
between the wheel and hub.
O Retighten the wheel nuts after the ve-
2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten hicle has been driven for 600 miles
the wheel nuts finger tight.
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
(Coupe models) etc.).
When replacing a front tire, make sure
the hole in the spare tire wheel is
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster bat-

tery, the instructions and precautions
below must be followed.
WARNING
O If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also dam-
age your vehicle.
O Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
SCE0384B SCE0425A Keep all sparks and flames away from
Sedan Coupe the battery.
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking
equipment in the vehicle. dangerous projectiles in an accident or O Do not allow battery fluid to come into
sudden stop. contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
6. Place the spare tire cover and the painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corro-
trunk floor carpeting over the dam- O The T-type spare tire and small size
spare tire are designed for emergency sive sulfuric acid solution which can
aged tire. cause severe burns. If the fluid should
use. See “Wheels and tires” in the “8.
7. Close the trunk. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec- come into contact with anything, imme-
tion. diately flush the contacted area with wa-
WARNING If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail- ter.
able. Please see your Warranty Information O Keep battery out of the reach of children.
O Always make sure that the spare tire and Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card
jacking equipment are properly secured for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or War-
ranty Information Booklet (Canada).
after use. Such items can become
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O The booster battery must be rated at 12
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery
can damage your vehicle.
O Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
O Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause se-
rious injury. SCE0539A
2. Apply parking brake. Move the shift

If needed Roadside Assistance is available. WARNING lever to the N (Neutral) position (On
Please see your Warranty Information automatic transmission models, move
Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card the selector lever to the P (Park) posi-
for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or War- Always follow the instructions below. Failure
tion). Switch off all unnecessary elec-
ranty Information Booklet (Canada). to do so could result in damage to the charg- trical systems (light, heater, air condi-
ing system and cause personal injury. tioner, etc.).
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
1. If the booster battery is in another ve- equipped). Cover the battery with an
hicle q B , position the two vehicles q
A old cloth to reduce explosion hazard.
and q B to bring their batteries into
close proximity to each other. 4. Connect jumper cables in the se-
quence as illustrated.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
PUSH STARTING
7. After starting your engine, carefully Do not attempt to start the engine by
CAUTION disconnect the negative cable and pushing.
then the positive cable.
O Always connect positive (+) to positive 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). CAUTION
(+) and negative (−) to body ground, not Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to
to the battery. cover the vent holes as it may be con- Automatic transmission models cannot be
taminated with corrosive acid. push started. Attempting to do so may cause
O Make sure jumper cables do not touch
transmission damage.
moving parts in the engine compartment
and that the cable clamps do not contact
any other metal. If needed Roadside Assistance is avail-
able. Please see your Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.
5. Start the engine of the other vehicle Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)
qB and let it run for a few minutes. or Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).
6. Keep the engine speed of the other ve-
hicle q
B at about 2,000 rpm, and start
your engine in the normal manner.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not
start right away, turn the key off and wait 3
to 4 seconds before trying again.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all

WARNING the windows, and move the tempera- WARNING
ture control to maximum hot and the
O Do not continue to drive if your vehicle fan control to high speed. O Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
overheats. Doing so could cause engine 3. If engine overheating is caused by jewelry or clothing to come into contact
damage or a vehicle fire. climbing a long hill on a hot day, run with, or to get caught in, the engine
the engine at a fast idle (approximately belts or the engine cooling fan.
O To avoid the danger of being scalded,
1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge
never remove the radiator cap while the O The engine cooling fan can start at any
indication returns to normal.
engine is still hot. When the radiator cap time when the coolant temperature is
is removed, pressurized hot water will 4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen high.
spurt out, possibly causing serious infor steam or coolant escaping from the
jury. radiator before opening the hood. (If
steam or coolant is escaping, turn off 7. After the engine cools down, check
O Do not open the hood if steam is coming the engine.) Do not open the hood fur- the coolant level in the reservoir tank
out. ther until no steam or coolant can be with the engine running. Add coolant
seen. to the reservoir tank if necessary.
Have your vehicle repaired at an
5. Open the engine hood. INFINITI dealer.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated
by an extremely high temperature gauge If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-
reading), or if you feel a lack of engine WARNING able. Please see your Warranty Information
power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card
the following steps: If steam or water is coming from the engine, for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or War-
stand clear to prevent getting burned. ranty Information Booklet (Canada).
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road,
apply the parking brake and move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position 6. Visually check if the cooling fan is run-
(automatic transmission to the P ning. The radiator hoses and radiator
(Park) position). should not leak water. If coolant is
leaking or the cooling fan does not
Do not stop the engine.
run, stop the engine.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
When towing your vehicle, all State (Pro-

vincial in Canada) and local regulations powertrain are in working condition. If
for towing must be followed. Incorrect any unit is damaged, dollies must be
towing equipment could damage your ve- used.
hicle. Towing instructions are available
O Always attach safety chains before
from an INFINITI dealer. Local service op-
towing.
erators are generally familiar with the ap-
plicable laws and procedures for towing.
To assure proper towing and to prevent For information about towing your vehicle
accidental damage to your vehicle, behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to
INFINITI recommends having a service op- “Flat towing” in the “9. Technical and
erator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to consumer information” section of this
have the service operator carefully read manual.
the following precautions. If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-
able. Please see your Warranty Informa-
WARNING tion Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.
Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)
O Never ride in a vehicle that is being or Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).
towed.
O Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.
SCE0386
Two-wheel drive (2WD) models
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
CAUTION INFINITI
O When towing, make sure that the trans- Two-wheel drive (2WD) models
mission, axles, steering system and INFINITI recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (rear) wheels off
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
the ground or place the vehicle on a flat
bed truck as illustrated. ground or four wheels on the ground
(forward or backward) as this may cause
serious and expensive damage to the
transmission. If it is necessary to tow the
vehicle with the front wheels raised, al-
ways use towing dollies under the rear
wheels.
O When towing rear wheel drive models
with the front wheels on the ground or
on towing dollies:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position,
and secure the steering wheel in a
straight ahead position with a rope or
similar device. Never secure the steering
wheel by turning the ignition key to the
LOCK position. This may damage the
steering lock mechanism.
O If you have to tow manual transmission
models with the rear wheels on the
SCE0387A
ground or four wheels on the ground (if
Automatic transmission (AT) models
you do not use towing dollies):
CAUTION O Always release the parking brake.
O Move the transmission shift lever to
O Never tow automatic transmission
the N (Neutral) position.
models with the rear wheels on the
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O Observe the following restricted towing
speeds and distances for manual trans-
mission models only:
— Speed: Below 60 MPH (95 km/h)
— Distance: Less than 500 miles (800
km)
If the speed or distance must necessarily

be greater, remove the propeller shaft be-
fore towing to prevent damage to the
transmission.
SCE0488
All-wheel drive (AWD) models
All-wheel drive (AWD) models
INFINITI recommends that towing dollies
be used when towing your vehicle, or the
vehicle be placed on a flat bed truck as il-
lustrated.
CAUTION
Never tow AWD models with any of the
wheels on the ground as this may cause se-
rious and expensive damage to the power
train.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
WARNING O Pulling devices should be routed so they
do not touch any part of the suspension,
O Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. steering, brake or cooling systems.
O Do not spin your tires at high speed. This O Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas
could cause them to explode and result straps are not recommended for use in
in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle vehicle towing or recovery.
could also overheat and be damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow,
mud, etc., use the following procedure:
CAUTION 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system.
SCE0524 O Tow chains or cables must be attached 2. Make sure the area in front and be-
only to the vehicle recovery hooks or hind the vehicle is clear of obstruc-
VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a main structural members of the vehicle. tions.
stuck vehicle) Otherwise, the vehicle body will be dam-
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left
After removing the front license plate (or aged. to clear an area around the front tires.
the bumper cover), securely install the re-
covery hook q 1 . (Located with jacking
O Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free a 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
tools.) vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. backward.
Never tow a vehicle using the vehicle tie
Reinstall the license plate on the lower fit- O Shift back and forth between R (re-
downs or recovery hooks.
ting point. verse) and D (drive) (automatic trans-
O Always pull the cable straight out from mission models) or 1st (low) and R (re-
the front of the vehicle. Never pull the ve- verse) (manual transmission models).
hicle at an angle. O Apply the accelerator as little as pos-
sible to maintain the rocking motion.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R and D (automatic
transmission models) or 1st and R
(manual transmission models).
O Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55
km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a
few tries, contact a professional
towing service to remove the vehicle.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior .............................................. 7-2 Cleaning interior ............................................... 7-4

Washing ...................................................... 7-2 Floor mats ................................................... 7-4
Waxing ........................................................ 7-2 Seat belts.................................................... 7-5
Removing spots........................................... 7-3 Corrosion protection ......................................... 7-5
Underbody................................................... 7-3 Most common factors contributing to
Glass........................................................... 7-3 vehicle corrosion ......................................... 7-5
Aluminum alloy wheels................................ 7-3 Environmental factors influence the rate of
Chrome parts .............................................. 7-3 corrosion ..................................................... 7-5
Tire dressing .............................................. 7-3 To protect your vehicle from corrosion ........ 7-5
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of hicle thoroughly using a mild soap, spe- Spray water under the body and in the
your vehicle, it is important to care for it cial vehicle soap or general purpose dish- wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash
properly. washing liquid mixed with clean, luke- away road salt.
To protect the paint surfaces, please warm (never hot) water. Avoid leaving water spots on the paint
wash your vehicle as soon as you can. surface by using a damp chamois to dry
O After a rainfall to prevent possible
CAUTION the vehicle.
damage from acid rain. WAXING
O Do not use strong household soap,
O After driving in coastal areas to pre- strong chemical detergents, gasoline or Regular waxing protects the paint surface
vent possible damage from sea salt. and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
solvents.
O When foreign objects, such as soot, Polishing is recommended to remove
bird droppings, tree sap, metal par- O Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- built-up wax residue and to avoid a
ticles, or insects get on the paint sur- light or while the vehicle body is hot, as weathered appearance before re-applying
faces. the surface may become water-spotted. wax.
O When dust or mud builds up on the O Avoid using tight-napped or rough An INFINITI dealer can assist you in
paint surfaces. cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must choosing the proper product.
Whenever possible, store or park your ve- be taken when removing caked-on dirt or O Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
hicle inside garage or in covered area. other foreign substances so the paint washing. Follow the instructions sup-
surface is not scratched or damaged. plied with the wax.
When it is necessary to park outside, park
in a shady area or protect the vehicle with O Do not use a wax containing any abra-
a body cover. Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of sives, cutting compounds or cleaners
that may damage the vehicle finish.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface clean water.
when putting on or removing the body Machine compounding or aggressive pol-
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the
cover. ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-
doors, hatches and hood are particularly ish may dull the finish or leave swirl
WASHING vulnerable to the effects of road salt. marks.
Therefore, these areas must be regularly
Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes
sponge and plenty of water. Clean the ve- in the lower edge of the door are open.
7-2 Appearance and care
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
REMOVING SPOTS pound may come off the tire while driving
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
CAUTION and stain the vehicle paint.
insects, and tree sap as quickly as pos- If you choose to use a tire dressing, take
sible from the surface of the paint to When cleaning the inside of the windows, do the following precautions:
avoid lasting damage or staining. Special not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive O Use a water-based tire dressing. The
cleaning products are available at an cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant coating on the tire dissolves more
INFINITI dealer or any automotive acces- cleaners. They could damage the electrical easily with an oil-based tire dressing.
sory store. conductors, radio antenna elements or rear
O Apply a light coat of tire dressing to
UNDERBODY window defroster elements.
help prevent it from entering the tire
In areas where road salt is used in winter, tread/grooves (where it would be diffi-
the underbody must be cleaned regularly. ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS cult to remove).
This will prevent dirt and salt from O Wipe off excess tire dressing using a
building up and causing underbody and Wash regularly, especially during winter dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing
suspension corrosion. Before the winter months in areas where road salt is used. is completely removed from the tire
period and again in the spring, the under- Salt could discolor the wheel if not retread/grooves.
seal must be checked and, if necessary, moved.
re-treated. O Allow the tire dressing to dry as rec-
CHROME PARTS ommended by tire dressing manufac-
GLASS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a
turer.
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain
dust film from the glass surfaces. It is the finish.
normal for glass to become coated with a
film after the vehicle is parked in the hot TIRE DRESSING
sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will INFINITI does not recommend the use of
easily remove this film. tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a
coating to the tires to help reduce discol-
oration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is
applied to the tires, it may react with the
coating and form a compound. This com-
Appearance and care 7-3
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the

interior trim, plastic parts and seats using O Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. damaging to leather surfaces and should
Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a be removed promptly. Do not use saddle
clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning
solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-
bristled cloth. based cleaners as they may damage the
Regular care and cleaning is required in leather’s natural finish.
order to maintain the appearance of the O Never use fabric protectors unless rec-
leather. ommended by the manufacturer.
Before using any fabric protector, read O Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
the manufacturer’s recommendations. meter or gauge lens covers. It may
Some fabric protectors contain chemicals damage the lens cover. SAI0012A
that may stain or bleach the seat mate-
rial. Floor mat positioning aid
FLOOR MATS
Use a cloth dampened only with water, to (driver’s side only)
clean the meter and gauge lens. The use of genuine INFINITI floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and This model includes a front floor mat
make it easier to clean the interior. No bracket q A to act as a floor mat posi-
CAUTION matter what mats are used, be sure they tioning aid. INFINITI floor mats have been
are fitted for your vehicle and are properly specially designed for your vehicle model.
O Never use gasoline, thinner, or any simi- positioned in the footwell to prevent inter- The driver’s side floor mat has a grommet
lar material. ference with pedal operation. Mats should hole incorporated in it. Simply position
be maintained with regular cleaning and the mat by placing the floor mat bracket
replaced if they become excessively worn. through the floor mat grommet hole while
centering the mat in the floorpan contour.
Periodically check to make certain that
the mats are properly positioned.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
CORROSION PROTECTION
SEAT BELTS MOST COMMON FACTORS Temperature

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE A temperature increase will accelerate the
them with a sponge dampened in a mild CORROSION rate of corrosion to those parts which are
soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com- not well ventilated.
pletely before using them. See “Seat belt O The accumulation of moisture-
maintenance” in the “1. Safety — Seats, retaining dirt and debris in body panel Air pollution
seat belts and supplemental restraint sys- sections, cavities, and other areas.
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt
tem” section. O Damage to paint and other protective in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road
coatings caused by gravel and stone salt use will accelerate the corrosion pro-
WARNING chips or minor traffic accidents. cess. Road salt will also accelerate the
disintegration of paint surfaces.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION CORROSION
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
since these materials may severely weaken O Wash and wax your vehicle often to
Moisture keep it clean.
the seat belt webbing.
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on O Always check for minor damage to the
the vehicle body underside can accelerate paint and repair it as soon as pos-
corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry sible.
completely inside the vehicle, and should
O Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
be removed for drying to avoid floor panel
doors open to avoid water accumula-
corrosion.
tion.
Relative humidity O Check the underbody for accumulation
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash
high relative humidity, especially those with water as soon as possible.
areas where the temperatures stay above
freezing and where atmospheric pollution
exists and road salt is used.
Appearance and care 7-5
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
CAUTION
O NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris
from the passenger compartment by
washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt
with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
O Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing

are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
corrosion and deterioration of underbody
components such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor
pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, consult an INFINITI dealer.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirements ............................... 8-2 Air cleaner...................................................... 8-20

General maintenance........................................ 8-2 Windshield wiper blades ................................. 8-21
Explanation of general maintenance Cleaning .................................................... 8-21
items .......................................................... 8-3 Replacing .................................................. 8-22
Maintenance precautions.................................. 8-5 Parking brake and brake pedal....................... 8-23
Engine compartment check locations................ 8-7 Checking parking brake............................. 8-23
Engine cooling system ..................................... 8-8 Checking brake pedal................................ 8-23
Checking engine coolant level..................... 8-8 Brake booster ........................................... 8-24
Changing engine coolant............................. 8-9 Fuses.............................................................. 8-25
Engine oil ....................................................... 8-10 Engine compartment.................................. 8-25
Checking engine oil level........................... 8-10 Passenger compartment ............................ 8-27
Changing engine oil and filter ................... 8-11 Keyfob battery replacement............................ 8-28
Automatic transmission fluid........................... 8-13 Keyfob (except Intelligent Key) .................. 8-28
Power steering fluid ........................................ 8-13 Intelligent Key ........................................... 8-29
Brake and clutch fluid..................................... 8-14 Lights.............................................................. 8-31
Brake fluid................................................. 8-14 Headlights................................................. 8-33
Clutch fluid ............................................... 8-15 Exterior and interior lights......................... 8-33
Window washer fluid....................................... 8-15 Wheels and tires ............................................ 8-37
Battery............................................................ 8-16 Tire pressure ............................................. 8-37
Jump starting............................................. 8-18 Tire labeling .............................................. 8-41
Drive belts ...................................................... 8-19 Types of tires ............................................ 8-43
Spark plugs .................................................... 8-19 Tire chains ................................................ 8-44
Replacing spark plugs............................... 8-20 Changing wheels and tires ........................ 8-45
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Your new INFINITI has been designed to sential for proper vehicle operation. It is During the normal day-to-day operation of
have minimum maintenance requirements your responsibility to perform these main- the vehicle, general maintenance should
with longer service intervals to save you tenance procedures regularly as pre- be performed regularly as prescribed in
both time and money. However, some day- scribed. this section. If you detect any unusual
to-day and regular maintenance is essen- sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to
Performing general maintenance checks
tial to maintain your INFINITI’s fine me- check for the cause or have an INFINITI
requires minimal mechanical skill and
chanical condition, as well as its emission dealer perform it promptly. In addition,
only a few general automotive tools.
and engine performance. you should notify an INFINITI dealer if you
These checks or inspections can be done think the repairs are required.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make by you, a qualified technician, or, if you
sure that the specified maintenance as When performing any checks or mainte-
prefer, an INFINITI dealer.
well as the general maintenance are per- nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-
formed. Where to go for service: nance precautions” later in this section.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only If maintenance service is required or your
one who can ensure that your vehicle re- vehicle appears to malfunction, have the
ceives the proper maintenance care. You systems checked and serviced by an
are a vital link in the maintenance chain. INFINITI dealer.
Scheduled maintenance: INFINITI technicians are well-trained spe-

cialists and are kept up to date with the
For your convenience, both required and latest service information through tech-
optional scheduled maintenance items nical bulletins, service tips, and in-
are described and listed in your “INFINITI dealership information systems. They are
Service and Maintenance Guide”. You completely qualified to work on INFINITI
must refer to that guide to ensure that vehicles before work begins.
necessary maintenance is performed on
your INFINITI at regular intervals. You can be confident that an INFINITI
dealer’s service department performs the
General maintenance: best job to meet the maintenance
General maintenance includes those requirements on your vehicle — in a
items which should be checked during reliable and economic way.
normal day-to-day operation. They are es-
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL nuts are missing, and check for any loose Windshield: Clean the windshield on a
MAINTENANCE ITEMS wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary. regular basis. Check the windshield at
least every six months for cracks or other
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge
Additional information on the following damage. Have a damaged windshield re-
often and always prior to long distance
items with “*” is found later in this sec- paired by a qualified repair facility.
trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in
tion. all tires, including the spare, to the speci- Windshield wiper blades*: Check for
Outside the vehicle fied pressure. Check carefully for damage, cracks or wear if they do not wipe prop-
cuts or excessive wear. erly.
The maintenance items listed here should
be performed from time to time, unless Tire rotation*:
otherwise specified. Sedan: The tires should be rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km) to minimize tire
Doors and engine hood: Check that all wear variation.
doors and the engine hood operate prop-
erly. Also ensure that all latches lock se- Coupe: The tires cannot be rotated.
curely. Lubricate hinges and latches if Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the
necessary. Make sure that the secondary vehicle should pull to either side while
latch keeps the hood from opening when driving on a straight and level road, or if
the primary latch is released. you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear,
When driving in areas using road salt or there may be a need for wheel alignment.
other corrosive materials, check lubrica- If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
tion frequently. normal highway speeds, wheel balancing
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular may be needed.
basis. Make sure that the headlights, O For additional information regarding
stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
and other lights are all operating properly Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
and installed securely. Also check head- mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
light aim. formation Booklet.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts): When
checking the tires, make sure no wheel
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Inside the vehicle Seats: Check seat position controls such Under the hood and the vehicle
as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc.
The maintenance items listed here should to ensure they operate smoothly and that The maintenance items listed here should
be checked on a regular basis, such as all latches lock securely in every position. be checked periodically (For example,
when performing periodic maintenance, Check that the head restraints move up each time you check the engine oil or re-
cleaning the vehicle, etc. and down smoothly and that the locks (if fuel).
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for so equipped) hold securely in all latched
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each
smooth operation and make sure the positions.
cell. It should be between the MAX and
pedal does not catch or require uneven Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high tem-
effort. Keep the floor mat away from the belt system (For example, buckles, an- peratures or under severe conditions re-
pedal. chors, adjusters and retractors) operate quire frequent checks of the battery fluid
Automatic transmission P (Park) mecha- properly and smoothly, and are installed level.
nism: On a fairly steep hill check that your securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts,
fraying, wear or damage. Brake and clutch fluid level*: Make sure
vehicle is held securely with the selector
that the brake and clutch fluid levels are
lever in the P (Park) position without ap- Steering wheel: Check for changes in the between the MAX and MIN lines on the
plying any brakes. steering conditions, such as excessive reservoir.
Brake pedal*: Check the pedal for smooth free play, hard steering or strange noises.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
operation and make sure it has the proper Warning lights and chimes: Make sure level when the engine is cold.
distance under it when depressed fully. that all warning lights and chimes are op-
Check the brake booster function. Be sure erating properly. Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no
to keep the floor mat away from the belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
pedal. Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets prop- Engine oil level*: Check the level after
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull erly and in sufficient quantity when oper- parking the vehicle on a level location
the vehicle to one side when applied. ating the heater or air conditioner. and turning off the engine. (Wait at least
10 minutes for the oil to drain back into
Parking brake*: Check that the pedal/ Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the oil pan.)
lever has the proper travel and confirm the wipers and washer operate properly
that your vehicle is held securely on a and that the wipers do not streak. Exhaust system: Make sure there are no
fairly steep hill with only the parking loose supports, cracks or holes. If the
brake applied. sound of the exhaust seems unusual or
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
there is a smell of exhaust fumes, imme- the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and When performing any inspection or main-
diately locate the trouble and correct it. around the exhaust system. At the end of tenance work on your vehicle, always take
See “Precautions when starting and winter, the underbody should be thor- care to prevent serious accidental injury
driving” in the “5. Starting and driving” oughly flushed with plain water, being to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The
section for exhaust gas (Carbon mon- careful to clean those areas where mud following are general precautions which
oxide). and dirt may accumulate. For additional should be closely observed.
information, see “Cleaning exterior” in
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for the “7. Appearance and care” section.
fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after WARNING
the vehicle has been parked for a while. Windshield washer fluid*: Check that
Water dripping from the air conditioner there is adequate fluid in the tank.
O Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply
after use is normal. If you should notice the parking brake securely and block the
any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evi- wheels to prevent the vehicle from
dent, check for the cause and have it cor- moving. For a manual transmission,
rected immediately.
move the shift lever to N (Neutral) posi-
Power steering fluid level* and lines: tion. For an automatic transmission
Check the level when the fluid is cold and models, move the selector lever to P
the engine is turned off. Check the lines (Park).
for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
O Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
LOCK position when performing any
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,
leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. parts replacement or repairs.
Make sure the hoses have no cracks, de- O If you must work with the engine run-
formation, deterioration or loose connec- ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair
tions.
and tools away from moving fans, belts
Underbody: The underbody is frequently and any other moving parts.
exposed to corrosive substances such as
those used on icy roads or to control O It is advisable to secure or remove any
dust. It is very important to remove these loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
substances, otherwise rust will form on
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is also
such as rings, watches, etc. before work- CAUTION available. See “Owner’s Manual/Service
ing on your vehicle. Manual order information” in the “9.
Technical and consumer information” sec-
O Always wear eye protection whenever O Do not work under the hood while the en-
tion.
you work on your vehicle. gine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait
until it cools down. You should be aware that incomplete or
O If you must run the engine in an enclosed improper servicing may result in oper-
space such as a garage, be sure there is O Never connect or disconnect the battery ating difficulties or excessive emissions,
proper ventilation for exhaust gases to or any transistorized component while and could affect your warranty coverage.
escape. the ignition switch is in the ON position. If in doubt about any servicing, have it
done by an INFINITI dealer.
O Never get under the vehicle while it is O Never leave the engine or automatic
supported only by a jack. If it is neces- transmission related component har-
sary to work under the vehicle, support it ness connector disconnected while the
with safety stands. ignition switch is in the ON position.
O Keep smoking materials, flame and O Avoid contact with used engine oil and
sparks away from the fuel tank and bat- coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil,
tery. engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Al-
O On gasoline engine models with the Mul- ways conform to local regulations for
tiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, the disposal of vehicle fluid.
fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced
by an INFINITI dealer because the fuel
lines are under high pressure even when This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
the engine is off. section gives instructions regarding only
those items which are relatively easy for
an owner to perform.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
1. Fuse/fusible link holder
2. Battery
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Clutch fluid reservoir (MT models)
6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Engine coolant reservoir
8. Window washer fluid reservoir
9. Radiator filler cap
10. Drive belts
11. Engine oil dipstick
12. Air cleaner
SSI0160
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the

factory with a high-quality, year-round, CAUTION
anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-
freeze solution contains rust and corro-
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to
sion inhibitors, therefore additional
cooling system additives are not neces- use only a Genuine Nissan Long Life
sary. Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent with the
proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and
WARNING 50% demineralized water/distilled water.
The use of other types of engine coolant may
damage your engine cooling system.
O Never remove the radiator or coolant res-
ervoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait
until the engine and radiator cool down. Outside temperature Deminer-
Serious burns could be caused by high down to alized SDI1385B
pressure fluid escaping from the ra- Antifreeze water/
diator. See precautions in “If your ve- °C °F
distilled CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
hicle overheats” found in the “6. In case water
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
of emergency” section. −35 −30 50% 50% tank when the engine is cold. If the cool-
O The radiator is equipped with a pressure ant level is below the MIN level q 2 , open
type radiator cap. To prevent engine the cap and add coolant up to the MAX
level q1 . If the reservoir tank is empty,
damage, use only a genuine NISSAN ra-
check the coolant level in the radiator
diator cap. when the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-
cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radia-
tor with coolant up to the filler opening
and also add it to the reservoir tank up to
the MAX level q 1 .
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
If the cooling system frequently requires O Improper servicing can result in re-
coolant, have it checked by an INFINITI duced heater performance and engine
dealer. overheating.
WARNING
O To avoid being scalded, never change
the coolant when the engine is hot.
O Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escaping
from the radiator.
O Avoid direct skin contact with used cool-
ant. If skin contact is made, wash thor-
oughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
O Keep coolant out of reach of children and
pets.
1. Open radiator drain plug qA at the

bottom of radiator, and remove ra-
SDI0114B
diator filler cap q
B .
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT O Be careful not to allow coolant to con-

tact drive belts.
O Major cooling system repairs should be
performed by an INFINITI dealer. The O Waste coolant must be disposed of
service procedures can be found in the properly. Check your local regulations.
appropriate INFINITI Service Manual.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
ENGINE OIL
2. Close the radiator drain plug securely

after the coolant is drained.
3. Fill the radiator slowly with the proper
mixture of antifreeze solution and
demineralized water/distilled water.
Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX
level. Then install the radiator filler
cap.
4. Start the engine and warm it up until
it reaches normal operating tempera-
ture. Then race the engine 2 or 3 times
under no load. Watch the engine cool-
ant temperature gauge for signs of
overheating. SDI1386D SDI1781
5. Stop the engine. After it completely
cools down, refill the radiator up to
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 5. Remove the dipstick again and check
the oil level. It should be between the
the filler opening. Fill the reservoir 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and H and L marks q B . If the oil level is
tank up to the MAX level. Check the apply the parking brake. below the L mark q A , remove the oil
drain plug for any sign of leakage. filler cap and pour recommended oil
2. Run the engine until it reaches operat-
6. Check the coolant level again after ing temperature. through the opening. Do not overfill
driving the vehicle. qC .
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10
minutes for the oil to drain back into 6. Recheck oil level with dipstick.
the oil pan. It is normal to add some oil between oil
4. Remove the dipstick q A and wipe it maintenance intervals or during the break-
clean. Reinsert it all the way. in period, depending on the severity of op-
erating conditions.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
5. Remove the plastic engine undercover.
CAUTION a. Remove the small plastic clip at the
center point of the undercover.
Oil level should be checked regularly. Oper-
b. Then remove the other bolts that
ating the engine with an insufficient amount hold the undercover in place.
of oil can damage the engine, and such dam-
age is not covered by warranty.
CAUTION
CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER Make sure the correct lifting and support
Change the engine oil and filter according points are used to avoid vehicle damage.
to the maintenance intervals shown in the
INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide.
SDI1520B
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and Engine oil and filter
apply the parking brake. 1. Place a large drain pan under the
2. Run the engine until it reaches operat- drain plug.
ing temperature. 2. Remove the oil filler cap.
3. Turn the engine off and wait more 3. Remove the drain plug q A with a
than 10 minutes. wrench and completely drain the oil.
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a
suitable floor jack and safety jack CAUTION
stands.
O Place the safety jack stands under Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine
the vehicle jack-up points. oil is hot.
O A suitable adapter should be at-
tached to the jack stand saddle.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O Waste oil must be disposed of prop- 9. Refill engine with recommended oil 11. Turn the engine off and wait more
erly. and install the cap securely. than 10 minutes. Check the oil level
O Check your local regulations. with the dipstick. Add engine oil if
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter

CAUTION necessary.
wrench q B . Remove the oil filter by After the operation

turning it by hand. The dipstick must be inserted in place to pre-
1. Install the engine undercover into po-
vent oil spillage from the dipstick hole while
5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting sition as the following steps.
filling the engine with oil.
surface with a clean rag. a. Pull the center of the small plastic
Be sure to remove any old rubber clip out.
gasket remaining on the mounting sur- See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical b. Hold the engine undercover into
face of the engine. position.
and consumer information” section for
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with drain and refill capacity. The drain and c. Insert the clip through the under-
clean engine oil. refill capacity depends on the oil tem- cover into the hole in the frame,
7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a perature and drain time. Use these then push the center of the clip in
slight resistance is felt, then tighten specifications for reference only. Al- to lock the clip in place.
ways use the dipstick to determine the
additionally more than 2/3 turn. d. Install the other bolts that hold the
proper amount of oil in the engine.
Oil filter tightening torque: undercover in place. Be careful not
to strip the bolts or over-tighten
11 to 15 ft-lb CAUTION them.
(14.7 to 20.5 Nzm)
8. Clean and re-install the drain plug When filling oil, do not pull out the dipstick. 2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the
with a new washer. Securely tighten ground.
the drain plug with a wrench. 3. Dispose of waste oil and filter prop-
10. Start the engine and check for erly.
Drain plug tightening torque: leakage around the drain plug and
22 to 29 ft-lb the oil filter. Correct as required.
(29 to 39 Nzm)
Do not use excessive force.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID POWER STEERING FLUID
When checking or replacement is re-

WARNING quired, we recommend an INFINITI dealer
for servicing.
O Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer. CAUTION
O Try to avoid direct skin contact with used O Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF. Do
oil. If skin contact is made, wash thor- not mix with other fluids.
oughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible. O Using automatic transmission fluid
other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF
O Keep used engine oil out of reach of will cause deterioration in driveability
children. and automatic transmission durability,
and may damage the automatic trans- SDI1765A
mission, which is not covered by the
INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty. Check the fluid level in the reservoir.
The fluid level should be checked using
The specified automatic transmission the HOT range (q 1 : HOT MAX., q 2 : HOT
fluid is also described on caution labels MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176°F
located in the engine compartment. (50 to 80°C) or using the COLD range (q 3 :
COLD MAX., q 4 : COLD MIN.) at fluid tem-
peratures of 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C).
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID
For additional brake fluid specification in-

CAUTION formation, refer to “Capacities and recom-
mended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Tech-
nical and consumer information” section.
O Do not overfill.
O Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. WARNING
Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or contami-
nated fluid may damage the brake system.
Do not add synthetic brake fluid. The use of
improper fluids can damage the brake
system and affect the vehicle’s stopping
ability.
SDI1923
BRAKE FLUID
CAUTION
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur- the fluid is below the MIN line q 2 or the
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is brake warning light comes on, add Genu-
ine Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
spilled, immediately wash the surface with
or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX
water. line q1 . If fluid must be added frequently,
the system should be thoroughly checked
by an INFINITI dealer.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
WINDOW WASHER FLUID
WARNING
Use only new fluid from a sealed container.
Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may dam-
age the clutch system.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces.
This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled,
SDI1906A wash the surface with water. SDI1388B
CLUTCH FLUID Add fluid when the low washer fluid

warning light comes on. Pull up the cap
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If and add a washer solvent to the water for
the fluid level is below the MIN line q 2 , better cleaning. In the winter season, add
add Genuine Nissan Super Heavy Duty a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow
Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the manufacturer’s instructions for the
the MAX line q 1 . mixture ratio.
If fluid is added frequently, the system Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
should be thoroughly checked by an Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
INFINITI dealer. Antifreeze or equivalent.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
BATTERY
O Keep the battery surface clean and

WARNING Do not use the window washer reservoir dry. Any corrosion should be washed
tank to mix the washer fluid concen- off with a solution of baking soda and
Antifreeze is poisonous and should be trateand water. water.
stored carefully in marked containers out of O Make certain the terminal connections
the reach of children. are clean and securely tightened.
O If the vehicle is not to be used for 30
days or longer, disconnect the (−)
CAUTION negative battery terminal cable to pre-
vent discharging it.
Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant
Coupe
for window washer solution. This may result
in damage to the paint.
CAUTION
O Do not fill the window washer reservoir
tank with washer fluid concentrates at When the battery cable is removed from the
full strength. Some methyl alcohol battery terminal, do not close either of front
based washer fluid concentrates may doors. The automatic window adjusting func-
permanently stain the grille if spilled tion will not work, and the side roof panel
while filling the window washer reser- may be damaged.
voir tank.
O Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
To disconnect the negative (−) battery ter-
water to the manufacturer’s recom- minal, perform the procedure in the follow-
mended levels before pouring the fluid ing order. Otherwise, the window and the
into the window washer reservoir tank. side roof panel may contact and be dam-
aged.
1. Close the windows.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
2. Open the hood. Sedan and coupe
O Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-
3. Close and lock all the doors.
dren.
4. Disconnect the negative (−) battery ter-
WARNING
minal.
O Do not expose the battery to flames or
5. Securely close the hood. electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas, gener-
To connect the negative (−) battery ter- ated by battery fluid, is explosive. Do not
minal, perform the procedure in the follow- allow battery fluid to contact your skin,
ing order. Otherwise, the window and the eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After
side roof panel may contact and be dam- touching a battery or battery cap, do not
aged. touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash
1. Unlock and open the driver side door. your hands. If the acid contacts your
Do not close the door. eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush
2. Open the hood. with water for at least 15 minutes and
seek medical attention.
3. Connect the negative (−) battery ter-
minal. Then close the hood. O Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
4. Fully open the driver side door window.
cause a higher load on the battery which
5. Close the driver side door and the can generate heat, reduce battery life,
window. and in some cases lead to an explosion.
O When working on or near a battery, al-
ways wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
O Battery posts, terminals and related ac-
cessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Wash hands after handling.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump
starting” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section. If the engine does not start by
jump starting, the battery may have to be
replaced. Contact an INFINITI dealer.
DI0137MA SDI1480
Check the fluid level in each cell. It If the side of the battery is not visible,
should be between the UPPER LEVEL q 1 the electrolyte level can be checked
and LOWER LEVEL q2 lines. through each filler opening as illus-
trated.
If it is necessary to add fluid, add only
distilled water to bring the level to the in- 3. Tighten cell plugs q
A .
dicator in each filler opening. Do not over-
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or
fill.
under severe conditions require frequent
1. Remove the cell plugs q
A . checks of the battery fluid level.
2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER
LEVEL q
1 .
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
DRIVE BELTS SPARK PLUGS
WARNING WARNING
Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
position. The engine could rotate unexpect- off and that the parking brake is engaged se-
edly. curely.
1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of

unusual wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhe- CAUTION
sion or looseness. If the belt is in poor
condition or loose, have it replaced or Be sure to use the correct socket to remove
adjusted by an INFINITI dealer. the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can
SDI1389 2. Have the belts checked regularly for damage the spark plugs.
condition and tension in accordance
1. Power steering fluid pump with the maintenance schedule in the
INFINITI Service and Maintenance
2. Fan
Guide.
3. Alternator
4. Crankshaft pulley
5. Air conditioner compressor
D: Tension checking points
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
AIR CLEANER
Always replace with recommended If maintenance is required, see an INFINITI

platinum-tipped spark plugs. dealer for servicing.
The filter element should not be cleaned
and reused. Replace it according to the
maintenance intervals. See the INFINITI
Service and Maintenance Guide. When re-
placing the filter, wipe the inside of the
air cleaner housing and the cover with a
damp cloth.
WARNING
O Operating the engine with the air cleaner
SDI0145D removed can cause you or others to be
burned. The air cleaner not only cleans
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS the air, it stops the flame if the engine
If replacement is required, see an INFINITI backfires. If it is not there, and the en-
dealer for servicing. gine backfires, you could be burned. Do
not drive with the air cleaner removed,
Platinum-tipped spark plugs and be careful when working on the en-
It is not necessary to replace the gine with the air cleaner removed.
platinum-tipped q A spark plugs as fre-
quently as the conventional type spark O Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
plugs since they will last much longer. attempt to start the engine with the air
Follow the maintenance schedule in the cleaner removed. Doing so could result
INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide, in serious injury.
but do not reuse them by cleaning or re-
gapping.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
tergent. Then rinse the blade with clear

CAUTION water. If your windshield is still not clear
after cleaning the blades and using the
wiper, replace the blades.
O After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position.
Otherwise it may be damaged when the
engine hood is opened.
O Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass, otherwise the arms may be dam-
aged from wind pressure.
O Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair driver
vision.
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using
the windshield washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other ma-
terial may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form
when rinsing with clear water.
Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild de-
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SDI1649
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Pull the wiper arm.
2. Push and hold the release tab q A ,
then move the wiper blade down the
wiper arm to remove q
1 . SDI1730
3. Insert the new wiper blade to the
wiper arm until a click sounds. If necessary, clean the windshield washer
nozzle qA with a needle or small pin qB .
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL
SDI1391F SDI1447B DI1020MO
CHECKING PARKING BRAKE Lever type CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

Pedal type From the released position, pull the park- With the engine running, check the dis-
ing brake lever up slowly and firmly. If the tance q A between the upper surface of
From the released position, depress the number of clicks is out of the range q A , the pedal and the metal floor. If it is out
parking brake pedal slowly and firmly, see an INFINITI dealer. of the range shown below, see an INFINITI
and check the notches between the initial dealer.
and final position of the pedal qA . If it is Range q
A : 6 to 7 clicks under pulling force
out of the range, see an INFINITI dealer. of 44 lb (196 N) Distance q
A : Under depressing force of
110 lb (490 N)
Range q
A : 2 to 3 notches under a de-
pressing force of 44 lb (196 Automatic Manual
N) Transmission model Transmission model
3.74 in (95 mm) or more 3.54 in (90 mm) or more
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Self-adjusting brakes Proper brake inspection intervals should 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
be followed. For additional information, the engine. Keeping the pedal de-
Your vehicle is equipped with self- see the appropriate maintenance log pressed for about 30 seconds, the
adjusting brakes. shown in the INFINITI Service and Mainte- pedal height should not change.
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every nance Guide.
4. Run the engine for one minute without
time the brake pedal is applied. High performance sports brake pads oc- depressing the brake pedal, then turn
casionally make squeaks, squeals or it off. Depress the brake pedal several
WARNING other braking noises because of their very times. The pedal travel distance will
high friction coefficient. decrease gradually with each depres-
sion as the vacuum is released from
See an INFINITI dealer for a brake system These occasional brake noises are
the booster.
check if the brake pedal height does not re- normal, but if they continue, see an
turn to normal. INFINITI dealer. If the brakes do not operate properly, see
an INFINITI dealer.
BRAKE BOOSTER
Brake pad wear indicators Check the brake booster function as fol-
lows:
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have
audible wear indicators. When a brake pad 1. With the engine off, press and release
requires replacement, it will make a high the brake pedal several times. When
pitched scraping or screeching sound when brake pedal movement (distance of
the vehicle is in motion whether or not the travel) remains the same from one
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes pedal application to the next, continue
checked as soon as possible if the wear in- on to the next step.
dicator sound is heard. 2. While depressing the brake pedal,
Under some driving or climate conditions, start the engine. The pedal height
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other should drop a little.
noise may be heard. Occasional brake
noise during light to moderate stops is
normal and does not affect the function or
performance of the brake system.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
FUSES
SDI1751 SDI1752 SDI1392A
Two types of fuses are used. Type q A is If a type qA fuse is used to replace a type ENGINE COMPARTMENT
used in the fuse boxes in the engine com- qB fuse, the type q A fuse will not be level
partment. Type q B is used in the passen- with the fuse pocket as shown in the il-
ger compartment fuse box. lustration. This will not affect the perfor- CAUTION
mance of the fuse. Make sure the fuse is
Type q A fuses are provided as spare
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower am-
installed in the fuse box securely.
fuses. They are stored in the passenger
perage rating than that specified on the fuse
compartment fuse box. Type q B fuses cannot be installed in the
underhood fuse boxes. Only use type q A
box cover. This could damage the electrical
Type qA fuses can be installed in the en- system or cause a fire.
fuses in the underhood fuse boxes.
gine compartment and passenger com-
partment fuse boxes.
If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and head-
light switch are in the OFF position.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
2. Open the engine hood and remove the
cover on the battery and the
fuse/fusible link holder.
3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder
cover.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
The fuse puller is located in the pas-
senger compartment fuse box.
SDI1753
5. If the fuse is open qA , replace it with a

new fuse q B . Spare fuses are stored in
the passenger compartment fuse box.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the
electrical system checked and re-
paired by an INFINITI dealer.
Fusible links
ate and fuses are in good condition,
check the fusible links. If any of these
fusible links are melted, replace only with
genuine INFINITI parts.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SDI1962 SDI1754
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the

headlight switch are in the OFF posi-
CAUTION tion.
2. Open the fuse box lid q
1 .
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower am- 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
perage rating than that specified on the fuse q2 .
box cover. This could damage the electrical
system or cause a fire. 4. If the fuse is open q
A , replace it with a
new fuse q B . Spare fuses q 3 are
stored in the fuse box.
ate, check for an open fuse. 5. If a new fuse also opens, have the
electrical system checked and re-
paired by an INFINITI dealer.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT
2. Replace the battery with a new one. FCC Notice:

Recommended battery: CR2025 or
Changes or modifications not expressly
equivalent
approved by the party responsible for com-
Make sure that the ! side faces the pliance could void the user’s authority to
bottom case. operate the equipment.
3. Close the lid securely. This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
4. Push the keyfob button two or three
Operation is subject to the following two
times to check its operation.
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
See an INFINITI dealer if you need any as- harmful interference, and (2) this device
sistance for replacement. must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause un-
If the battery is removed for any reason desired operation of the device.
other than replacement, perform step 4
above.
O Be careful not to touch the circuit board
and the battery terminal.
O An improperly disposed battery can
harm the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
O The keyfob is water-resistant; how-
SDI1731 ever, if it gets wet, immediately wipe it
completely dry.
KEYFOB (except Intelligent Key)
O When changing batteries, do not let
Replace the battery as follows: dust or oil get on the keyfob.
1. Open the lid using a suitable tool q
A .
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
4. Align the tips of the upper and lower
parts, and then push them together
until it is securely closed.
5. Push the buttons two or three times to
check its operation.
See an INFINITI dealer if you need any as-
sistance for replacement.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5
above.
O Be careful not to touch the circuit board
and the battery terminal.
SDI1786 SDI1787
O An improperly disposed battery can
INTELLIGENT KEY 2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver q A harm the environment. Always confirm
wrapped with a cloth into the slit qB local regulations for battery disposal.
CAUTION of the corner and twist it to separate O When changing batteries, do not let
the upper part from the lower part. dust or oil get on the Intelligent Key.
Be careful not to allow children to swallow 3. Replace the battery with a new one. FCC Notice:
the battery and removed parts. O Do not touch the internal circuit and This equipment has been tested and found
electric terminals as it could cause a to comply with the limits for a Class B digi-
Replace the battery as follows: malfunction. tal device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide
1. Release the lock knob at the back of Recommended battery: CR2025 or
reasonable protection against harmful in-
the Intelligent Key and remove the me- equivalent
terference in a residential installation.
chanical key. Make sure that the ! side faces the This equipment generates, uses and can
bottom of the case. The ! mark is radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
stamped on the bottom of the case. installed and used in accordance with the
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
instructions, may cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equip-
ment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
O Reorient or relocate the receiving an-
tenna
O Increase the separation between the
equipment and the receiver
O Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
O Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
LIGHTS
Sedan
1. Front turn signal light
2. Front fog light/Park light/
Headlight (high-beam)
3. Headlight (low-beam)
4. Map light
5. Rear personal light
6. Front side marker light
7. Step light
8. Trunk light
9. High-mounted stop light
(if so equipped)
10. License plate light
11. Back-up light
12. Rear combination light
(Turn signal, Stop/Tail, Side marker)
SDI1952
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Coupe
1. Front turn signal light
2. Front fog light/Park light
3. Headlight (low-beam/high-beam)
4. Map light
5. Front side marker light
6. Step light
7. High-mounted stop light
(if so equipped)
8. Trunk light
9. License plate light
10. Rear combination light
(Turn signal, Stop/Tail, Back-up, Side
marker)
SDI1953
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
HEADLIGHTS EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Replacing the xenon headlight Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.
bulb Front turn signal light* 21 T20
Xenon headlight bulb: Front park light* 5 T10
WARNING Front side marker light 3.8 T10
Sedan: 60/55 Sedan: H4

Front fog light
Coupe: 55 Coupe: H1
HIGH VOLTAGE
Rear combination light
When xenon headlights are on, they produce Turn signal 21 T20
a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock,
Stop/Tail* (LED) —
never attempt to modify or disassemble. Al-
ways have your xenon headlights replaced Side marker light* Sedan: (LED)/Coupe: 3.8 Sedan: —/Coupe: T10
at an INFINITI dealer. For additional informa-
Back-up light 18 T16
tion, see “Headlight and turn signal switch”
in the “2. Instruments and controls” section. License plate light 5 T10
High-mounted stop light* (LED) —

If replacement is required, see an INFINITI Map light 8 —
dealer.
Rear personal light (Sedan) 8 —
Step light 5 —
Trunk light 3.4 158
Vanity mirror light 1.32 —

*: See an INFINITI dealer for replacement.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
MDI0006
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or
D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the
lens and/or cover. SDI1733 SDI1570A
Front side marker light Sedan — Rear turn signal light
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
To replace a back-up light
1. Remove all the clips qA , the handle q
B
and inside release handle q C to re-
move the trunk lid finisher.
2. Remove the connector from bulb
socket q
1 .
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

q2 and remove the bulb.
SDI1510A
Sedan — Back-up light
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SDI1400A
Step light
SDI1734 SDI1399D SDI1258B

Map light Sedan — Rear personal light Trunk light
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
WHEELS AND TIRES
TIRE PRESSURE Tire inflation pressure

Tire pressure monitoring system Check the tire pressure of the tires (in-
(TPMS) cluding the spare) often and always
prior to long distance trips. The recom-
This vehicle is equipped with the tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS). It
mended tire pressure specifications are
monitors tire pressure of all tires except shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
the spare. When the low tire pressure label or the Tire and Loading Informa-
warning light is lit, one or more of your tion label under the “COLD TIRE PRES-
tires is significantly under-inflated. SURE” heading. The Tire and Loading
The TPMS will activate only when the ve- Information label is affixed to the driver
hicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH side center pillar. Tire pressures should
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de- be checked regularly because:
SDI1779A tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
Vanity mirror light example a flat tire while driving). O Most tires naturally lose air over
For more details, refer to “Low tire pres- time.
sure warning light” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section, “Tire pressure O Tires can lose air suddenly when
monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5. driven over potholes or other objects
Starting and driving” section, and “Flat or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
tire” in the “6. In case of emergency” sec- parking.
tion.
The tire pressures should be check
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at mod-
SDI1401B
erate speeds.
License plate light
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
Incorrect tire pressure, including under
inflation, may adversely affect tire life capacity may also result in a mal-
and vehicle handling. function of other vehicle compo-
nents.
WARNING O Before taking a long trip, or when-
ever you heavily load your vehicle,
O Improperly inflated tires can fail use a tire pressure gauge to en-
suddenly and cause an accident. sure that the tire pressures are at
the specified level.
O The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the O Do not drive your vehicle over 85
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. The MPH (137 km/h) unless it is
vehicle weight capacity is indi- equipped with high speed rated
cated on the Tire and Loading In- tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH
formation label. Do not load your (137 km/h) may result in tire mal-
vehicle beyond this capacity. function, loss of control and pos-
Overloading your vehicle may re- sible injury.
sult in reduced tire life, unsafe op- O For additional information re-
erating conditions due to prema- garding tires, refer to “Important
ture tire failure, or unfavorable Tire Safety Information” (US) or
handling characteristics and could “Tire Safety Information” (Canada)
also lead to a serious accident. in the Warranty Information
Loading beyond the specified Booklet.
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
q
3 Original size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
q
4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires
to this pressure when the tires are
cold. Tires are considered COLD
after the vehicle has been parked for
3 or more hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
The recommended cold tire inflation
is set by the manufacturer to pro-
vide the best balance of tire wear,
vehicle handling, driveability, tire
noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s
GVWR.
q
5 Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling”
later in this section.
q
6 Spare tire size or compact spare tire
SDI1948 size (if so equipped)
Tire and loading information label q
2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-
mation in the “Technical and con-
q
1 Seating capacity: The maximum
sumer information” section.
number of occupants that can be
seated in the vehicle.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
3. Remove the gauge.
Cold Tire
Sedan
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge model Size Inflation
stem and compare it to the specifi- Pressure
cation shown on the Tire and P215/55R17 93V 210 kPa
Loading Information label. Front (30 psi)
Original 235/45R18 94W 230 kPa
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too Tire (33 psi)
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of P215/55R17 93V 210 kPa
Rear (30 psi)
the gauge stem to release pressure. Original 235/45R18 94W
Recheck the pressure and add or re- Tire 230 kPa
(33 psi)
lease air as needed.
SDI1949 T145/80D17 420 kPa
6. Install the valve stem cap.
Spare (60 psi)
Checking the tire pressure Tire P215/55R17 93V*1 210 kPa
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the including the spare. (Refer to the (30 psi)
tire. “Wheels and tires” section) *1 Option for USA, conventional for
Canada (for models with tire size
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely P215/55R17 93V)
onto the valve stem. Do not press
too hard or force the valve stem
sideways, or air will escape. If the
hissing sound of air escaping from
the tire is heard while checking the
pressure, reposition the gauge to
eliminate this leakage.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Cold Tire
Coupe
model Size Inflation
Pressure
P225/50R17 93V 210 kPa
(30 psi)
Front 225/45R18 91W 240 kPa
Original (35 psi)
Tire 225/40R19 89Y 240 kPa
(35 psi)
P235/50R17 95V 210 kPa
(30 psi)
Rear
Original 245/45R18 96W 240 kPa SDI1575 SDI1951
Tire (35 psi) Example Example
245/40R19 94Y 240 kPa TIRE LABELING q
1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
(35 psi)
Federal law requires tire manufacturers 1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-
Spare T145/80D17 420 kPa to place standardized information on signed for passenger vehicles. (Not
Tire (60 psi) the sidewall of all tires. This informa- all tires have this information).
tion identifies and describes the funda-
mental characteristics of the tire and 2. Three-digit number (215): This
also provides the tire identification number gives the width in millime-
number (TIN) for safety standard certifi- ters of the tire from sidewall edge to
cation. The TIN can be used to identify sidewall edge.
the tire in case of a recall. 3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
4. R: The “R” stands for radial. 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-
tional)
5. Two-digit number (15): This number
is the wheel or rim diameter in 5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-
inches. ture
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This 6. Four numbers represent the week
number is the tire’s load index. It is and year the tire was built. For ex-
a measurement of how much weight ample, the numbers 3103 mean the
each tire can support. You may not 31st week of 2003. If these numbers
find this information on all tires be- are missing, then look on the other
cause it is not required by law. sidewall of the tire.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not SDI1607 q
3 Tire ply composition and material
drive the vehicle faster than the tire Example The number of layers or plies of
speed rating. q
2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX manufacturers also must indicate
XXXX) the materials in the tire, which in-
clude steel, nylon, polyester, and
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-
others.
ment of Transportation”. The
symbol can be placed above, q
4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-
below or to the left or right of sure
the Tire Identification Number. This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s iden- the tire. Do not exceed the
tification mark maximum permissible inflation pres-
3. Two-digit code: Tire size sure.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
q
5 Maximum load rating turer, brand and/or model name
molding that is higher or deeper than specified by INFINITI could affect the
This number indicates the maximum
proper operation of the tire pressure
load in kilograms and pounds that the same molding on the other sidewall
monitoring system (TPMS).
can be carried by the tire. When re- of the tire, or (2) the outward facing
placing the tires on the vehicle, al- sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that O For additional information regarding
ways use a tire that has the same has a particular side that must always tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
face outward when mounted on a ve- formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
load rating as the factory installed
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tire. hicle.
tion Booklet.
q
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type” TYPES OF TIRES
Indicates whether the tire requires All season tires
an inner tube (“tube type”) or not WARNING INFINITI specifies All Season tires on some
(“tubeless”). models to provide good performance for
O When changing or replacing tires, be use all year, including snowy and icy road
q
7 The word “radial”
sure all four tires are of the same type conditions. All Season tires are identified
The word “radial” is shown if the (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire
tire has radial structure. sidewall. Snow tires have better snow trac-
construction. An INFINITI dealer may be tion than All Season tires and may be
able to help you with information about
q
8 Manufacturer or brand name more appropriate in some areas.
tire type, size, speed rating and avail-
Manufacturer or brand name is Summer tires
ability.
shown.
O Replacement tires may have a lower INFINITI specifies summer tires on some
Other tire-related terminology: speed rating than the factory equipped
models to provide superior performance
on dry roads. Summer tire performance is
In addition to the many terms that are tires, and may not match the potential substantially reduced in snow and ice.
defined throughout this section, In- maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed Summer tires do not have the tire traction
tended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the the maximum speed rating of the tire. rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
sidewall that contains a whitewall, O Replacing tires with those not originally If you plan to operate your vehicle in
bears white lettering or bears manufac- snowy or icy conditions, INFINITI recom-
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
mends the use of SNOW or ALL SEASON All-wheel drive (AWD) models with chains in such conditions can cause
tires on all four wheels. damage to the various mechanisms of the
vehicle due to some overstress.
Snow tires CAUTION
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary
TIRE CHAINS
to select tires equivalent in size and load O Always use tires of the same type, size, Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-
rating to the original equipment tires. If brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or cording to location. Check the local laws
you do not, it can adversely affect the radial), and tread pattern on all four before installing tire chains. When install-
safety and handling of your vehicle. wheels. Failure to do so may result in a ing tire chains, make sure they are the
proper size for the tires on your vehicle
Generally, snow tires will have lower circumference difference between tires
and are installed according to the chain
speed ratings than factory equipped tires on the front and rear axles which will manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
and may not match the potential cause excessive tire wear and may class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed damage the transmission, transfer case used on vehicles with restricted tire to ve-
the maximum speed rating of the tire. and differential gears. hicle clearance. Vehicles that can use
Class “S” chains are designed to meet
If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy O ONLY use spare tires specified for the the minimum clearances between the tire
conditions, INFINITI recommends the use AWD model. and the closest vehicle suspension or
of snow or all season tires on all four body component required to accommo-
wheels. date the use of a winter traction device
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom- (tire chains or cables). The minimum
For additional traction on icy roads, stud-
mended that all four tires be replaced clearances are determined using the fac-
ded tires may be used. However, some
provinces and states prohibit their use. with tires of the same size, brand, con- tory equipped tires. Other types may
Check local, state and provincial laws be- struction and tread pattern. The tire pres- damage your vehicle. Use chain ten-
fore installing studded tires. Skid and sure and wheel alignment should also be sioners when recommended by the tire
traction capabilities of studded snow checked and corrected as necessary. Con- chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit.
tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be tact an INFINITI dealer. Loose end links of the tire chain must be
poorer than that of non-studded snow Tire chains must be installed only on the secured or removed to prevent the possi-
tires. rear wheels and not on the front wheels. bility of whipping action damage to the
fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid
Do not drive with tire chains on paved fully loading your vehicle when using tire
roads which are clear of snow. Driving chains. In addition, drive at a reduced
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
damaged and/or vehicle handling and to specification at all times. It is recom-
performance may be adversely affected.
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
Tire chains must be installed only on the specification at each tire rotation in-
rear wheels and not on the front wheels. terval.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire. WARNING
Do not use the chains on dry roads. Driv-
ing with chains in such conditions can O After rotating the tires, check and
cause damage to the various mechanisms adjust the tire pressure.
of the vehicle due to some overstress. O Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for 600
DI0048-D miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a
Sedan flat tire, etc.).
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES O Do not include the T-type spare
Tire rotation (Sedan) tire or any other small size spare
INFINITI recommends rotating the tires tire in the tire rotation.
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). O For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
See “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
emergency” section for tire replacing
“Tire Safety Information” (Canada)
procedures.
in the Warranty Information
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel Booklet.
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench. Tire rotation (Coupe)
Wheel nut tightening torque: Tires cannot be rotated on this vehicle,
80 ft-lb (108 Nzm) as front tires are a different size from
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
rear tires and the direction of the wheel
rotation is fixed for each tire. O The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
A pin is on the front brake rotor to pre- wear indicators are visible, the
vent the rear wheels from being in- tire(s) should be replaced.
stalled in place of the front wheels. The O Tires degrade with age and use.
spare tire can be installed in place of Have tires, including the spare,
the front and rear wheels. When install- over 6 years old checked by a
ing the spare tire in the front wheel, the qualified technician because some
hole in the spare tire wheel must be tire damage may not be obvious.
aligned with the pin on the brake rotor. Replace the tires as necessary to
prevent tire failure and possible
WARNING personal injury.
MDI0004C O Improper service of the spare tire
O Retighten the wheel nuts when the 1. Wear indicator may result in serious personal in-
vehicle has been driven for 600 2. Location mark jury. If it is necessary to repair the
miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a spare tire, contact an INFINITI
flat tire, etc.). Tire wear and damage dealer.
O For additional information re- O For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important WARNING garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) O Tires should be periodically in- “Tire Safety Information” (Canada)
in the Warranty Information spected for wear, cracking, in the Warranty Information
Booklet. bulging or objects caught in the Booklet.
tread. If excessive wear, cracks,
bulging or deep cuts are found, the Replacing wheels and tires
tire(s) should be replaced. When replacing a tire, use the same size,
speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. See “Specifica-
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
tions” in the “9. Technical and consumer
information” section for recommended low tire pressure warning light will flash. difference between tires on the front and
types and sizes of tires and wheels. Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as rear axles which will cause excessive tire
possible for tire replacement and/or sys- wear and may damage the transmission,
WARNING tem resetting. transfer case and differential gears (AWD
O Replacing tires with those not originally models).
O The use of tires other than those recom- specified by INFINITI could affect the
mended or the mixed use of tires of dif- proper operation of the TPMS. Wheel balance
ferent brands, construction (bias, bias-
belted or radial), or tread patterns can ad- O Do not install a deformed wheel or tire Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle han-
versely affect the ride, braking, handling, even if it has been repaired. Such wheels dling and tire life. Even with regular use,
ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, or tires could have structural damage wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,
tire chain clearance, speedometer calibra- and could malfunction without warning. they should be balanced as required.
tion, headlight aim and bumper height. Wheel balance service should be per-
O The use of retread tires is not recom-
Some of these effects may lead to accidents formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
and could result in serious personal injury. mended.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
O If the wheels are changed for any reason, O For additional information regarding tires, could lead to transmission damage.
always replace with wheels which have refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
For additional information regarding tires,
the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada)
refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa-
different off-set could cause premature in the Warranty Information Booklet. tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”
tire wear, degrade vehicle handling char- (Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Informa-
acteristics and/or interference with the tion Booklet.
brake discs. Such interference can lead CAUTION
to decreased braking efficiency and/or Care of wheels
early brake pad wear.
Always use tires of the same type, size, O Wash the wheels when washing the
O When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or ra- vehicle to maintain their appearance.
is replaced, tire pressure will not be indi- dial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. O Clean the inner side of the wheels
cated, the TPMS will not function and the Failure to do so may result in a circumference when the wheel is changed or the un-
derside of the vehicle is washed.
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
O Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels. O Periodically check the T-type spare tire CAUTION
inflation pressure, and always keep it at
O Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). O Do not use tire chains on a T-type spare
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss
of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. O With the T-type spare tire installed, do tire. Tire chains will not fit properly on
not drive your vehicle at speeds faster the T-type spare tire and may cause
O INFINITI recommends that the road
than 50 MPH (80 km/h). damage to the vehicle.
wheels be waxed to protect against
road salt in areas where it is used O When driving on roads covered with O Because the T-type spare tire is smaller
during winter. snow or ice, the T-type spare tire should than the original tire, ground clearance
be used on the front wheel and the origi- is reduced. To avoid damage to the ve-
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
nal tire used on the rear wheels (drive hicle do not drive over obstacles. Also do
spare tire (T-type)) not drive the vehicle through an auto-
wheels). Use tire chains only on the rear
Observe the following precautions if the two original tires (Sedan). matic car wash since it may get caught.
T-type spare tire must be used, otherwise
your vehicle could be damaged or in- O Tire tread of the T-type spare tire will wear
volved in an accident. at a faster rate than the original tire. Re-
place the T-type spare tire as soon as the
CAUTION tread wear indicators appear.
O Do not use the T-type spare tire on other
O The T-type spare tire should be used only vehicles.
for an emergency. It should be replaced by
O Do not use more than one T-type spare
a standard tire at the first opportunity.
tire at the same time.
O Drive carefully while the T-type spare tire
O Do not tow a trailer while the T-type
is installed.
spare tire is installed.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking
while driving.
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
9 Technical and consumer information
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ... 9-2 Installing front license plate............................ 9-13
Fuel recommendation .................................. 9-3 Vehicle loading information ............................ 9-14
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ..... 9-5 Terms ........................................................ 9-14
Recommended SAE viscosity number .......... 9-6 Vehicle load capacity ................................. 9-15
Air conditioning system refrigerant and Loading tips............................................... 9-17
lubricant recommendations ......................... 9-7 Measurements of weights .......................... 9-17
Specifications................................................... 9-8 Towing a trailer............................................... 9-18
Engine......................................................... 9-8 Maximum load limits ................................. 9-18
Wheels and tires ......................................... 9-9 Towing load/specification chart ................. 9-19
Dimensions and weights ............................. 9-9
Towing safety ............................................ 9-19
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
Flat towing ................................................ 9-22
another country .............................................. 9-10
Uniform tire quality grading............................ 9-23
Vehicle identification ...................................... 9-10
Emission control system warranty .................. 9-24
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate ... 9-10
Vehicle identification number (Chassis Reporting safety defects (US only).................. 9-24
number)..................................................... 9-10 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)
Engine serial number ................................. 9-11 test (US only).................................................. 9-25
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..... 9-11 Event data recorders ...................................... 9-26
Emission control information label............. 9-12 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
Tire and loading information label ............. 9-12 information ................................................... 9-26
Air conditioner specification label .............. 9-13 In the event of a collision.......................... 9-27
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure in-
structed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate)
Recommended
US Imp specifications
Liter
measure measure
Fuel*1 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 76
Engine oil (Drain and refill)*8
With oil filter change 5 qt 4-1/8 qt 4.7 O API Certification Mark*2, *3
O API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving*2, *3
Without oil filter change 4-5/8 qt 3-7/8 qt 4.4 O ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III*2, *3
Cooling system
With reservoir 9-1/4 qt 7-5/8 qt 8.7
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent
Reservoir 7/8 qt 3/5 qt 0.8
Automatic transmission fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF*4
Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
Manual transmission gear oil — — — HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 or 75W-90
Differential gear oil — — — API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 80W-90*5
Transfer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or CANADA NISSAN Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid*6
Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper fluid level according to the in- Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*10
structions in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
Brake and clutch fluid section. Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*7 or equivalent DOT 3
Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*9
Air conditioning system lubricants — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent
Windshield washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent
*1: For additional information, see “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.
*2: For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” later in this section.
*3: For additional information, see “Recommended SAE viscosity number” later in this section.
*4: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not
covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.
*5: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures always above 32°F (0°C).
*6: DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact an INFINITI dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended
brand(s) of DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM automatic transmission fluid.
*7: Available in mainland US through an INFINITI dealer.
*8: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.
*9: For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” later in this section for air conditioner specification label.
*10: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.
9-2 Technical and consumer information
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
FUEL RECOMMENDATION O Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt able. Many of the automobile manufactur-
acceleration. ers developed this specification to im-
Sedan — Automatic transmission prove emission control system and ve-
models However, for maximum vehicle perfor- hicle performance. Ask your service
mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso- station manager if the gasoline meets the
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- line is recommended. WWFC specifications.
tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock In-
dex) number (Research octane number 91). Reformulated gasoline
CAUTION Some fuel suppliers are now producing
For improved vehicle performance,
INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded reformulated gasolines. These gasolines
O Using a fuel other than that specified are specially designed to reduce vehicle
premium gasoline with an octane rating of
could adversely affect the emission con- emissions. INFINITI supports efforts to-
at least 91 AKI number (Research octane
trol system, and may also affect the war- wards cleaner air and suggests that you
number 96).
ranty coverage. use reformulated gasoline when avail-
Sedan — Manual transmission able.
O Under no circumstances should a leaded
and Coupe models gasoline be used, because this will dam- Gasoline containing oxygenates
Use unleaded premium gasoline with an age the three-way catalyst. Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-
octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti- ing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE
O Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your
Knock Index) number (Research octane and methanol with or without advertising
number 96). vehicle is not designed to run on E-85
their presence. INFINITI does not recom-
fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel mend the use of fuels of which the oxy-
If premium gasoline is not available, un- system components and is not covered
leaded regular gasoline with an octane genate content and the fuel compatibility
by the INFINITI vehicle limited warranty. for your INFINITI cannot be readily deter-
rating of 87 AKI number (Research octane
number 91) may be temporarily used, but mined. If in doubt, ask your service sta-
only under the following precautions: tion manager.
Gasoline specifications If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,
O Have the fuel tank filled only partially
with unleaded regular gasoline, and INFINITI recommends using gasoline that please take the following precautions as
fill up with unleaded premium gaso- meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
line as soon as possible. (WWFC) specifications where it is avail-
Technical and consumer information 9-3
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
performance problems and/or fuel system Take care not to spill gasoline during refu- persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark
damage. eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-
cause paint damage. vere, this can lead to engine damage. If
O The fuel must be unleaded and have an you detect a persistent heavy spark knock
octane rating no lower than that recom- E-85 fuel even when using gasoline of the stated oc-
mended for unleaded gasoline. tane rating, or if you hear steady spark
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately
O If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a knock while holding a steady speed on
85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gaso-
methanol blend, is used, it should con- level roads, have your dealer correct the
line. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible condition. Failure to correct the condition
tain no more than 10% oxygenate. Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 fuel in
(MTBE may, however, be added up to is misuse of the vehicle, for which INFINITI
your vehicle. U.S. government regulations is not responsible.
15%.) require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to
O If a methanol blend is used, it should be identified by a small, square, orange Incorrect ignition timing will result in
contain no more than 5% methanol and black label with the common abbre- knocking, after-run or overheating. This in
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It viation or the appropriate percentage for turn may cause excessive fuel consump-
should also contain a suitable amount that region. tion or damage to the engine. If any of the
of appropriate cosolvents and corro- above symptoms are encountered, have
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu- Aftermarket fuel additives your vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealer
lated with appropriate cosolvents and or other competent service facility.
INFINITI does not recommend the use of
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol any aftermarket fuel additives (i.e. fuel in- However, now and then you may notice
blends may cause fuel system damage jector cleaner, octane booster, intake light spark knock for a short time while ac-
and/or vehicle performance problems. valve deposit removers, etc.) which are celerating or driving up hills. This is no
At this time, sufficient data is not avail- sold commercially. Many of these addi- cause for concern, because you get the
able to ensure that all methanol blends tives intended for gum, varnish or deposit greatest fuel benefit when there is light
are suitable for use in INFINITI vehicles. removal may contain active solvent or spark knock for a short time under heavy
If any driveability problems such as en- similar ingredients that can be harmful to engine load.
gine stalling and hard hot starting are ex- the fuel system and engine.
perienced after using oxygenate-blend fu- Octane rating tips
els, immediately change to a non-
oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
of MTBE. rating lower than recommended can cause
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Oil additives
INFINITI does not recommend the use of
oil additives. The use of an oil additive is
not necessary when the proper oil type is
used and maintenance intervals are fol-
lowed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or
has been previously used should not be
used.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness
changes with temperature. Because of
STI0367
this, it is important that the engine oil vis-
cosity be selected based on the tempera-
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER cation or International Lubricant Stan-
tures at which the vehicle will be oper-
RECOMMENDATION dardization and Approval Committee
ated before the next oil change. The rec-
(ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity
ommended SAE viscosity number chart
Selecting the correct oil standard. These oils have the API certifi-
shows the recommended oil viscosities
cation mark on the front of the container.
It is essential to choose the correct grade, for the expected ambient temperatures.
Oils which do not have the specified
quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure Choosing an oil viscosity other than that
quality label should not be used as they
satisfactory engine life and performance. recommended could cause serious engine
could cause engine damage.
See “Capacities and recommended damage.
fuel/lubricants” earlier in this section.
INFINITI recommends the use of an energy
conserving oil in order to improve fuel
economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
Selecting the correct oil filter O driving in dusty conditions RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY
Your new vehicle is equipped with a high- O extensive idling NUMBER
quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re- O towing a trailer
placing, use the genuine oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in O stop and go commuting
change intervals. Refer to the “INFINITI Service and Mainte-
nance Guide” for the maintenance sched-
Change intervals ule.
The oil and oil filter change intervals for
your engine are based on the use of the
specified quality oils and filters. Oil and
filter other than the specified quality, or
oil and filter change intervals longer than
recommended could reduce engine life.
Damage to engines caused by improper
maintenance or use of incorrect oil and
filter quality and/or viscosity is not cov-
ered by the new INFINITI vehicle limited
warranties.
Your engine was filled with a high quality
engine oil when it was built. You do not
have to change the oil before the first rec-
ommended change interval. Oil and filter
change intervals depend upon how you TI1028-C
use your vehicle. Operation under the fol-
lowing conditions may require more fre- SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all
quent oil and filter changes. ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30,
O repeated short distance driving at cold 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the am-
outside temperatures bient temperature is above 0°F (−18°C).
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Contact an INFINITI dealer when servicing
REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT your air conditioning system.
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioning system in this INFINITI
vehicle must be charged with the refrig-
erant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant,
Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or the exact
equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant
will cause severe damage to the air condi-
tioning system and will require the replace-
ment of all air conditioner system compo-
nents.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

INFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’s
ozone layer. Although this refrigerant
does not affect the earth’s atmosphere,
certain governmental regulations require
the recovery and recycling of any refriger-
ant during automotive air conditioning
system service. An INFINITI dealer has the
trained technicians and equipment
needed to recover and recycle your air
conditioning system refrigerant.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model VQ35DE
Type Gasoline, 4-cycle
Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60°
Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)
Displacement cu in (cm3) 213.45 (3,498)
Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6* TI0001-A
Idle speed rpm
See the emission control label on The spark ignition system of this vehicle
Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm meets all requirements of the Canadian
the underside of the hood.
CO percentage at idle speed [No air] % Interference-Causing Equipment Regula-
Standard PLFR5A-11 tions.
Spark plug
Service option PLFR4A-11, PLFR6A-11
Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Camshaft operation Timing chain
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Road wheel Sedan Coupe
Type Position Size Offset in (mm) Overall length in (mm) 186.9 (4,747) 182.2 (4,628)
— 17 x 7JJ 1.77 (45)
Sedan Aluminum Overall width in (mm) 69.0 (1,753) 71.5 (1,815)
— 18 x 7-1/2JJ 1.77 (45)
Front 17 x 7-1/2JJ 1.18 (30) 57.7 (1,467)*1 54.8 (1,393)
Rear 17 x 8JJ 1.30 (33) Overall height in (mm)
58.4 (1,484)*2 55.1 (1,399)*3
Front 18 x 8JJ 1.18 (30)
Coupe Aluminum 59.1 (1,500)*1
Rear 18 x 8JJ 1.18 (30) Front tread in (mm) 60.4 (1,535)
Front 19 x 8JJ 1.18 (30) 59.3 (1,505)*2
Rear 19 x 8-1/2JJ 1.30 (33)
60.6 (1,540)*4
Rear tread in (mm) 59.3 (1,505)
Tire 60.8 (1,545)*5
Type Position Size Pressure (Cold) Wheelbase in (mm) 112.2 (2,850) 112.2 (2,850)
— P215/55R17 93V 210 kPa (30 psi)
Conventional Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg)
— 235/45R18 94W 230 kPa (33 psi)
Sedan See the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
T145/80D17 420 kPa (60 psi) Gross axle weight rating
Spare — certification label on the driver’s
P215/55R17 93V*1 210 kPa (30 psi) Front lb (kg) side lock pillar.
Front P225/50R17 93V 210 kPa (30 psi)
Rear P235/50R17 95V 210 kPa (30 psi) Rear lb (kg)
Front 225/45R18 91W 240 kPa (35 psi) *1: For 2WD models
Conventional
Coupe Rear 245/45R18 96W 240 kPa (35 psi) *2: For AWD models
Front 225/40R19 89Y 240 kPa (35 psi) *3: For 18 in and 19 in road wheel models
*4: For models with road wheel size — 17 x 8JJ and 19 x 8-1/2JJ [offset 1.30 in (33
Rear 245/40R19 94Y 240 kPa (35 psi)
mm)]
Spare — T145/80D17 420 kPa (60 psi) *5: For models with road wheel size — 18 x 8JJ [offset 1.18 in (30 mm)]
*1: Option for USA, conventional for Canada (for models with tire size P215/55R17
93V)
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
When planning to travel in another
country, you should first find out if the
fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s
engine.
Using fuel with too low an octane rating
may cause engine damage. All gasoline
vehicles must be operated with unleaded
engine gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking
your vehicle to areas where appropriate
fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify
the vehicle to meet local laws and regula- STI0038 STI0302
tions.
The laws and regulations for motor ve-
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
hicle emission control and safety stan- (VIN) PLATE (Chassis number)
dards vary according to the country, The vehicle identification number plate is The number is stamped as shown.
state, province or district; therefore, ve- attached as shown. This number is the
hicle specifications may differ. identification for your vehicle and is used
When any vehicle is to be taken into an- in the vehicle registration.
other country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, trans-
portation, and registration are the respon-
sibility of the user. INFINITI is not respon-
sible for any inconvenience that may re-
sult.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
STI0303C STI0186B STI0330A
Sedan Coupe
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
The number is stamped on the engine as CERTIFICATION LABEL
shown. The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards (F.M.V.S.S.) or Canadian Motor Ve-
hicle Safety Standards (C.M.V.S.S.) certifi-
cation label is affixed as shown. This
label contains valuable vehicle informa-
tion, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR), month and year of manufacture,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc.
Review it carefully.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
STI0317 STI0368A STI0331A
Sedan Coupe
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL LABEL
The emission control information label is The cold tire pressures are shown on the
attached as shown. Tire and Loading Information label affixed
to the driver side center pillar.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
STI0306
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is
affixed inside of the hood as shown.
STI0332
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
Use the following steps to mount the li- 6. Insert a J-nut into the license plate
cense plate: bracket before placing the license WARNING
plate bracket on the fascia.
Before mounting the license plate, con-
firm that the following parts are enclosed 7. Install the license plate bracket with O It is extremely dangerous to ride in
in the vinyl bag. screws. a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In
O License plate bracket 8. Install the license plate with bolts that a collision, people riding in these
are no longer than 0.55 in (14 mm). areas are more likely to be seri-
O J-nut x 2
ously injured or killed.
O Screw x 2
O Do not allow people to ride in any
O Screw grommet x 2 area of your vehicle that is not
1. Temporarily place the license plate equipped with seats and seat
bracket and mark the pilot hole points belts.
qA using holes qB while aligning the
towing hook hole of the front bumper O Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
fascia. in a seat and using a seat belt
2. Remove the license plate bracket. properly.
3. Carefully drill two pilot holes q
A using
a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the TERMS
marked locations. (Be sure that the
drill only goes through the fascia, or
It is important to familiarize yourself
damage to the nut may occur.) with the following terms before loading
your vehicle:
4. Insert grommets into the hole on the
fascia. O Curb Weight (actual weight of your
5. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
grommet hole to turn part q C 90 de- standard and optional equipment,
grees. fluids, emergency tools, and spare
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
tire assembly. This weight does not O Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
include passengers and cargo. Total load capacity - maximum total
Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-
weight limit specified of the load
O GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb hicle shown as “The combined weight
(passengers and cargo) for the ve-
weight plus the combined weight of of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
hicle. This is the maximum com-
passengers and cargo. Loading Information label. Do not ex-
bined weight of occupants and
O GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) ceed the number of occupants shown
cargo that can be loaded into the ve-
- maximum total combined weight of as “Seating Capacity” on the Tire and
hicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, Loading Information label.
trailer, the trailer tongue weight
luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load must be included as part of the To get “the combined weight of occu-
and any other optional equipment. cargo load. This information is lo- pants and cargo”, add the weight of all
This information is located on the cated on the Tire and Loading Infor- occupants, then add the total luggage
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. mation label. weight to the value. Examples are
O GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - shown in the following illustration.
O Cargo capacity - permissible weight
maximum weight (load) limit speci- of cargo, the subtracted weight of
fied for the front or rear axle. This occupants from the load limit.
information is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.
O GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) - maximum total weight
rating of the vehicle, passengers,
cargo and trailer.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load ca-
pacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 x
150) = 650 lbs.) or (640 − 340 (5 x
70) = 300 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
STI0445 luggage and cargo being loaded on
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
the vehicle. That weight may not F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
safely exceed the available cargo label. O Overloading not only can shorten
and luggage load capacity calcu- the life of your vehicle and the tire,
O Do not load the front and rear axle but can also cause unsafe vehicle
lated in Step 4. to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed handling and longer braking dis-
6. If your vehicle will be towing a the GVWR. tances. This may cause a prema-
trailer, load from your trailer will be ture tire failure which could result
WARNING in a serious accident and personal
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
injury. Failures caused by over-
this manual to determine how this loading are not covered by the ve-
reduces the available cargo and lug- O Properly secure all cargo with hicle’s warranty.
gage load capacity of your vehicle. ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
place cargo higher than the seat-
that you do not exceed the Gross Ve- backs. In a sudden stop or colli- Secure loose items to prevent weight
hicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the shifts that could affect the balance of
sion, unsecured cargo could cause your vehicle. When the vehicle is
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for personal injury. loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the
your vehicle. See ‘‘Measurement of
O Do not load your vehicle any front and the rear wheels separately to
Weights’’ later in this section. determine axle loads. Individual axle
heavier than the GVWR or the
Also check tires for proper inflation maximum front and rear GAWRs. If loads should not exceed either of the
pressures. See the Tire and Loading In- gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The
you do, parts of your vehicle can
total of the axle loads should not ex-
formation label. break, tire damage could occur, or ceed the gross vehicle weight rating
it can change the way your vehicle (GVWR). These ratings are given on the
LOADING TIPS
handles. This could result in loss vehicle certification label. If weight rat-
O The GVW must not exceed GVWR or of control and cause personal ings are exceeded, move or remove
GAWR as specified on the injury. items to bring all weights below the rat-
ings.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
TOWING A TRAILER
this section. The total trailer load equals

Your engine, axle or other parts could be trailer weight plus its cargo weight.
damaged.
Towing loads greater than specified or us-
O For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you ing improper towing equipment could ad-
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph versely affect vehicle handling, braking
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full and performance. The ability of a vehicle
throttle. This helps the engine and other to tow a trailer is not only related to the
maximum trailer loads, but also the
parts of your vehicle wear in at the
places you plan to tow. Tow weights ap-
heavier loads. propriate for level highway driving may
have to be reduced on very steep grades
Your new vehicle was designed to be or in low traction situations (for example,
used primarily to carry passengers and on slippery boat ramps).
TI1011M cargo. Remember that towing a trailer will
place additional loads on a vehicle’s en- CAUTION
gine, drive train, steering, braking and
WARNING other systems. Vehicle damage resulting from improper
An INFINITI Towing Guide (U.S. only) is towing procedures are not covered by
Overloading or improper loading of a trailer available on the website at INFINITI warranties.
and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle www. infiniti.com. This guide includes in-
handling, braking and performance and may formation on trailer towing capability and
the special equipment required for proper Tongue load
lead to accidents.
towing. Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11%
of the total trailer load within the
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
CAUTION maximum tongue load limits shown in the
Maximum trailer loads following Towing Load/Specification
Chart. If the tongue load becomes exces-
O Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load Never allow the total trailer load to ex- sive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper
for the first 500 miles (800 km). ceed the value specified in the Towing tongue load.
Load/Specification Chart found later in
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION O Choose the proper class hitch ball
CHART based on the trailer weight.
O The diameter of the threaded shank of
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART
the hitch ball must be matched to the
Unit: lb (kg)
ball mount hole diameter. The hitch
MAXIMUM ball shank should be no more than
1,000 (454)
TOWING LOAD 1/160 smaller than the hole in the ball
mount.
MAXIMUM
100 (45.4) O The threaded shank of the hitch ball
TONGUE LOAD
must be long enough to be properly
TOWING SAFETY secured to the ball mount. There
should be at least 2 threads showing
Trailer hitch beyond the lock washer and nut.
TI1012M Choose a proper hitch for a vehicle and Class I hitch
trailer. Make sure the trailer hitch is se-
Maximum gross vehicle weight/ curely attached to the vehicle, to help Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver,
maximum gross axle weight avoid personal injury or property damage ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to
due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough tow trailers of a maximum weight of
The gross vehicle weight of the towing ve- road surfaces or passing trucks. 2,000 lb (909 kg).
hicle must not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) shown on the Hitch ball You may add Class I trailer hitch equip-
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. ment to the vehicle that has a 2,000 lb
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and (909 kg) maximum weight rating, but your
The gross vehicle weight equals the com-
weight rating for a trailer: vehicle is only capable of towing the
bined weight of the unloaded vehicle,
O The required hitch ball size is stamped maximum trailer weights shown in the
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue
on most trailer couplers. Most hitch Towing Load/Specification Chart earlier in
load and any other optional equipment. In this section.
addition, front or rear gross axle weight balls also have the size printed on top
must not exceed GAWR shown on the of the ball.
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Tire pressures
CAUTION O When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-
module/converter must be used to provide
power for all trailer lighting. This unit uses
O Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
hicle tires to the recommended cold the vehicle battery as a direct power source
tire pressure indicated on the Tire for all trailer lights while using the vehicle
O The hitch should not be attached to or af- and Loading Information label. tail light, stoplight and turn signal circuits
fect the operation of the impact- as a signal source. The module/converter
absorbing bumper. O Trailer tire condition, size, load must draw no more than 15 milliamps from
O Do not modify the vehicle exhaust rating and proper inflation pressure the stop and tail lamp circuits. Using a
system, brake system, etc. to install a should be in accordance with the module/converter that exceeds these power
trailer hitch. trailer and tire manufacturers’ speci- requirements may damage the vehicle’s
fications. electrical system. See a reputable trailer
O To reduce the possibility of additional dealer to obtain the proper equipment and to
damage if your vehicle is struck from the Safety chains have it installed.
rear, where practical, remove the hitch
and/or receiver when not in use. Always use a suitable chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. The safety Trailer lights should comply with federal
O After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt chains should be crossed and should be and/or local regulations. For assistance in
holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water or attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle hooking up trailer lights, contact an
dust from entering the passenger com- bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough INFINITI dealer or reputable trailer dealer.
partment. slack in the chains to permit turning cor-
ners. Trailer brakes
O Regularly check that all trailer hitch
Trailer lights If your trailer is equipped with a braking
mounting bolts are securely mounted. system, make sure it conforms to federal
and/or local regulations and that it is
CAUTION properly installed.
When splicing into the vehicle electrical sys-

tem, a commercially available power-type
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
tions. If not, install any mirrors required O Always block the wheels on both vehicle
WARNING for towing before driving the vehicle. and trailer when parking. Parking on a
slope is not recommended; however, if
Trailer towing tips you must do so, and if your vehicle is
Never connect a trailer brake system directly
to the vehicle brake system. In order to gain skill and an under- equipped with automatic transmission,
standing of the vehicle’s behavior, you first apply the parking brake and block
should practice turning, stopping and the wheels, and then move the transmis-
Pre-towing tips backing up in an area which is free from sion selector lever into the P (Park) posi-
traffic. Steering stability, and braking per- tion. If you move the selector lever to
O Be certain your vehicle maintains a formance will be somewhat different than the P (Park) position before applying the
level position when a loaded and/or under normal driving conditions. parking brake and blocking the wheels,
unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not transmission damage could occur.
drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal O Always secure items in the trailer to
nose-up or nose-down condition; prevent load shift while driving. O When going down a hill, shift into a
check for improper tongue load, over- lower gear and use the engine braking
load, worn suspension or other pos- O Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or effect. When going up a long grade,
sible causes of either condition. stops. downshift the transmission to a lower
gear and reduce speed to reduce
O Always secure items in the trailer to O Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
chances of engine overloading and/or
prevent load shifts while driving. O Always drive your vehicle at a mod- overheating.
O Load the trailer so approximately 60% erate speed. Some states or provinces However, for long steep grades, do
of the trailer load is in the front half have specific speed limits for vehicles not stay in 1st or 2nd gear when
and 40% is in the back half. that are towing trailers. Obey the local driving above 35 MPH (56 km/h).
speed limits.
O If the engine coolant rises to an ex-
O Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,
vehicle tire pressure, trailer light op- O When backing up, hold the bottom of tremely high temperature when the air
eration, and trailer wheel lug nuts the steering wheel with one hand. conditioning system is on, turn off the
every time you attach a trailer to the Move your hand in the direction in air conditioner. Coolant heat can be
vehicle. which you want the trailer to go. Make additionally vented by opening the
small corrections and back up slowly. windows, switching the fan control to
O Be certain your rear view mirrors con- If possible, have someone guide you high and setting the temperature con-
form to all federal, state or local regula- when you are backing up. trol to the HOT position.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
O Trailer towing requires more fuel than O Be careful when passing other vehicles. When towing a trailer, transmission
normal circumstances. Passing while towing a trailer requires oil/fluid should be changed more fre-
O Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 considerably more distance than normal quently.
miles (800 km). passing. Remember the length of the For additional information, see the “8.
trailer must also pass the other vehicle Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
O Have your vehicle serviced more often before you can safely change lanes. earlier in this manual.
than at intervals specified in the rec-
ommended maintenance schedule in O To maintain engine braking efficiency FLAT TOWING
the INFINITI Service and Maintenance and electrical charging performance,
Guide. do not use sixth gear (manual trans- Towing your vehicle with all four wheels
mission) or fifth position (automatic on the ground is sometimes called flat
O When making a turn, your trailer transmission). towing. This method is sometimes used
wheels will be closer to the inside of when towing a vehicle behind a recre-
the turn than your vehicle wheels. To O Avoid holding the brake pedal down
ational vehicle, such as a motor home.
compensate for this, make a larger too long or too frequently. This could
than normal turning radius during the cause the brakes to overheat, re-
turn. sulting in reduced braking efficiency. CAUTION
O Crosswinds and rough roads will ad- O Increase your following distance to al-
low for greater stopping distances O Failure to follow these guidelines can re-
versely affect vehicle/trailer handling,
possibly causing vehicle sway. When while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops sult in severe transmission damage.
being passed by larger vehicles, be and brake gradually. O Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-
prepared for possible changes in O Do not use cruise control while towing ways tow forward, never backward.
crosswinds that could affect vehicle a trailer.
handling. If swaying does occur, firmly O DO NOT tow any automatic transmission
grip the steering wheel, steer straight O Check your hitch, trailer wiring har- vehicle with all four wheels on the
ahead, and immediately (but gradu- ness connections, and trailer wheel ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL
ally) reduce vehicle speed. This combi- lug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) of DAMAGE internal transmission parts due
nation will help stabilize the vehicle. travel and at every break.
to lack of transmission lubrication.
Never increase speed. O When stopped in traffic for long pe-
riods of time in hot weather, put the
vehicle in the P (Park) position.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department Of Transportation) Qual- represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
O For emergency towing procedures refer ity Grades: All passenger car tires must pavement as measured under controlled
to “Towing recommended by INFINITI” in conform to federal safety requirements in conditions on specified government test
the “6. In case of emergency” section of addition to these grades. surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
this manual. marked C may have poor traction perfor-
Quality grades can be found where appli- mance.
cable on the tire sidewall between tread
Automatic transmission shoulder and maximum section width. For
WARNING
example:
To tow a vehicle equipped with an auto-
matic transmission, an appropriate ve- Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The traction grade assigned to this tire is
hicle dolly MUST be placed under the based on straight-ahead braking traction
towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always Treadwear
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
follow the dolly manufacturer’s recom- The treadwear grade is a comparative rat- nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
mendations when using their product. ing based on the wear rate of the tire acteristics.
Manual transmission when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
O Always tow with the manual transmis- For example, a tire graded 150 would wear Temperature A, B and C
sion in Neutral. one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on The temperature grades A (the highest),
O After towing 500 miles, start and idle the government course as a tire graded B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-
the engine with the transmission in 100. The relative performance of tires de- tance to the generation of heat and its
Neutral for two minutes. Failure to idle pends upon the actual conditions of their ability to dissipate heat when tested
the engine after every 500 miles of use, however, and may depart signifi- under controlled conditions on a specified
towing may cause damage to the cantly from the norm due to variations in indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
transmission’s internal parts. driving habits, service practices and dif- high temperature can cause the material
ferences in road characteristics and cli- of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
mate. life, and excessive temperature can lead
Traction AA, A, B and C to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
sponds to a level of performance which
The traction grades, from highest to all passenger car tires must meet under
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only)
109. Grades B and A represent higher lev- Your INFINITI is covered by the following If you believe that your vehicle has a
els of performance on the laboratory test emission warranties. defect which could cause a crash or
wheel than the minimum required by law.
For US: could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
WARNING O Emission Defects Warranty
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
O Emissions Performance Warranty
The temperature grade for this tire is estab- (See Warranty Information Booklet for
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
details.) INFINITI.
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, under- For Canada: If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa- may open an investigation, and if it
rately or in combination, can cause heat Emission Control System Warranty finds that a safety defect exists in a
build-up and possible tire failure. Details of these warranties may be found group of vehicles, it may order a recall
with other vehicle warranties in your War- and remedy campaign. However,
ranty Information Booklet (Warranty and NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-
Roadside Assistance Information (Canada vidual problems between you, your
only)) that comes with your INFINITI. If you dealer, or INFINITI.
did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet (Warranty and Roadside Assis- To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-
tance Information (Canada only)), or it has hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
become lost, you may obtain a replace- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153): go to
ment by writing to: http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
O INFINITI Division Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Nissan North America, Inc. Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
Consumer Affairs Department You can also obtain other information
P.O. Box 47038, Gardena, CA 90247- about motor vehicle safety from
6838 http://www.safercar.gov.
O Nissan Canada Inc. You may notify INFINITI by contacting
5290 Orbitor Drive our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5 free, at 1-800-662-6200.
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)
A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive switch ON without starting the engine. If 3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal
(AWD) should never be tested using a two the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) for a moment, then drive the vehicle at
wheel dynamometer (such as the dyna- comes on steady for 20 seconds and then a speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96
mometers used by some states for emis- blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test condi- km/h) for at least 9 minutes.
sions testing), or similar equipment. Make tion is “not ready”. If the MIL does not 4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine
sure you inform test facility personnel blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi- running.
that your vehicle is equipped with AWD tion is “ready”. If the MIL indicates the
before it is placed on a dynamometer. Us- vehicle is in a “not ready” condition, drive 5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55
ing the wrong test equipment may result the vehicle through the following pattern km/h) and maintain the speed for 20
in transmission damage or unexpected to set the vehicle to the ready condition. seconds.
vehicle movement which could result in If you cannot or do not want to perform 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times.
serious vehicle damage or personal in- the driving pattern, an INFINITI dealer can
conduct it for you. 7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88
jury.
km/h) and maintain the speed for at
Due to legal requirements in some states/ least 3 minutes.
areas, your vehicle may be required to be
WARNING
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the automatic
in what is called the “ready condition” for transmission selector lever in the “P”
an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of Always drive the vehicle in a safe and pru-
or “N” position or the manual trans-
the emission control system. dent manner according to traffic conditions
mission shift lever in the “N” position.
and obey all traffic laws.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” 9. Turn the engine off.
when it is driven through certain driving
patterns. Usually, the “ready condition” 1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to 10. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one
can be obtained by ordinary usage of the idle until the engine coolant tempera- more time.
vehicle. ture gauge needle points between the If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat
C and H (normal operating tempera- the preceding step. Any safe driving mode
If a powertrain system component is re-
ture). is acceptable between steps. Do not stop
paired or the battery is disconnected, the
vehicle may be reset to a not “ready con- 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 the engine until step 7 is completed.
dition”. Before taking the I/M test, check km/h), then quickly release the accel-
the vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test erator pedal completely and keep it re-
readiness condition. Turn the ignition leased for at least 10 seconds.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
EVENT DATA RECORDERS OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL
ORDER INFORMATION
Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of Special equipment can be used to access A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is the
computers that monitor and control a the electronic data that may be stored in best source of service and repair informa-
number of systems to optimize perfor- the vehicle’s computers (sounds are not tion for your vehicle. Filled with wiring
mance and help service technicians with recorded). INFINITI and INFINITI dealers diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step
diagnosis and repair. Some of the com- have equipment to access some of this diagnostic and adjustment procedures,
puters monitor emission control systems, data; others may also have this equip- this manual is the same one used by the
braking systems, engine systems, trans- ment. The data may be retrieved during factory trained technicians working at an
mission systems, tire pressure systems, routine vehicle servicing or for special re- INFINITI dealer. Also available are genuine
and air bag systems. Some data about ve- search. It might also be accessed with the INFINITI Owner’s Manuals, and genuine
hicle operation may be stored in the com- consent of the vehicle owner or lessee, in INFINITI Service and Owner’s Manuals for
puters for use during servicing. Other response to a request by law enforce- older INFINITI models.
data may be stored if a crash event oc- ment, or as otherwise required or permit-
curs. For example, vehicle speed, brake ted by law. In the USA:
application, steering angle, air bag readi- For current pricing and availability of
ness, air bag performance, and seat belt genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the
use by the driver or passenger may be re- 2000 model year and later, contact:
corded. These types of systems are some-
times called Event Data Recorders. Tweddle Litho Company
1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of
genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the
1999 model year and prior, see an INFINITI
dealer, or contact:
Resolve Corporation
20770 Westwood Road
Strongsville, OH 44136
1-800-247-5321
For current pricing and availability of
genuine INFINITI Owner’s Manuals for this
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
model year and prior, see an INFINITI Insist on the use of Genuine Why should you take a chance?
dealer, or contact: INFINITI Collision Parts! In over 40 states, the law says you must
Resolve Corporation be advised if non-genuine parts are used
If you want your vehicle to be restored
20770 Westwood Road to repair your vehicle. And some
Strongsville, OH 44136 using parts made to INFINITI’s original ex-
acting specifications — if you want to states/provinces have enacted laws that
1-800-247-5321 restrict insurance companies from autho-
help it to last and hold its resale value,
In Canada: rizing the use of non-genuine collision
the solution is simple. Tell your insurance
parts during the new vehicle warranty.
To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITI agent and your repair shop to only use These laws help protect you, so you can
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual please Genuine INFINITI Collision Parts. INFINITI take action to protect yourself.
contact an INFINITI dealer. For the phone does not warrant non-INFINITI parts, nor
number and location of an INFINITI dealer does INFINITI’s warranty apply to damage It’s your right!
in your area call the INFINITI Satisfaction caused by a non-genuine parts.
If you should need further information
Center at 1-800-361-4792 and a bilingual visit us at:
Using Genuine INFINITI Parts can help pro-
INFINITI representative will assist you.
tect your personal safety, preserve your www.infiniti.com (for U.S. customers) or
Also available are genuine INFINITI Ser- warranty protection and maintain the re- www.infiniti.ca (for Canadian customers)
vice and Owner’s Manuals for older sale value of your vehicle. And if your ve-
INFINITI models. hicle was leased, using Genuine INFINITI
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION Parts may prevent or limit unnecessary
excess wear and tear expenses at the end
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this of your lease.
unlikely event, there is some important
information you should know. Many insur- INFINITI designs its hoods with crumple
ance companies routinely authorize the zones to minimize the risk that the hood
use of non-genuine collision parts in will penetrate the windshield of your ve-
order to cut costs, among other reasons. hicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imita-
tion) parts may not provide such built-in
safety features. Also, non-genuine parts
often show premature wear, rust and cor-
rosion.
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
MEMO
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
10 Index
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .......................... 5-26 Belts (See drive belts)...................................... 8-19
A
Anti-lock brake warning light ........................... 2-10 Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System ............. 4-30
Appearance care Booster seats ................................................... 1-31
ABS (Anti-lock brake system) ........................... 5-26
Exterior appearance care............................. 7-2 Brake
Advanced air bag system ................................. 1-42
Interior appearance care ............................. 7-4 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .................... 5-26
Air bag system
Armrest Brake and clutch fluid ............................... 8-14
Front (See INFINITI advanced air bag
system) ..................................................... 1-42 Rear armrest pocket.................................. 2-37 Brake booster ........................................... 8-24
Side and curtain (See supplemental side Ashtray (See cigarette lighter and ashtray) ...... 2-30 Brake fluid ................................................ 8-14
air bag and curtain side-impact air bag Audible reminders............................................ 2-16 Brake pedal .............................................. 8-23
systems) ................................................... 1-48 Audio operation precautions ............................ 4-16 Brake pedal check .................................... 8-23
Front passenger air bag and status light ... 1-44 Audio system ................................................... 4-14 Brake system ............................................ 5-26
Air bag warning labels ...................................... 1-51 Steering wheel switch for audio control.... 4-28 Parking brake check ......................... 5-19, 8-23
Air bag warning light................................ 1-51, 2-14 Autochanger Parking brake operation ............................ 5-19
Compact Disc (CD) .................................... 4-25 Warning light ............................................ 2-10
Air cleaner housing filter ................................. 8-20
Autolight system.............................................. 2-22 Break-in schedule ............................................ 5-22
Air conditioner
Automatic Brightness control, Instrument panel ............... 2-24
Air conditioner operation........................... 4-10
Anti-glare inside mirror ............................. 3-32
Air conditioner service ...................... 4-10, 4-14 Bulb check/instrument panel............................. 2-9
Automatic adjusting function ..................... 2-41
Air conditioner specification label ............. 9-13 Bulb replacement ............................................. 8-31
Automatic sunroof..................................... 2-42
Air conditioning system refrigerant
and lubricant recommendations ......... 4-14, 9-7 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)............. 8-13
Ambient temperature................................. 4-13 Drive positioner ........................................ 3-34 C
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) ...... 4-10 Driving with automatic transmission ... 5-6, 5-12
In-cabin microfilter .................................... 4-13 Avoiding collision and rollover ........................... 5-5 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .... 9-2
Alcohol, drugs and driving ................................. 5-5 Car phone or CB radio ..................................... 4-29
All-wheel drive (AWD)....................................... 5-23 B Card holder ..................................................... 2-38
All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light ................... 2-9 CD care and cleaning....................................... 4-27
Anchor point locations Battery............................................................. 8-16 Child restraints................................................. 1-18
Top tether strap......................................... 1-27 Battery saver system................................. 2-23 Booster seats............................................. 1-31
Antenna........................................................... 4-29 Before starting the engine................................ 5-10 Installation on front passenger seat .......... 1-28
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
Installation on rear seat outboard or Corrosion protection .......................................... 7-5 Capacities and recommended fuel/
center positions ........................................ 1-20 Cruise control .................................................. 5-20 lubricants ................................................... 9-2
Precautions on child restraints .................. 1-18 Cup holder....................................................... 2-32 Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-9
Top tether strap anchor point locations ..... 1-27 Curtain side-impact air bag system (See Changing engine oil and filter.................... 8-11
Child safety ...................................................... 1-12 supplemental side air bag and curtain Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-8
Child safety rear door lock................................. 3-5 side-impact air bag systems) ........................... 1-48 Checking engine oil level .......................... 8-10
Chimes Coolant temperature gauge......................... 2-4
Audible reminders ..................................... 2-16 D Engine block heater .................................. 5-32
Seat belt warning light and chime............. 2-13 Engine compartment check locations .......... 8-7
Cigarette lighter and ashtray ........................... 2-30 Daytime running light system .......................... 2-24 Engine cooling system................................ 8-8
Circuit breaker, Fusible link............................. 8-26 Defroster switch, Rear window and outside Engine oil.................................................. 8-10
mirror defroster switch .................................... 2-20 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation..... 9-5
Cleaning exterior and interior ..................... 7-2, 7-4
Dimensions and weights ................................... 9-9 Engine oil viscosity ..................................... 9-5
Clock ............................................................... 2-29
Display controls (See control panel buttons), Engine serial number ................................. 9-11
Clutch fluid ...................................................... 8-14 With navigation system ..................................... 4-2
Coat hook........................................................ 2-38 Engine specifications .................................. 9-8
Door open warning light ................................... 2-11 If your vehicle overheats............................ 6-11
Cold weather driving........................................ 5-30 Door Pockets.................................................... 2-31 Starting the engine .................................... 5-11
Command (See Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Drive belts ....................................................... 8-19 Entry/exit function, Automatic drive
System) ........................................................... 4-36 Drive positioner, Automatic.............................. 3-34 positioner ........................................................ 3-34
Compact Disc (CD) changer operation .............. 4-25 Driving Event data recorders........................................ 9-26
Compass display ............................................... 2-6 All-wheel drive (AWD) safety precautions .... 5-6 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)......................... 5-2
Console box .................................................... 2-36 Cold weather driving ................................. 5-30
Control panel buttons (models with navigation Driving with automatic transmission ... 5-6, 5-12
system) ............................................................. 4-2 Driving with manual transmission ....... 5-7, 5-16 F
Controls Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2
Control panel buttons (display with F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........... 9-11
navigation system)...................................... 4-2 Filter
Heater and air conditioner controls E Air cleaner housing filter .......................... 8-20
(automatic)................................................ 4-10 Changing engine oil and filter.................... 8-11
Steering wheel audio controls .................. 4-28 Economy, Fuel.................................................. 5-22 Flashers (See hazard warning flasher
Coolant Emission control information label ................... 9-12 switch)............................................................. 2-25
Capacities and recommended fuel/ Emission control system warranty ................... 9-24 Flat tire.............................................................. 6-2
lubricants ................................................... 9-2 Engine Flat tire, Tire pressure monitoring system
Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-9 Before starting the engine ......................... 5-10 (TPMS) ............................................................... 5-3
Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-8 Break-in schedule ..................................... 5-22 Flat towing....................................................... 9-22
10-2
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
Floor mat cleaning ............................................. 7-4 Gauge................................................................ 2-3
I
Fluid Engine coolant temperature gauge.............. 2-4
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)............. 8-13 Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-5
Ignition switch
Brake and clutch fluid ............................... 8-14 Odometer.................................................... 2-3
Speedometer .............................................. 2-3 (except Intelligent Key system) ................... 5-6
Brake fluid ................................................ 8-14
Tachometer................................................. 2-4 Automatic transmission models .......... 5-6, 5-12
Capacities and recommended fuel/
General maintenance......................................... 8-2 Key positions .............................................. 5-8
lubricants ................................................... 9-2
Glove box ........................................................ 2-35 Manual transmission models .............. 5-7, 5-16
Engine coolant............................................ 8-8
Glove box (upper) ............................................ 2-35 Immobilizer system .......................................... 2-18
Engine oil.................................................. 8-10
Power steering fluid .................................. 8-13 Glove box lock ................................................. 2-35 In-cabin microfilter ........................................... 4-13
Window washer fluid ................................. 8-15 Golf bag stowing ............................................. 2-39 Indicator lights................................................. 2-14
FM-AM-SATELLITE radio with compact disc (CD) INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
changer ........................................................... 4-22 H Engine start........................................ 5-8, 5-10
Fog light switch ............................................... 2-25 Inside
Front passenger air bag and status light.......... 1-44 Hands-Free Phone System, Bluetooth ............ 4-30 Automatic anti-glare mirror ....................... 3-32
Front power seat adjustment.............................. 1-2 Hazard warning flasher switch ......................... 2-25 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ................... 9-25
Fuel Head restraints .................................................. 1-8 Instrument brightness control.......................... 2-24
Capacities and recommended fuel/ Headlights Instrument panel ............................................... 2-2
lubricants ................................................... 9-2 Bulb replacement...................................... 8-33 Instrument pocket ............................................ 2-31
Fuel economy ............................................ 5-22 Headlight switch........................................ 2-21 Intelligent Key system
Fuel economy information (display) ............ 4-4 Xenon headlights ...................................... 2-21 Engine starting .......................................... 3-14
Fuel-filler cap ............................................ 3-28 Heated seats ................................................... 2-26 Key operating range .................................. 3-16
Fuel-filler door .......................................... 3-28 Heater Key operation............................................. 3-11
Fuel octane rating ....................................... 9-3 Engine block heater .................................. 5-32 Mechanical key and valet key ................... 3-23
Fuel recommendation.................................. 9-3 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) ...... 4-10 Operating the engine................................. 3-14
Gauge ......................................................... 2-5 HomeLink Universal Transceiver .................... 2-46 Remote keyless operation ......................... 3-20
Fuses............................................................... 8-25 Hood release ................................................... 3-24 Trouble-shooting guide.............................. 3-19
Fusible links .................................................... 8-26 Hook, Coat hook.............................................. 2-38 Warning light............................................. 2-12
Horn ................................................................ 2-26 Warning signals......................................... 3-17
G How to stop alarm, Vehicle security ................. 2-18 Intelligent Key warning light............................. 2-12
Interior light replacement ................................ 8-33
Garage door opener, HomeLink Universal Interior lights .................................................. 2-44
Transceiver ...................................................... 2-46 Interior trunk lid release .................................. 3-27
Gas cap ........................................................... 3-28 ISOFIX child restraint........................................ 1-25
10-3
w 06.1.5/V35-D/V5.0 X
Map lights ................................................ 2-44 Map lights ....................................................... 2-44
J
Personal lights .......................................... 2-45 Mechanical key (for Intelligent Key system) ..... 3-23
Replacement.............................................. 8-31 Memory storage, Automatic drive positioner .... 3-35
Jump starting .................................................... 6-8
Room light ................................................ 2-44 Meters and gauges............................................ 2-3
Trunk light ................................................ 2-46 Meters and gauges, Instrument brightness
K Vanity mirror light..................................... 2-46 control............................................................. 2-24
Warning/indicator lights and audible Mirror
Keyless entry reminders........................................... 2-9, 2-14 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror ............. 3-32
With Intelligent Key system (See Xenon headlights ...................................... 2-21 Outside mirror control............................... 3-33
Intelligent Key system).............................. 3-20 Lights, Exterior and interior light Outside mirrors......................................... 3-33
Without Intelligent Key system (See remote replacement..................................................... 8-33
keyless entry system).................................. 3-5 Loading information (See vehicle loading N
Keys .................................................................. 3-2 information) ..................................................... 9-14
Lock New vehicle break-in........................................ 5-22
Door locks .................................................. 3-3
L
Glove box lock .......................................... 2-35
Power door lock.......................................... 3-3 O
Labels
Trunk lid ................................................... 3-25
Air bag warning labels ............................... 1-51 Odometer .......................................................... 2-3
Low fuel warning light...................................... 2-12
Air conditioner specification label ............. 9-13 Oil
Low tire pressure warning light ........................ 2-12
Emission control information label ............ 9-12 Capacities and recommended fuel/
Engine serial number ................................. 9-11 lubricants ................................................... 9-2
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label..... 9-11 M Changing engine oil and filter.................... 8-11
Tire and Loading Information label ............ 9-12 Checking engine oil level .......................... 8-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) ........... 9-10 Maintenance Engine oil.................................................. 8-10
LATCH (Lower Anthors and Tethers for Battery ...................................................... 8-16 Engine oil viscosity ..................................... 9-5
CHildren) system .............................................. 1-25 General maintenance .................................. 8-2 Operating the engine (Intelligent Key
License plate, Installing front license plate ...... 9-13 Inside the vehicle ....................................... 8-4 system) ............................................................ 3-14
Light Maintenance information (display) .............. 4-5 Outside mirror control ..................................... 3-33
Air bag warning light.................................. 1-51 Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-5 Outside mirrors................................................ 3-33
Bulb replacement ...................................... 8-31 Maintenance requirements.......................... 8-2 Overheat, If your vehicle overheats................... 6-11
Fog light switch......................................... 2-25 Outside the vehicle..................................... 8-3 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
Headlight switch........................................ 2-21 Seat belt maintenance ............................... 1-17 information...................................................... 9-26
Headlights Bulb replacement .................... 8-33 Under the hood and vehicle ....................... 8-4
Interior lights............................................ 2-44 Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ...................... 2-15
10-4
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Seat adjustment
P R
Front power seat adjustment ....................... 1-2
Rear seat adjustment................................... 1-5
Parking Radio
Seat belt(s)
Brake check .............................................. 8-23 Car phone or CB radio .............................. 4-29 Child safety................................................ 1-12
Parking brake check .................................. 5-19 Steering wheel switch for audio control.... 4-28 Infants ....................................................... 1-12
Parking brake operation ............................ 5-19 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) Injured persons.......................................... 1-13
Parking on hills ......................................... 5-19 test (US only)................................................... 9-25 Larger children........................................... 1-13
Parking/parking on hills .................................. 5-24 Rear active steer (RAS) system......................... 5-29 Precautions on seat belt usage ................... 1-9
Personal lights................................................. 2-45 Rear armrest pocket......................................... 2-37 Pregnant women ........................................ 1-13
Phone
Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock ........ 3-5 Pre-tensioner seat belt system .................. 1-50
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System ...... 4-30
Rear power point ............................................. 2-29 Seat belt cleaning ....................................... 7-5
Car phone or CB radio .............................. 4-29
Rear seat adjustment ......................................... 1-5 Seat belt extenders.................................... 1-17
Power
Rear window and outside mirror defroster Seat belt maintenance ............................... 1-17
Front seat adjustment ................................. 1-2
switch.............................................................. 2-20 Seat belts.................................................... 1-9
Power door lock.......................................... 3-3
Recorders, Event data...................................... 9-26 Seat belt warning light .............................. 2-13
Power outlet ............................................. 2-29
Registering your vehicle in another country ..... 9-10 Shoulder belt guide ................................... 1-17
Power steering fluid .................................. 8-13
Remote keyless entry system Shoulder belt height adjustment................ 1-16
Power steering system .............................. 5-25
Except Intelligent Key system...................... 3-5 Small children............................................ 1-12
Power windows ......................................... 2-39
For Intelligent Key system......................... 3-20 Three-point type with retractor................... 1-13
Precautions
Reporting safety defects (US only)................... 9-24 Seat(s)
All-wheel drive (AWD) driving safety............ 5-6
Roadside assistance program ............................ 6-2 Driver-side memory ................................... 3-34
Audio operation......................................... 4-16
Rollover ............................................................. 5-5 Heated seats............................................. 2-26
Braking precautions .................................. 5-26
Room light....................................................... 2-44 Seats........................................................... 1-2
Child restraints .......................................... 1-18
Secondary trunk lid release ............................. 3-27
Cruise control ........................................... 5-20
S Security system, Vehicle security system ......... 2-17
Maintenance ............................................... 8-5
Security systems (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer
Seat belt usage ........................................... 1-9
Safety System), Engine start ....................................... 2-18
Supplemental restraint system .................. 1-36
Child seat belts.......................................... 1-12 Security systems (See vehicle security
When starting and driving........................... 5-2 system) ............................................................ 2-17
Push starting ................................................... 6-10 Reporting safety defects (US only) ............ 9-24
Selector lever, Shift lock release ...................... 5-15
Towing safety ............................................ 9-19
Servicing air conditioner.......................... 4-10, 4-14
Seat
Shift lock release, Transmission ....................... 5-15
Belt warning light........................................ 1-9
Belt warning light and chime..................... 2-13
10-5
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Shifting Supplemental restraint system......................... 1-36 Tire
Automatic transmission ...................... 5-6, 5-12 Precautions on supplemental restraint Flat tire....................................................... 6-2
Manual transmission .......................... 5-7, 5-16 system ...................................................... 1-36 Pressure, Low tire pressure warning
Shoulder belt guide .......................................... 1-17 Supplemental side and curtain side-impact light .......................................................... 2-12
air bag systems ............................................... 1-48 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ..... 5-3
Shoulder belt height adjustment ...................... 1-16
Switch Uniform tire quality grading ...................... 9-23
Side air bag system (See supplemental side
Autolight switch ........................................ 2-22 Tires
air bag and curtain side-impact air bag
systems) .......................................................... 1-48 Fog light switch......................................... 2-25 Spare tire ................................................. 8-48
Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 2-25 Tire and Loading Information label ............ 9-12
SNOW mode switch ......................................... 2-27
Headlight switch........................................ 2-21 Tire chains................................................ 8-44
Spark plugs ..................................................... 8-19
Ignition switch (except Intelligent Key Tire dressing ............................................... 7-3
Speedometer ..................................................... 2-3 system)....................................................... 5-6 Tire pressure............................................. 8-37
Starting Ignition switch automatic transmission Tire pressure monitoring system
Before starting the engine ......................... 5-10 models ............................................... 5-6, 5-12 (TPMS) ................................................. 5-3, 6-2
Jump starting.............................................. 6-8 Ignition switch manual transmission Tire rotation .............................................. 8-45
Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2 models ............................................... 5-7, 5-16 Types of tires............................................ 8-43
Push starting............................................. 6-10 Power door lock switch............................... 3-4 Wheel/tire size ........................................... 9-9
Starting the engine .................................... 5-11 Rear window and outside mirror defroster Wheels and tires....................................... 8-37
Status light, Front passenger air bag ............... 1-44 switch....................................................... 2-20
Top tether strap child restraints....................... 1-26
Steering Steering wheel switch for audio control.... 4-28
Towing
Power steering fluid .................................. 8-13 Turn signal switch..................................... 2-24
Flat towing................................................ 9-22
Power steering system .............................. 5-25 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
Tow truck towing ....................................... 6-12
Rear active steer (RAS) system.................. 5-29 switch....................................................... 2-28
Towing a trailer ......................................... 9-18
Steering wheel switch for audio
Towing load/specification chart................. 9-18
controls .................................................... 4-28
T Towing safety ............................................ 9-19
Tilting steering wheel................................ 3-30
TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system ............. 5-3
Storage ............................................................ 2-31 Tachometer........................................................ 2-4 Trailer towing................................................... 9-18
Stowing golf bags............................................ 2-39 Temperature gauge, Engine coolant Transceiver, HomeLink Universal
Sun shade ....................................................... 2-42 temperature gauge ............................................ 2-4 Transceiver ...................................................... 2-46
Sun visors ....................................................... 3-32 Theft (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System), Transmission
Sunglasses holder ........................................... 2-32 Engine start ..................................................... 2-18 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)............. 8-13
Sunroof ........................................................... 2-42 Three way catalyst ............................................. 5-3 Driving with automatic transmission ... 5-6, 5-12
Automatic sunroof..................................... 2-42 Tilting steering wheel ...................................... 3-30 Driving with manual transmission ....... 5-7, 5-16
Supplemental air bag warning labels ................ 1-51
Transmission selector lever lock release .... 5-15
Supplemental air bag warning light.......... 1-51, 2-14
10-6
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
Transmitter Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle).............. 6-15 Weights (See dimensions and weights) ............. 9-9
With Intelligent Key system (See Security system ......................................... 2-17 Wheel/tire size .................................................. 9-9
Intelligent Key system).............................. 3-20 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off Wheels and tires.............................................. 8-37
Without Intelligent Key system (See remote switch....................................................... 2-28 Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels ................. 7-3
keyless entry system).................................. 3-5 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system...... 5-28 Wheels, Rear active steer (RAS) system ........... 5-29
Traveling or registering your vehicle in another Ventilators......................................................... 4-9 Window washer fluid........................................ 8-15
country ............................................................ 9-10 Window(s)
Voice command (See Bluetooth Hands-Free
Trip computer information (display) ................... 4-5 Automatic adjusting function ..................... 2-41
Phone System) ................................................ 4-36
Troubleshooting guide Cleaning ..................................................... 7-3
Audio system............................................ 4-20 Power windows ......................................... 2-39
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System ....... 4-41 W Windshield wiper and washer switch ............... 2-19
Intelligent Key system .............................. 3-19 Wiper
Trunk Walk-in mechanism............................................ 1-4
Windshield wiper and washer switch......... 2-19
Interior trunk lid release ........................... 3-27 Warning labels, Air bag warning labels ............. 1-51
Wiper blades ............................................. 8-21
Light ......................................................... 2-46 Warning light
Secondary trunk lid release ...................... 3-27 Air bag warning light ......................... 1-51, 2-14
Trunk lid ................................................... 3-25 All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light ............ 2-9 X
Turn signal switch ........................................... 2-24 Anti-lock brake warning light..................... 2-10
Brake warning light ................................... 2-10 Xenon headlights ............................................. 2-21
Door open warning light ............................ 2-11
U
Intelligent Key warning light...................... 2-12
Low fuel warning light ............................... 2-12
Underbody cleaning........................................... 7-3
Low tire pressure warning light ................. 2-12
Uniform tire quality grading............................. 9-23
Seat belt warning light and chime............. 2-13
Up-shift indicator (MT models).......................... 5-17
Warning lights ................................................... 2-9
Up-shift indicator setting (MT models) ............... 2-3
Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch .......... 2-25
Warning, Tire pressure monitoring system
V (TPMS)........................................................ 5-3, 6-2
Warning, Warning/indicator lights and audible
Valet key (for Intelligent Key system)............... 3-23 reminders .......................................................... 2-9
Vanity mirror light ........................................... 2-46 Warranty, Emission control system warranty.... 9-24
Vehicle Washer switch, Windshield wiper and washer
Dimensions and weights............................. 9-9 switch .............................................................. 2-19
Identification number (VIN)........................ 9-10 Washing ............................................................ 7-2
Loading information .................................. 9-14 Waxing .............................................................. 7-2
10-7
w 06.1.13/V35-D/V5.0 X
MEMO
10-8
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION: However, for maximum vehicle perfor- O API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I
mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso- & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Con-
Sedan models line is recommended. serving
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- O ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III
tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock CAUTION
O SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for
Index) number (Research octane number all ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30
91). O Using a fuel other than that specified viscosity oil may be used for ambient
could adversely affect the emission con- temperatures above 0°F (−18°C).
For improved vehicle performance,
trol system, and may also affect the war-
INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded See “Capacities and recommended fuel/
ranty coverage.
premium gasoline with an octane rating of lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con-
at least 91 AKI number (Research octane O Under no circumstances should a leaded sumer information” section for engine oil
number 96). gasoline be used, because this will dam- and oil filter recommendation.
Coupe models age the three-way catalyst. COLD TIRE PRESSURES:
O Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your See Tire and Loading Information label af-
Use unleaded premium gasoline with an
octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti- vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 fixed to the inside of the driver side
Knock Index) number (Research octane fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel center pillar.
number 96). system components and is not covered
by the INFINITI vehicle limited warranty. NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN
If premium gasoline is not available, un- PROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:
leaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of 87 AKI number (Research octane For additional information, see “Capaci- During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
ties and recommended fuel/lubricants” in vehicle use, follow the recommendations
number 91) may be temporarily used, but
the “9. Technical and consumer informa- outlined in the “Break-in schedule” Infor-
only under the following precautions:
tion” section. mation found in the “5. Starting and driv-
O Have the fuel tank filled only partially ing” section of this Owner’s Manual.
with unleaded regular gasoline, and ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION: Follow these recommendations for the fu-
fill up with unleaded premium gaso- ture reliability and economy of your new
O API Certification Mark
line as soon as possible. vehicle.
O Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration.
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X
QUICK REFERENCE
1. Engine oil 8-10

2. Meters and gauges 2-3
3. Hood release 3-24
4. Seat 1-2
5. Seat belt 1-9
6. Key 3-2
7. Spare tire 6-4, 8-48
8. Fuel 3-28, 9-2
9. Audio system 4-14
Heater and air conditioner 4-10
10. Battery 8-16
11. Engine coolant 8-8
12. Windshield washer fluid 8-15
STI0408
w 06.1.4/V35-D/V5.0 X

Infiniti 2006-G35 Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Infiniti 2006-G35 Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Infiniti 2006-G35 Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Foreword

Arrows in an illustration that are similar

Arrows in an illustration that are similar

© 2005 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4

Starting and driving 5

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8

Technical and consumer information 9

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

9. Center display - Compass, Air condi-

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

1. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-9)

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward and backward Reclining Seat lifter (Driver’s seat)

WARNING 2. Unlock the trunk access window lid

Coupe: To return the seatback:

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

Children need adults to help protect them.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

Shoulder belt height adjustment

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

O If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Some child restraints include two rigid or

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If your child restraint has a top tether

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

6. Check that the retractor is in the auto- PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

O Make sure the child’s head will be

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL These supplemental restraint systems are

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0007 SSS0009 SSS0100

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

window or lean against the door. Some